How do you improve quality control in production? Bench scales are your best friend. Let’s take a dive into what bench scales are, why they’re essential for production quality control, and how they can help improve your workflow.

What is a Bench Scale?

Bench scale is a blanket term for any higher-capacity scale that’s compact enough to be used on a tabletop. Bench scales, especially bench scales with a checkweighing function, are really versatile, meeting the demands of many industries, including production quality control.

Checkweighing is the ability for you to set high and low weight limits on your weighing scale. The scale will then indicate (whether it’s with a beep, colour-changing display or lights) whenever the weight of the object on the pan is more than, within or lower than those weight limits. Checkweighing is excellent for quality control because it helps keep products within specifications.

Why Weighing Scales are Essential for Production Quality Control

From the production of individual pieces to packaging, weighing scales are a crucial component of the quality control process.

Weighing scales help production quality control by:

• Being maneuverable between production lines, so they can be multi-use
• Weighing raw materials to ensure they’re ready to move on to the next stage of production
• Checking products throughout production to guarantee they’re consistently on the right track
• Guaranteeing that final products meet legal guidelines and requirements
• Recording your weighing results for your records, keeping your quality control traceable

How Bench Scales Help Improve Production Quality Control

Bench scales are particularly ideal for production quality control purposes, which is performed at multiple different stages in the production process. Let’s go deeper into how bench scales improve quality control in those stages.

Portable

One of the major benefits of bench scales to a quality control line is their portability. This is due both to their small size and their internal rechargeable batteries. Being able to move a bench scale to different locations reduces the need for multiple machines, especially if shifts are staggered.

Weighing Raw Materials

Your raw materials have a significant impact on how the final product turns out. Bench scales can help guarantee that your raw materials meet your weight specifications, so they can head to the next stage of production.  

For example, a screw starts out as a bar of steel alloy, which is then cut to size. Once the size and shape are correct, the weight plays a crucial part – if the steel alloy doesn’t weigh what it should, it could indicate structural problems that would make it unsuitable for its final intended use, like inconsistent material density, surface defects or inclusions.

This can be applied to batch-production, as well. To make 50 bags of coffee, you need to have enough paper or plastic to create the bags. Then, to fill 50 bags with 226.8g of coffee each, each batch of ground coffee must contain at least 11.31kg. Otherwise, you risk underfilling bags when it comes time to package.

Weight Checks During the Production Process

Quality control is about ensuring your product is as consistent as possible, so mistakes aren’t released onto the market. Because production is so fast paced, it’s exceptionally difficult to notice all product defects with the naked eye. Spot-checking samples with a weighing scale can pick up on minute differences you and your team may not see. For example, a bag of coffee looks the same whether it’s been filled with 226.8g of ground coffee or 221.13g, but only one can get your company in trouble! 

With a checkweighing bench scale, you can ensure that the sample of product falls within your set guidelines. If they weigh more or less than standard, it’s worth further investigation into whether it’s a batch-wide problem or a minor defect. Catching the problem early saves headaches later.

Another way bench scales can be used during the production process is to spot check production lines themselves. This helps make sure that equipment and automatic filling systems have been properly adjusted and calibrated, to guarantee the highest standard. If your ISO requires you to record and store the info, you’ll be interested to learn about our traceability options later in this blog.

Final Weight Compliance

Because of the legal requirements for packaging and sales, bench scales are important for checking the final product before it goes to market. According to the Weights and Measures (Packaged Goods) Regulations 2006, packages are required to clearly and accurately display the net weight of the product inside. Each country has similar guidelines that state that it’s illegal to sell a product commercially if the net weight is less than what’s declared on the packaging, to protect consumers from paying the same money for less product. Of course, you don’t want to sell an overfilled product, either. The company wastes product and loses money, at that point!

A bench scale can help catch those last-minute defects and protect your company’s bottom line.

Traceability

To catch inconsistencies before they become major problems, you’ll need a regular record of your weighing results. You can connect Adam bench scales to accessories like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2 printer" title="ATP 2 printer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}}, which will help keep an itemized list of weights and checkweighing results. For a more analytical approach, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU Data Collection Software" title="AdamDU Data Collection Software" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} allows you to collect and analyze data from up to eight scales at once, via RS-232 or USB connections.

If you use a different form of data tracking, Adam’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam Connect" title="Adam Connect" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36833"}} modules enable you to connect to a PC via Bluetooth, even if your scale doesn’t offer Bluetooth on its own!

Top 5 Adam Bench Scales for Production Quality Control

Adam is a leading supplier of industrial bench scales that are ideal for production quality control, including the five below.

1.     Cruiser CKT Checkweighing Bench Scales

{{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT Checkweighing Bench Scales" title="Cruiser CKT Checkweighing Bench Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} is the number 1 choice when you’re searching for an efficient, effective way to checkweigh. With capacities from 4kg to 48kg and readabilities from 0.05g to 0.01kg, it can handle large and small products with precision. Its bright, backlit display changes colour when the product is over or under your set limits, so you know the verdict in an instant. A pre-set tare limit function makes net-weight checks easy, so you can keep within packaging guidelines.

2.     GBK-Plus Checkweighing Bench Scales

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK-Plus Checkweighing Bench Scale" title="GBK-Plus Checkweighing Bench Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} features an extra-large colour-changing display with 40mm-high digits. GBK models boast capacities from 8kg to 120kg and readabilities from 0.1g to 5g and a larger pan, for when you need heavy-duty checkweighing. The GBK-Plus helpfully offers selectable digital filtering for easier quality control of moving items, like liquids, so production isn’t slowed waiting for a reliable result.

3.     Latitude LBX Compact Bench Scales

For those who lack space on your benchtop, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude LBX" title="Latitude LBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}} saves room and still provides checkweighing, with traffic light-style LED indicators. A simple display allows for a quick learning curve and multi-functional use, when the scale is shared between departments. With capacities spanning from 3kg to 30kg and readabilities from 0.5g to 5g, Latitude is small but mighty!

4.     Aqua ABW-S Waterproof Bench Scales

Is your quality control at risk of getting quite messy? {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S Stainless Steel Waterproof Scales" title="Aqua ABW-S Stainless Steel Waterproof Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} are IP68-rated for full protection against harm from fine particles and liquid. Get protection and quality results, with hidden colour-changing indicators that show up when checkweighing. Capacities from 4kg to 32kg and readabilities from 0.1g to 2g means you’re safe and sound with the Aqua ABW-S.

5.     Gladiator Waterproof Bench Scales

For those whose messy circumstances require a bit more firepower, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator Waterproof Scales" title="Gladiator Waterproof Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} are the right fit for you. Gladiator Bench Scales are IP68-rated, with a large, colour-changing backlight when checkweighing. With your choice between two platform sizes (GGS 250x250mm and GGB 400x300mm models) you can customise your Gladiator experience. Gladiator is industrial strength, providing capacities between 6kg and 75kg, with readabilities between 0.2g and 2g. Make a splash on your production line with the Gladiator! Plus, if any of your products are sold by weight, the Gladiator boasts trade approved models.

Production quality control isn’t easy, which is why you want a reliable bench scale to take some of the pressure off. Adam can provide – give us a call, we’ll help set you up with the right scale.

What makes the best analytical balance is rather subjective, based entirely on what your laboratory needs to do its work most effectively. However, there are a few features we recommend not going without – 10 of them, to be exact. Let’s discuss.

1.   Readability and Resolution

Readability represents the smallest increment your analytical balance can display. Analytical balances typically offer very fine readabilities of 0.001g or 0.0001g, while semi-micro balances can read up to 0.01mg. The best readability for you will be one that is slightly more precise than you might expect is necessary. For example, if you need 0.001g results, lean towards a readability of 0.0001g, so you know your 0.001g readings are spot on. You likely wouldn’t want to go more than a decimal place beyond what’s required. Though it can be tempting to go as fine as possible, this decision must be balanced with the risks of higher sensitivity, which can make it more difficult to get the results you need.

Resolution is a bit more complicated. It represents the balance’s ability to distinguish between small changes in weight across its full capacity. To calculate a balance’s resolution, all you do is divide the capacity by the readability. A balance with a readability of 0.0001g and a 120g capacity would have a resolution of 1,200,000.

It’s easier to purchase the best analytical balance based on readability than it is to purchase based on resolution, as readability is typically way more obvious and provided front and center, and is usually more important when making a purchasing decision. Adam’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris analytical balances" title="Polaris analytical balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36875"}} offer resolutions between 8,000,000 (PAB 125i) and 4,200,000 divisions. 

2.   Maximum Capacity

Capacity is the most limiting part of an analytical balance – an extremely fine readability is typically paired with a lower capacity.  This means that the combination of your samples and the container they’re held in must be below the maximum capacity. Exceeding the capacity by a significant amount of weight or for a significant amount of time can begin to harm your balance’s internal mechanisms.

When searching for the best analytical balance for you, keep in mind that you’ll want a buffer between the heaviest item you expect to weigh and the maximum capacity. We recommend at least a 25% gap. This helps prevent any unintentional overloads and gives you some extra leeway should you acquire some heavier samples or containers later.

Adam’s Polaris and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox series" title="Equinox series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} both offer semi-micro analytical models, where one balance provides both 0.01mg semi-micro and 0.1mg analytical results (The PAB 125i, EAB 125i & EAB 225i). You’ll receive semi-micro results until the weight on the pan surpasses a certain level, whereafter you’ll receive four place results. These models also boast a “floating range” feature to help compensate for the low semi-micro capacities. You can learn all about it in our blog.

3.   Calibration Options

Consider how you prefer to calibrate, which will help when choosing the best analytical balance for you. External calibration using calibration weights is considered more traceable but requires your time and participation.

Internal calibration can be scheduled to perform automatically when the balance is not in use, which saves time, but which is considered harder to regulate. It can also be set to calibrate automatically when the temperature changes. Plus, balances that can be internally calibrated can also be externally calibrated when necessary, so you can get both traceability and time-savings when either is more important, lending flexibility.

All Adam analytical balances indicate whether they can be internally or only externally calibrated in the model name. Those that can be internally calibrated have models ending with an “i”, while those that can only be externally calibrated end with an “e”. Instantly easy!

4.   Connectivity

We live in an ultra-connected world, so the best analytical balance for you would be no exception. Adam’s new Polaris analytical balances offer a full range of interfaces, built in: Ethernet, WiFi, RS-232, USB and Bluetooth. This allows you to connect your balance to printers, PCs, data analysis software, a Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS) and more. This allows for better data tracking and traceability. Your balance should work for you!

5.   Convection Current Protection

Because analytical balances are very sensitive, they require protection against environmental factors that could lead to inaccuracies. These environmental factors include changes in temperature that could cause convection currents within an analytical balance’s draft shields. Adam’s new Polaris semi-micro model, the PAB 125i, offers advanced Air Diversion Technology (ADT). As the balance warms up over use, this heat can rise and begin to push at the weighing pan from below. The ADT prevents this, redirecting more than 90% of the heat away from the weighing pan and ensuring your results are protected.

6.   Stabilisation Time

Stabilisation time is how long it takes until your analytical balance has reached its best result. These are typically measured in seconds, with stabilisation taking slightly longer the finer the balance. The best analytical balance for you is one with a stabilisation time that doesn’t hold you up. Adam’s Polaris Analytical balances stabilise within three seconds. 

Never record a weight before you see the “~” symbol on the screen representing a stabilised result, as this means the weight could change and your records may be inaccurate.

7.   Ease of Use

An analytical balance that is difficult to use wastes your time and increases the chances of using it incorrectly. The best analytical balance provides you with an intuitive, easy-to-use interface that helps guide you toward the applications you want to use. The Equinox, as a touchscreen, is especially intuitive, as what you touch is where you go. The Polaris, though not a touchscreen, is also highly intuitive, with multiple dual-use buttons and an expansive display.

8.   Compliance & Traceability

Adam analytical balances are Good Laboratory and Good Manufacturing Practices compliant, which means they record information like the exact date and time the result was captured, and by which operator. When printing these results on an accessory like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2 Printer" title="ATP 2 Printer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}}, all of that information is recorded as well. 

This helps keep your data completely traceable, which is critical in the pharmaceutical industry for protecting patient safety and equally as important for ensuring reproducible data in research.

9.   Weighing Units

You might be surprised just how many weighing units there really are – we have a list of them, right here. Depending on the type of work you do with your analytical balance, the weighing units available on your machine are going to be of great concern.

For example, though grams, milligrams, pounds and ounces are most popular, jewellery appraisers and gemologists need carats. Explosive and ballistics technicians require Grains, traditionally used to measure gun powder, while physics and engineering labs use Newtons to study the effect of force on small samples.

Adam’s Polaris offers 16 different weighing units, including one that’s entirely customisable for the days you’re looking to get out-of-the-box.

10.                 Warranty & Support

You deserve peace of mind, so the best analytical balance for you will be one with a long, effective warranty and after-sale support you can rely on. All Adam analytical balances boast five-year manufacturer warranties, one of the highest in the industry. Not only this, our after-sales support is unmatched. Whether you have a question, you need product guidance, calibration or repairs, Adam’s service team is just a call away.  

Interested in purchasing the best analytical balance for you? Contact the Adam team, we’d love to help.

Adam Equipment, a global leader in the manufacturing of professional scales and balances, is redefining clarity with the launch of its new Polaris lab balances. 

Made up of semi-micro, analytical, precision and top loading models, Polaris has been developed to make weighing easier and results clearer. Models feature innovations not seen before on Adam balances, including a brightly-lit weighing chamber, so samples are easier to see, an expansive digital weight display, Adam’s largest-ever on a lab balance, and, for the 5 decimal-place model, unique technology to divert warm air away from the weighing pan.

Additionally, there are more connectivity options than on previous Adam balances, with RJ45 Ethernet, Bluetooth®, USB and RS-232 for connecting to printers, PCs and LIMS software.

The Polaris user interface has been developed by Adam’s in-house design and manufacturing team to be easier to use, with more intuitive operation, a more clearly laid-out display, and – when in checkweighing mode – colour-changing backlight.

“Polaris puts the emphasis on clarity, with clearer operation, clearer results and a better experience for users,” said Sam Jones, Adam’s Technical Director. “We’ve thought differently about how we make our balances more accurate, which has resulted in ADT – our new Air Diversion Technology, which diverts more than 90% of warm air from the weighing pan and helps speed-up stabilisation time.

“Warm air can affect readings from high-accuracy balances, and ADT on our 5-place Polaris means weighing results you’ll be confident in.”

Colin Maher, Adam’s CEO, added: “Polaris marks the start of an exciting year for Adam. With this range, we’re providing more clarity in weighing than ever, and we’re starting as we mean to go on. There will be more from Adam this year that will take us to the next level – watch this space!”

All Polaris models are covered by Adam’s 5-year warranty, and are available to order now. Learn more at adamequipment.com/polaris. 

About Adam Equipment 

Adam Equipment, which celebrated its 50th anniversary in 2022, designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. It’s part of Indutrade, a multi-billion-pound group that owns more than 200 subsidiaries worldwide. Adam’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, botanicals/CBD, food and animal/veterinary markets. Adam’s head office is in Milton Keynes, UK and it has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.  

Media Contact: 

Brian Thomas 

Adam Equipment 

press@adamequipment.com 

+1 (203) 790-4774 

SOURCE Adam Equipment 

Analytical and precision balances are crucial in any laboratory, yet it’s not exactly easy to ensure you’re always getting the most accurate results. In this blog, we’ll discuss the top 18 challenges that come with lab weighing, and how extra prep and extra attention can help you overcome them.

Environmental Challenges

So much of your environment is out of your control that it can be especially frustrating when it begins to impact your lab weighing. You may notice your results drifting, jumping or taking longer to stabilise. If this is the case for you, consider which of the factors below could be your issue. Adam offers a few accessories to help.

1.     Air Drafts

Unless you’re working in a completely airless room, air is a constant and nagging challenge in a laboratory. Wind from an open window, the air conditioning, even breeze from someone walking by can all cause weight readings to drift or jump unexpectedly. Air not only tries to get underneath the weighing pan to bolster it up, it also adds force to your samples and makes them register as artificially heavy.

Air drafts are such a prevalent issue that semi-micro, analytical and many precision balances feature built-in draft shields to protect against it. This is why you need to ensure that your draft shields are completely closed during lab weighing, and, if you can help it, the balance is placed in a location less prone to errant gusts.

2.     Vibrations

Vibrations are also surprisingly constant. Construction down the street, booming music, footsteps not only in the room but also in the building as a whole cause vibrations. We get used to it, but your balance can’t. Adam offers an accessory designed to mitigate the risk of vibrations, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AVT Anti-Vibration Table" title="AVT Anti-Vibration Table" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36655"}}. The AVT is a double-framed table, the centre frame of which supports a 100lb/45kg granite block. When balances are placed on the granite block, they’re more grounded and less susceptible to vibrations.

3.     Temperature Changes

Have you noticed that your readings seem less accurate after you’ve moved your balance to a different location? That might be because of the temperature difference. You can’t bring your balance from a toasty 72°F / 22°C room to one that’s a cool 54°F / 12°C and expect to get accurate results right away. All highly precise laboratory balances need to acclimatise to a new environment before they’re used – we recommend at least 12 hours.

4.     Static Electricity

If the humidity in your laboratory is below 40%, static electricity is more likely to form. You can cause static by dragging metal, powder or fabric samples across the metal weighing pan when you’re setting them down or taking them away. To help prevent this, always set and lift samples straight up and down.

Some samples can be pre-charged with static before they even touch the balance. For cases like this, we recommend Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABI-1 ioniser" title="ABI-1 ioniser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32762"}}, which neutralises static electricity. All you have to do is turn it on and face it toward the balance; it’ll neutralise static in your samples and any that has built up in the weighing chamber.

Machine Challenges

These are challenges presented by something on or in the balance itself.

5.     Poor Calibration

Lab balances require frequent calibration to remain precise and accurate over time. If you don’t calibrate frequently enough, your results stop being reliable. Some balances offer both internal and external calibration, while others only offer external. Both have their pros and cons and bring their own challenges.

If you’ve moved the balance to a new location recently, let the balance warm up for 12 hours before calibration or use. When internally calibrating, especially if it’s scheduled to occur when you’re not present, guarantee that the draft shield is completely closed and there’s nothing on the weighing pan. If the draft shields are open or something is left on the pan, calibration will force the balance to accommodate around it, which can lead to inaccurate results.

External calibration requires test weights, which need almost as much thought and care as your balance. Because someone must actively perform external calibration, there are different risks. Stand straight, feet planted, without leaning on the benchtop, to avoid un-leveling or shaking the balance with your movements. Only open and close the draft shields when placing and removing the calibration weight as prompted by the balance. Don’t drag the weight across the pan, lift and set it down directly, to prevent generating static.

Calibration isn’t a difficult process in itself, but there’s a lot of ways you can get less-than-satisfactory results, which is why Adam provides calibration services at our facilities.

6.     Wrong Balance

Sometimes, if you’re unsatisfied with your laboratory balance, the solution can be simply to invest in a more suitable machine for your lab weighing. For example, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland Portable Precision Balances" title="Highland Portable Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} are highly precise and accurate, with readabilities as fine as 0.001g. They come with a small, removable draft shield and extra protection against shock loading and drops. It’s a simple and effective machine, but you may be at a point where you need something more advanced.

Our new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris Precision Balances" title="Polaris Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36886"}} can provide you with the same or better readabilities along with other benefits that are helpful for any laboratory. For example, a large, built-in draft shield for more guaranteed protection with any size sample. It boasts an expansive, colour-changing display so you can see more info all at once, as well as the ability to store ingredients in its internal memory. Both the Highland and the Polaris PPB are precision balances, but one may be better suited for your lab than another.

Not that the best choice is always the more precise, fancier balance! {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris Semi-Micro balances" title="Polaris Semi-Micro balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36875"}} offer 0.01mg readabilities, which would be too fine for an application only requiring results to the 0.01g. In that case, you don’t have to suffer the sensitivities that come with a semi-micro balance – try out the Highland!

7.     Dirty Balance

Dust, powder, liquid residue and oils can be left behind on the weighing pan without attracting much notice. However, they can build up over time until they begin to influence your results, either by adding a minute amount of weight or by harming the internal mechs. To clean your balance, we recommend using a microfibre towel or a soft-bristled brush to remove solid debris. Then, if necessary, using ethanol as a cleanser. Ethanol evaporates quickly without leaving behind a residue.

8.     Levelling

Not all surfaces are created equal, even a flat laboratory benchtop may send a marble rolling. An unlevelled balance can cause the items on the pan to distribute weight unevenly. This can begin to wear down internal mechanisms more quickly, like driving on a low tyre. All Adam lab balances feature a built-in levelling bubble, and many offer individually adjustable feet. Twist the feet up or down to ensure the bubble is directly in the middle of the circle and that the balance is sitting stable on your benchtop, without a wobble.

Sample Handling Mistakes

Even the way you handle your samples can impact whether your balance is doing its best work.

9.     Weighing Hot or Cold Samples

One rule of thumb for weighing is to have your balance, sample and containers all the same temperature before weighing (calibration weights as well, when externally calibrating). If your sample is significantly colder or warmer than the balance, it can cause convection currents in the draft shield, which can be as damaging to your results as not having a draft shield at all.

Unfortunately, even if you’re careful about keeping your samples, balance and containers all the same temperature, the balance itself begins to heat up over long weighing sessions. Adam’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris Semi-Micro Balance" title="Polaris Semi-Micro Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36883"}} offers a solution to this with its new Air Diversion Technology feature. You can read more about it in our recent blog.

10.            Static Charged Powders

We mentioned that low humidity can make it more likely for static electricity to develop in a laboratory environment. Powder samples are especially prone to static, because the particles generate friction. If you weigh a static charged sample, you can introduce static to the weighing chamber, making it more difficult to get rid of. Consider placing your samples in front of the ABI-1 ioniser before weighing.

Technique and Procedural Errors

Sometimes, it’s just not the balance’s fault! These errors can be caused by using the balance incorrectly. Unfortunately, this means that mistakes may occur inconsistently, depending on who is operating and when. This can make them harder to recognise. Ultimately, the main way to prevent technique errors is training operators effectively!

11.            Taring

Taring is simple, but precisely because it’s simple, it can be easy to make simple mistakes. For example, forgetting to zero the tared value before moving on to other non-weighing related tasks. Any remaining negative result will still be there when you turn on your balance, and many go on autopilot and begin weighing as normal.

Another common mistake is not re-taring after changing containers. If you’ve been weighing items using the same type of glass petri dish all day, you might not remember to re-tare if one sample out of the bunch happens to be in a plastic petri dish instead.

Always pay special attention when tared weights are in play to ensure your readings are as accurate as possible.

12.            Bare Hands

The oils on your fingers are surprisingly insidious, though it’s more likely to be a longer-term issue than an immediate one. Not only do oils add an infinitesimal weight to the samples or calibration weights you’re touching, but they can also start to eat at them and cause deterioration over time.

To prevent this, only touch your calibration weights and samples with tweezers or cloth gloves. Also check to guarantee that there’s no other debris, like lint, dust or string that could stick.

13.            Draft Shields

We discussed why draft shields are important for mitigating issues with wind and breeze, but it can be challenging to remember to close the draft shield completely before recording your results.

14.            Recording Unstable Readings

Similarly, wait until the display shows the “~” symbol off to the side before marking down weight readings, even if it seems to have landed on a number already. That symbol means that the result has stabilised and isn’t going to change again, making it the most accurate. If your results seem to take longer than usual to stabilise, consider any of the above explanations as to why that might be!

15.            Rushing

Slow down! Rushing isn’t conducive to receiving the most accurate results, often leading to mistakes where you might not usually make them. All it takes is a draft shield left slightly open, a tare weight forgotten and suddenly your results aren’t reliable! Don’t let tight deadlines distract you from operating effectively.

16.            Transcription Errors

Handwritten records of weight readings are prone to human error, whether from the person recording the readings or the person transcribing them later. Luckily, there are a few other options, such as Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2 printer" title="ATP 2 printer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32727"}}, which prints each result, or the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU software" title="AdamDU software" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}}. AdamDU turns weighing results into data, analysing it all on your behalf from up to eight balances at once.

17.            Inconsistent Technicians

Training is extremely important for lab weighing to ensure that each technician is using the balance well. Adam lab balances offer the opportunity to monitor your technicians by giving them each their own log-in user code. This means that each printout will record which technician earned the result, and if there any inconsistencies appear, you can catch it quickly and ensure they’re following all procedures correctly.

18.            Ignoring Manual

Manuals exist for a reason; they’re the manufacturer’s guide for using the product you’ve invested quite a bit of money in. No guessing is necessary! Follow manufacturer recommendations for type of calibration weight necessary, procedures for different applications, operating temperature requirements and more. You can find manuals for your Adam balance in multiple locations on our website. On the product page, the individual model pages and the Support page dedicated to manuals!

Lab weighing is tough! But Adam can help – contact the Adam team today.

Highly precise results require quite an effort – many factors can influence your analytical balance and cause inaccurate readings. In this blog, we’ll discuss two of the lesser-known influences, heat and updrafts, and how our new Polaris range solves the problem.

Heat

All scales and balances are impacted by extreme temperatures, as metal and plastic expand or contract when hot or cold. However, highly sensitive semi-micro analytical balances, like the new Polaris PAB 125i model, can be affected by even slight temperature fluctuations. This makes maintaining a well-regulated laboratory crucial to obtaining accurate weight readings.

The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) states that serious effort should be made to ensure that temperatures reach an equilibrium between the balance, environment and any samples. Once a weighing session has started, it’s equally important to guarantee that temperatures within the room don’t vary more than about 0.5 degrees Celsius. Leaving the balance, samples and any tools like calibration weights near each other for a while helps them acclimatise to the ambient temperatures, helping to prevent your results from drifting.

To go a little further, humidity is also an influence. A relative humidity percentage of less than 40% can generate static near or even in the balance. This also causes inaccurate results, though the display is more likely to jump than drift. Luckily, accessories such as Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABI-1 Ioniser" title="ABI-1 Ioniser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32762"}} can help neutralise static electricity in particularly dry environments.

Updrafts

Air currents are a well-known agitator for semi-micro and analytical balances, which is why all of them come pre-fitted with a draft shield. This helps protect against outside air currents, but many don’t realize that air currents can develop within the draft shield as well. Temperature variations between the balance and the sample being weighed can create convection currents that influence results even with a draft shield.

Unfortunately, sometimes this is unavoidable – many don’t know that as the balance is being used, the internal mechanisms begin to generate their own heat. Because heat rises, the natural consequence of this is that the heated air ends up emerging through the weighing pan and into the draft shield. This can cause enough of a temperature fluctuation to create a convection current and disrupt your weighing results.

Air Diversion Technology

Adam’s Polaris PAB 125i Semi-Micro Analytical Balance, available now, offers a unique Air Diversion Technology (ADT) feature. It was developed to combat heat from the internal mechanisms rising and creating convection currents. Channels beneath the weighing platform divert the heat away from the weighing pan, as depicted in the diagram below. With Polaris, you can be sure that your results are reliable throughout every weighing session.

Excited about Polaris? Learn more about the range here. In the meantime, you can contact the Adam team with any questions, we’ll be happy to help.

Having an accurate scale is only step one to getting accurate results when weighing produce. This blog discusses five ways you can help guarantee you’re getting the most accurate weights.

Best Practices for Weighing Accurately

To get the most accurate and reliable results, guarantee you’re following these five tips.

1.      Weigh on a Level Surface

No matter if you’re weighing indoors or outdoors, you’ll get the most accurate results when your weighing scale is level. If your scale isn’t level, it can lead to uneven weight distribution when items are placed on the pan. This puts uneven pressure on the load cell, causing premature wear that could lead to permanently inaccurate results. Most Adam scales come with a built-in leveller and many come with adjustable feet. With adjustable feet, you can level your scale even if the surface it rests on isn’t completely flat – as long as it’s stable and not wobbly.

2.      Tare Out Containers

A common mistake that seems harmless but can add up very quickly is forgetting to Tare out containers before weighing the produce. For example, if you’re weighing potatoes in a crate, the crate is adding weight to your results. If you put an empty crate of an equivalent weight on the pan and Tare out the result first, then you’re only getting the weight of the potatoes.

After each weighing session, ensure you’re Zeroing out the scale as well. This removes the stored Tare weight so if your next item doesn’t use a container or is weighed in a different container, it’s not subtracting the weight of the previous container anymore.

3.      Keep Produce Dry and Clean

Dirt and water can both add weight to your produce. For the most accurate results, ensure that any loose dirt is removed and they’re as dry as possible. Leafy greens like cabbage or lettuce can collect water between layers from rain or regular watering, which makes them artificially heavy! When harvesting root vegetables, try to shake off any loose dirt when harvesting so it doesn’t add to your weight results.

4.      Avoid Harsh Outdoor Conditions

Certain harsh weather conditions can make it more difficult to receive accurate results. High winds add force to the item you’re weighing and may even add force to the scale itself, which can lead to unstable readings. Thunder (or just a bunch of trucks driving around) can cause vibration which also lead to drifting results. Snow and rain can accumulate on the pan, so attempt to keep it clear and dry before weighing.

Extreme temperatures should be avoided as well. Most scales operate best when they’re used between -10˚C and 40˚C. Any more or less than those temperatures can make the plastics and metals in the scale itself expand or contract enough to disrupt your accuracy.

5.      Record Weighing Results Immediately

If you don’t remember the weight of your produce, did you really weigh it? Keeping thorough records not only helps ensure your weights are accurate (because they’re recorded right then and there) it also gives you something to look back on over time. Depending on when and where you’re weighing, handwritten records may be the most convenient. For larger-scale operations, it might be more reliable to connect your scale to a printer like Adam's {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2" title="ATP 2" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32696"}}. Or, you can choose a label-printing scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BKT" title="BKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29734"}}. A printer can record the date, time, operator and weight with the tap of a button, saving time.  

Choosing the Right Scale

There are many different types of scales that could be a great fit for weighing produce, including the four types below.

Trade Approved Scales

If you’re going to sell produce based on weight, such as at a farmers’ market, you need to be using a trade approved scale during each transaction. This is a legal requirement and can’t be ignored without risking fines or other serious consequences. It helps ensure that each customer is getting the quantity that they’re paying for, so neither party is treated unfairly.

Checkweighing Scales

Checkweighing scales are scales that allow you to set high and low weight limits and will notify you – via a color changing display, audible beep or traffic-light style LEDs – when a product is over, under or within those limits.

A checkweighing scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT" title="Cruiser CKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-Plus" title="GFK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} would be best utilised for packing purposes. For example, if you want to fill clamshell containers with approximately the same amount of strawberries. You can use the scale’s built-in monitoring system to know when you need to add more strawberries, take some out or if the weight is just right.

Washdown Scales

For weighing out in the field during harvest, you’ll want a washdown scale. Washdown scales like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} series can withstand water and dirt without suffering damage. If the dirt gets to be too much, just rinse it off and continue weighing! Washdown scales provide unmatched peace of mind when it comes to getting wet and messy.

Platform Scales

Platform scales are heavy-duty scales that allow you to weigh large quantities of produce at once. Do you need to send a pallet of watermelons to a market? Instead of weighing each watermelon individually, weigh them all at once and skip the math.

If you need both trade approval and a platform scale, pair Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platform" title="PT Platform" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} with the trade approved (and waterproof) {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403M" title="AE 403M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30263"}} indicator. For checkweighing, pair with the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-Plus" title="GK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36757"}}!

Need help deciding on a scale for weighing produce or want personalised tips for weighing accurately? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

As a small business owner, you might be on the fence about investing in a scale, especially when there are so many varieties available. We’ll discuss the many ways a scale is a business essential, from inventory to quality control.

Inventory

It’s a common misconception that small businesses can worry less about tracking inventory. In reality, inventory management is especially important for small businesses, because every product counts. However, it can be difficult, not to mention exhausting, to count all your raw materials and finished products. That’s where scales come in!

A counting scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CCT" title="Cruiser CCT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29716"}} is a fast, efficient way to keep track of your inventory. After weighing a small sample size, you can pile on identical parts or products for your CCT to count. No more hand-counting small screws or bolts for your hardware store, or packets of clasps for your craft supply store! You’ll get a final number quicker and more accurately with a counting scale. If you want a way to keep a record of each count, Adam's {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BCT Label-Printing Scales" title="BCT Label-Printing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29748"}} weigh, count and print a label with customisable info, like a barcode, QR code, counting results and more. 

Product Look Ups

Once your counting scale has calculated the sample weight, you can store that result in the scale’s memory as a Product Look-Up, or PLU. This way, you don’t have to sample the same product repeatedly – simply enter in the PLU number to recall the sample weight and begin counting. Adam’s Cruiser CCT offers 100 PLU values.

Packing Orders

If your business fulfills online or bulk orders, counting scales are also an excellent way to pack for shipment. Small businesses often depend on word-of-mouth and good reviews for success, so it’s important to build a reputation of integrity by ensuring that customers get exactly what they paid for, no more and no less.

Selling By Weight

If your small business sells products by weight, such as farmers market stall selling fresh fruits and vegetables by the kilogram, you’ll need to have a trade-approved scale on hand. This is required by law – many a business have been heavily fined for not using a trade approved scale. 

You can use any scale that’s trade approved. However, there are a few, like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale" title="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}}, that are designed to help make weight pricing easier. In fact, once it has all the info necessary stored in its memory, it will actively calculate the price to pay for your customer on your behalf! Swift boasts a full numeric keypad, three displays for the total weight, unit price and total price to pay as well as 161 PLUs. Our blog takes a deep dive into the differences between legal-for-trade and price computing scales here.

Estimating Shipping Prices

Shipping items from your small business can be stressful – the charges seem to go up every year. Having a scale on hand to estimate or calculate shipping prices is crucial. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus series" title="CPWplus series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} is an excellent option. With three different platform sizes and four different configurations, it accommodates products and shipment, large and small. The indicator is no-nonsense and simple, letting you get the job done effectively.

For extra large shipments involving pallets, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT platforms" title="PT platforms" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} are ideal, with three different platform sizes and capacities up to 4500kg. Plus, PT platforms come with your choice of seven different indicators, from counting to washdown to label printers, so you get a customisable experience. If you have a warehouse for storing products, you can weigh and transport products simultaneously with Adam's {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTSplus pallet truck scale" title="PTSplus pallet truck scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29723"}}!

Quality Control

Whether your products are handmade or manufactured, scales are a valuable form of quality control. For example, for a ceramicist selling wares, a compact scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CBX" title="CBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29695"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude" title="Latitude" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}} helps ensure that each mug, bowl, plate or vase are a consistent weight from one to another. This helps prevent wasting clay and helps achieve a uniform look between products

Similarly, a candlemaker can use a scale to measure how much wax and fragrance they’re using for each candle. Weight is an important indication of quality (and heft is typically associated with value) so using a scale is an easy way to step up your small business game.

For ventures involving more extensive manufacturing, scales can be used at various stages of the production process to ensure each component weighs what it should. 

Checkweighing scales like Adam's {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT" title="Cruiser CKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK/GFK-Plus" title="GBK/GFK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} are particularly helpful for quality control. You can set high and low weight limits and the colour-changing display will shift based on whether the item on the pan is above (red), below (yellow) or within (green) your tolerances. 

Need help deciding which scale is right for your small business? Contact the Adam team, we’re happy to help.

Not all research is done in a laboratory – much is performed on-the-go. This brings unique challenges when it comes to ensuring reliable and accurate weighing results. Let’s dive deep into best practices for setting up a mobile weighing station for field research.

Key Considerations for a Mobile Weighing Station

Before you even reach your mobile weighing station, you need to know that you have the right tools for the job. Taking these four qualities into account when purchasing a scale or balance will make your field research much smoother.

Portability

Out in the field, you need to be able to weigh where you need to weigh, even if that place doesn’t have a reliable source of electricity. Scales and balances with rechargeable batteries are a significant advantage in these circumstances. Adam Equipment offers compact, bench, floor and platform scales that operate with rechargeable batteries. Some, like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude LBX" title="Latitude LBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, can last as long as 210 hours between charges.

Of course, portability doesn’t only involve batteries but size, as well. Compact and bench scales are the most easily transportable options simply because they’re smaller than floor and platform scales, thus it’s easier to carry them from location to location. For those who need to pack light, compact and bench scales are the top choice.

Durability

Research can be unpredictable, which means it’s best to be prepared for any possibility by purchasing a scale with an enhanced level of durability. After all, it could be knocked over, dropped on the ground or even hit with other items. Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland" title="Highland" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Core Portable Precision Balances" title="Core Portable Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29732"}} boast ShockProtect™ technology, lending them a strong defense against damage. This video demonstrates!

If you predict your scale may be at risk of getting wet from waves or rain showers, or exceedingly dusty or sandy from especially dry locations, a scale with an IP rating is worthwhile for the advanced protection. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} are IP68 rated for full protection against dust and liquid ingress. To learn more about IP-rated scales, check out our blog on the topic.

Precision Needs

When you’re travelling in the field, what you’ve brought with you is what you get! You need to guarantee your scale or balance is precise enough for your weighing needs while being able to handle some heft if necessary. This involves finding the perfect equilibrium between readability and capacity for your anticipated environment.

Adam compact scales can weigh up to 6000g with readabilities as fine as 0.001g. For those who need to weigh larger samples but still need high precision, bench scales like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT" title="Cruiser CKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} and Gladiator GGB offer fine readability models with higher capacities. For example, the CKT 8UH offers a capacity of 8kg with a 0.05g readability, while the Gladiator GGB 75H can weigh up to 75kg with a readability of 1g.

If you can’t find one scale or balance that has both a high enough capacity and a fine enough readability for all your potential samples, you may have to invest in more than one! For example, a high-capacity bench scale may be most suitable for weighing samples of ore, but not precise enough to weigh lighter soil samples.

Applications

Certain scales and balances specialise in different types of weighing. For example, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB moisture analyser" title="PMB moisture analyser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}} is excellent for determining the moisture content of algae, soil, seeds or biological matter like leaves. It both weighs and heats up the sample until dry, automatically calculating the moisture percentage at the end. However, it’s not intended to be used for regular weighing without the drying factor involved.

Other examples include dynamic weighing, featured on scales like the Gladiator series or our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LBL" title="Luna LBL" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35290"}}. Dynamic weighing is ideal for weighing moving subjects, like fish, animals and liquids. It takes the average weight over a certain time so that the subject never truly needs to stay still for an accurate weight.  

Essential Equipment for the Setup

You’re about to set off onto your journey – what should you have with you?

Protective Gear

Even when your scale or balance is as durable as the Core and Highland are, you still want to mitigate the risk of damage. Protective gear like carrying cases and in-use covers add an extra level of peace of mind against the environment.

Calibration Weights

You should be calibrating your scales and balances often, but especially when you’re using them in the field. Balances with finer readabilities can be more easily impacted by jostles, changes in altitude, vibrations, temperature changes, unsteady or unlevel surfaces and heavy wind. To ensure that you’re getting the most accurate results, have a set of calibration weights handy. There’s no such thing as calibrating too often!

Both Adam Equipment’s individual and weight sets come with protective cases to make transportation simple.

Printers and Software for Data Collection

Printers like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AIP" title="AIP" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32749"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2" title="ATP 2" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}} and data collection software like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU" title="AdamDU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} are crucial when out in the field, where handwritten notes are at risk of getting damaged or even lost.

Printers provide detailed and high-quality hard copies of weight data for your own records, while AdamDU lets you upload the results and analyse them in real time.

Scoops or Containers

Occasionally it’s not the best idea to place the item you’re weighing directly on the pan – whether it’s because it may jump right off (in the case of a rare pond frog) or it’s hard to re-collect in its entirety (like gelatinous frogspawn). Using accessories like scoops or containers will help alleviate these issues by ensuring the sample is weighed safely – just be sure to tare them out first!

Tips for Setting Up in the Field

(1)  Find or create a sturdy, level surface for your scale or balance

           (a) Each Adam Equipment scale and balance offers a built-in bubble leveller, with many also offering adjustable feet

(2) Ensure your balance is protected against the environment

           (a) Keep it under a tent or canopy to protect against direct sunlight, rain or snow

(3) Allow your scale to acclimate to the environment before use

(4) Calibrate your scale often using calibration weights

(5) Ensure your scale is fully charged and keep extra batteries or power banks on hand for long excursions without power

(6) Keep the scale clean

           (a) IP rated scales can be cleaned easily, making them the best choice when bacteria, rust, debris or cross contamination are a concern

Have questions about setting up a mobile weighing station? Contact the Adam team, we'll be happy to help.

Floor scales play an important role in heavy industry, from mining and construction to production and shipping. They’re tough, accurate and versatile, perfect for weighing raw materials or machinery parts. Let’s take a deeper dive into why you might choose a floor scale for your operations.

What’s the Difference Between a Floor Scale and a Platform Scale?

In the wider weighing industry, floor scales and platform scales are generally considered synonymous. Both terms imply a scale with a large platform and independent indicator that’s typically used on the ground, instead of on a benchtop.

In terms of product classification, however, Adam Equipment considers the two types distinct. Floor scales have lower capacities than platform scales while being more versatile and maneuverable. They also offer a built-in pillar option to support the included indicator, while platform scales are available without indicators and can be mixed and matched. Floor scales are the perfect in-between option for heavy-industry tasks that are constantly on-the-go; not too big for moving around a work site, but not too small to weigh bulk materials.

Built for Tough Environments

Adam floor scales stand strong on mining and construction sites, with capacities between 60kg and 600kg and stainless-steel weigh platforms as large as 800x600mm. While a platform or crane scale would be more suitable for significant loads, floor scales are an excellent mid-range choice for tasks that don’t justify mobilising heavy equipment – like weighing smaller items quickly.

Individually adjustable feet and built-in levels ensure that no matter where you’re setting up shop, your floor scale can work with you.

Worried about the potential impact of coal or saw dust on how your scale operates? Or maybe you don’t want to worry about your scale when it rains or chemicals spill. Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator floor scales" title="Gladiator floor scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} boast an IP68 rating for 100% protection against water and dust ingress. It’s both resistant to damage and easy to clean, a win-win!

And, despite heavy loads, Adam floor scales, such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-Plus 75H" title="GFK-Plus 75H" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36753"}}, are able to provide readabilities as fine as 1g. They’re accurate under pressure!

Versatility in Applications

Portability

Because floor scales are generally smaller than full platform scales, they have the added benefit of portability. Many Adam floor scales even boast indicators with rechargeable batteries, so they can be relocated to pits, labs or loading bays as necessary. To ease the moving process, some models can be fitted with wheels in place of the original adjustable feet.

Checkweighing

Adam floor scales also provide a variety of functions beyond simple weighing. Our Gladiator, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-Plus" title="GFK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-S floor scales" title="GFK-S floor scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36713"}} boast colour-changing displays for checkweighing, making the results easy to spot from a distance and in low light. This is excellent for ensuring that aggregate bags hit weight targets or cement batches are consistent.

Dynamic Weighing

When weighing moving objects, such as concrete slurries or containers of gas and oil, Gladiator floor scales offer a dynamic weighing function. This calculates the average weight of a moving object over a specified time. Dynamic weighing improves efficiency on the work site as there’s no more downtime waiting for the liquids to stabilise enough for reliable readings.

Label Printing

If keeping reliable weighing records on a busy work site is difficult, Adam’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTT" title="BTT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36770"}} is a Touch-Screen Label-Printing floor scale. After weighing an item, simply print out a label and attach it to your cement bags or pre-cut steel beams. The label is fully customisable and can include the weight, date, time as well as a bar or QR code as desired. Then, if you’re not sure what the weight of a particular container of ore samples is, you can simply refer to the label!

Integration

All Adam floor scales feature an RS-232 interface at minimum. Some, like the BTT, offer RS-232 and USB interfaces as standard with ethernet, wireless and WiFi as optional additions. Connect your floor scale to data loggers, PLCs, relays, PCs and printers with ease, gaining improved accuracy, efficiency, traceability and data analysis. This way, you can send weights directly to compliance reports or even feed live data into your production system!

Check out our blog on why connectivity is so important for weighing scales here. 

How Floor Scales Can Help

With floor scales, you can weigh a variety of mining, construction and heavy industry items such as:

       - Ore, coal & aggregates - guarantee enough samples for thorough material research

       - Bulk & raw materials - Weigh the items you use for improved inventory counts later

       - Machinery - Ensure parts meet load specifications before installation

       - Fuel & Chemicals - Important for safety and avoiding spills/overloads

       - Items for transport & shipping - Avoid overloading cars and lorries with materials

While simultaenously enjoying the benefits of:

       - Keeping within environmental or transport regulations

       - Measuring production output more effectively

       - Managing inventory more efficiently

       - Improved truck safety

Looking into floor scales but not sure which one is right for you? Contact the Adam team -- we're happy to help.

Reduce, reuse, recycle! That saying may be common in schools, but how well do your students truly get it? We suggest an activity to ensure the lesson carries some weight. Let’s begin!

The School Waste Epidemic

You might be surprised to learn that UK public schools:

     - Generate up to 80,382 tonnes of waste per school year

               -  More than 75% of generated food waste is avoidable in both primary and secondary schools

     - Only 20% of waste gets recycled even though 80% is recyclable

     - Use up to 2,000 sheets of paper per school per day

               - Studies estimate every classroom trash can is a quarter full of paper that could have been recycled

     - Utilise high levels of single-use plastic waste

               - Including utensils, water bottles, baggies and straws

These statistics are large enough that it can be hard for any student to wrap their head around. So how do you bring them down to earth? We propose an activity that combines statistics, sustainability and maths in one, turning what would be trash into a teachable moment.

Waste Weighing Activity

In this section, we’ll go over the who, what, where, why and hows of our activity, so you can take the idea from the page to the classroom with ease. Download this activity in worksheet form here.

Where?

While this activity could be altered for school-wide participation, the guidelines we’ll provide are focused on individual classrooms.

For those who teach multiple different classes each day, it may be fun to encourage friendly competition to determine which class can reduce their waste generation the most. Alternatively, a “we’re all in this together” approach can teach students that it takes a village to make change.

Who?

This is the perfect activity for both primary and secondary schools, though younger students may need assistance properly categorising their waste.

Why?

The goal for this activity is that students learn the importance of reducing waste and improving recycling rates.

By sorting and weighing their leftover food, paper and plastic, students and teachers alike can put a smaller, more personal number on how much waste is generated in their classroom on a day-to-day or weekly basis. Then, armed with these statistics, students can consciously work on:

      (1) Reducing: Making less waste, especially food waste

      (2) Reusing: Finding ways that paper and plastic items can still be useful

      (3) Recycling: Recognising when paper or plastic items can’t be safely or practically reused but are made of materials accepted by your local recycling program

      (4) Disposing Properly: Learning what constitutes true trash that can’t be either reused or recycled (dirty, greasy, coated items, Styrofoam, etc.)

What?

For this month-long activity, students will separate their waste into four different categories. Their waste is weighed regularly, the statistics tracked day by day. Though this activity is intended to last a month, everyday upkeep and maintenance are low once students begin to learn the patterns.

How?

Here we’ll explain the materials you’ll need and how you could expect to perform the activity over time.

Materials

You’ll only need six items in total:

     - Four bins or boxes, clearly labelled

               - Recyclable paper and cardboard

               - Recyclable plastic

               - Food

               - Trash

     - A bench weighing scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude LBX" title="Latitude LBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABW Washdown Scale" title="ABW Washdown Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29656"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus S" title="CPWplus S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30210"}} that can handle both higher weights and provide precise results. If you’re doing a school-wide activity (with larger bins) a floor scale like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AGF" title="AGF" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29738"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus L" title="CPWplus L" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30624"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} would be more suitable.

     - A method of tracking weight statistics over the course of the activity, like the one you can download for free here. 

Week 1

The first week of the activity should be your reconnaissance week, when you gather data from unbiased students about how much waste they generate naturally.

Set out your bins or boxes in the classroom and have a discussion with your students about what kinds of items can and can’t go in each one. Students should not know that the bins will be weighed or that the process of categorising their waste is part of an overarching activity. Encourage students to ask themselves whether something is reusable, if it can be recycled or if it’s truly trash.

At the end of every day (or week, depending on how often the trash and recycling are collected by janitorial staff), weigh each bin on your Latitude LBX, CPWplus or Aqua ABW bench scale, after ensuring you’ve tared out the weight of the bins. You may decide to simply weigh the empty bins at the beginning of the month and subtract the weight from the total thereafter, depending on your preference.

Add individual and cumulative weights to your statistics. After a week of this, you have your baseline.

Weeks 2 - 4

The following week (week 2), share your initial findings with the class. Then, seek their help in reducing, reusing and recycling more over the course of the month. Continue weighing each bin daily and monitoring how the amount of waste is increasing or decreasing and have regular conversations about why that might be.

Suggest changes both you and your students can make to keep their waste generation in check:

     - Laminate and reuse worksheets instead of printing new copies

     - Only print double-sided documents

     - Save one-sided sheets of paper for scratch paper, crafts or note-taking

     - Using metal, reusable plastic, biodegradable or silicone containers, baggies, bottles and utensils for food use instead of single-use plastic

     - Use clean plastic containers for classroom storage or organisation – like using modified water bottles as pencil holders

     - Only pack food you know you’ll eat or save leftover food for the following day to avoid tossing it later

     - Exchange or share unwanted and unopened food with classmates

Finale

At the end of the activity, present the total weight to students and discuss whether the weights in each bin went up or down and why! It’s time for students to reflect on the actions they took to reduce, reuse and recycle more often, and it’s an excellent opportunity to assign practice with averages, percentages, graphing, cause-and-effect and the scientific method! 

For a wider viewpoint, students could take their own statistics and use them as a lens into the thousands of schools nation or worldwide – what would the world be like if all schools took the same actions?

Did you know that Southern Connecticut State University had a Weigh the Waste Week at their campus? They used an Adam GFK! Check it out here. Let’s get students thinking about school waste, one weighing activity at a time!

Questions? We’re happy to answer, contact our team!

Reduce, reuse, recycle! That saying may be common in schools, but how well do your students truly get it? We suggest an activity to ensure the lesson carries some weight. Let’s begin!

The School Waste Epidemic

You might be surprised to learn that UK public schools:

     - Generate up to 80,382 tonnes of waste per school year

               -  More than 75% of generated food waste is avoidable in both primary and secondary schools

     - Only 20% of waste gets recycled even though 80% is recyclable

     - Use up to 2,000 sheets of paper per school per day

               - Studies estimate every classroom trash can is a quarter full of paper that could have been recycled

     - Utilise high levels of single-use plastic waste

               - Including utensils, water bottles, baggies and straws

These statistics are large enough that it can be hard for any student to wrap their head around. So how do you bring them down to earth? We propose an activity that combines statistics, sustainability and maths in one, turning what would be trash into a teachable moment.

Waste Weighing Activity

In this section, we’ll go over the who, what, where, why and hows of our activity, so you can take the idea from the page to the classroom with ease. Download this activity in worksheet form here.

Where?

While this activity could be altered for school-wide participation, the guidelines we’ll provide are focused on individual classrooms.

For those who teach multiple different classes each day, it may be fun to encourage friendly competition to determine which class can reduce their waste generation the most. Alternatively, a “we’re all in this together” approach can teach students that it takes a village to make change.

Who?

This is the perfect activity for both primary and secondary schools, though younger students may need assistance properly categorising their waste.

Why?

The goal for this activity is that students learn the importance of reducing waste and improving recycling rates.

By sorting and weighing their leftover food, paper and plastic, students and teachers alike can put a smaller, more personal number on how much waste is generated in their classroom on a day-to-day or weekly basis. Then, armed with these statistics, students can consciously work on:

1. Reducing: Making less waste, especially food waste
2. Reusing: Finding ways that paper and plastic items can still be useful
3. Recycling: Recognising when paper or plastic items can’t be safely or practically reused but are made of materials accepted by your local recycling program
4. Disposing Properly: Learning what constitutes true trash that can’t be either reused or recycled (dirty, greasy, coated items, Styrofoam, etc.)

What?

For this month-long activity, students will separate their waste into four different categories. Their waste is weighed regularly, the statistics tracked day by day. Though this activity is intended to last a month, everyday upkeep and maintenance are low once students begin to learn the patterns.

How?

Here we’ll explain the materials you’ll need and how you could expect to perform the activity over time.

Materials

You’ll only need six items in total:

     - Four bins or boxes, clearly labelled

               - Recyclable paper and cardboard

               - Recyclable plastic

               - Food

               - Trash

     - A bench weighing scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude LBX" title="Latitude LBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABW Washdown Scale" title="ABW Washdown Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29656"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus S" title="CPWplus S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30210"}} that can handle both higher weights and provide precise results. If you’re doing a school-wide activity (with larger bins) a floor scale like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AFK" title="AFK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29655"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus L" title="CPWplus L" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30624"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} would be more suitable.

     - A method of tracking weight statistics over the course of the activity, like the one you can download for free here. 

Week 1

The first week of the activity should be your reconnaissance week, when you gather data from unbiased students about how much waste they generate naturally.

Set out your bins or boxes in the classroom and have a discussion with your students about what kinds of items can and can’t go in each one. Students should not know that the bins will be weighed or that the process of categorising their waste is part of an overarching activity. Encourage students to ask themselves whether something is reusable, if it can be recycled or if it’s truly trash.

At the end of every day (or week, depending on how often the trash and recycling are collected by janitorial staff), weigh each bin on your Latitude LBX, CPWplus or Aqua ABW bench scale, after ensuring you’ve tared out the weight of the bins. You may decide to simply weigh the empty bins at the beginning of the month and subtract the weight from the total thereafter, depending on your preference.

Add individual and cumulative weights to your statistics. After a week of this, you have your baseline.

Weeks 2 - 4

The following week (week 2), share your initial findings with the class. Then, seek their help in reducing, reusing and recycling more over the course of the month. Continue weighing each bin daily and monitoring how the amount of waste is increasing or decreasing and have regular conversations about why that might be.

Suggest changes both you and your students can make to keep their waste generation in check:

     - Laminate and reuse worksheets instead of printing new copies

     - Only print double-sided documents

     - Save one-sided sheets of paper for scratch paper, crafts or note-taking

     - Using metal, reusable plastic, biodegradable or silicone containers, baggies, bottles and utensils for food use instead of single-use plastic

     - Use clean plastic containers for classroom storage or organisation – like using modified water bottles as pencil holders

     - Only pack food you know you’ll eat or save leftover food for the following day to avoid tossing it later

     - Exchange or share unwanted and unopened food with classmates

Finale

At the end of the activity, present the total weight to students and discuss whether the weights in each bin went up or down and why! It’s time for students to reflect on the actions they took to reduce, reuse and recycle more often, and it’s an excellent opportunity to assign practice with averages, percentages, graphing, cause-and-effect and the scientific method! 

For a wider viewpoint, students could take their own statistics and use them as a lens into the thousands of schools nation or worldwide – what would the world be like if all schools took the same actions?

Did you know that Southern Connecticut State University had a Weigh the Waste Week at their campus? They used an Adam GFK! Check it out here. Let’s get students thinking about school waste, one weighing activity at a time!

Questions? We’re happy to answer, contact our team!

Laboratories generate a lot of waste in the name of science. Chemicals, plastics, biological material and excess reagents make up the majority. In fact, each year, 150,000 tonnes of plastic waste is generated from UK labs alone, and according to Russ Phifer at ASC Chemical Health & Safety, of all lab waste is discarded reagents.

While some waste is inevitable, the current trend is unsustainable if we’re trying to maintain a healthy environment for the future. How can you reduce waste in your lab? Let’s discuss.

Use Only What You Need

An excellent way to reduce waste in the lab is to use your balance to weigh samples, chemicals, reagents and other materials before using them. Weight-based measurements are more accurate than volume-based measurements, because the density of a sample can impact its volume while weight isn’t affected. Ensure you’re using exactly the amount you want consistently, preventing waste caused by using too much or too little of a material and ruining the batch.

Reusable Containers

Nearly all scales and balances offer the option to Tare a weight off your weighing results. The most common use for tare is to remove the weight of containers that help get lightweight and liquid samples on and off the balance safely, without any spills. That way, the display only reflects the sample, rather than both sample and container.

Instead of single-use containers when weighing samples, such as paper, thin plastic or aluminium, we encourage the use of reusable containers. Glass, ceramic, stainless steel and silicone are excellent options, depending on your needs. These materials are durable, easy to clean and resistant to rust or bacterial growth. They’re suitable for a wide variety of weighing tasks without risking cross contamination when properly cleaned between uses.

Thorough Training

Weigh it once, weigh it correctly! When balance operators aren’t familiar with a balance, they can make mistakes that inadvertently lead to increased waste.

For example, say you’re looking to record the weight of a liquid sample before and after it undergoes a chemical reaction. If you forget to tare the flask after you’ve combined chemicals, there’s no way to reverse time for a redo. You’d have to start over with a new batch, which means that the first one goes to waste!

Seemingly simple mistakes like forgetting to tare containers, not closing the draught shield, using the wrong function (like net total instead of accumulation) or neglecting calibration can really add to waste if they occur repeatedly over time. Luckily, those can all be avoided by ensuring each operator is properly, thoroughly trained in how to operate the balance. If you would like additional training on your balance, you can contact the Adam team for guidance.

Regular Calibration Checks

Calibration helps keep your balance accurate and precise over time, otherwise your results could start drifting or jumping. The aim is to calibrate before accuracy issues arise, not after – otherwise, how could you tell when your results really started going wonky?

The more precise your balance, the more often we recommend calibration. Laboratory balances should be calibrated at least once a month, or before any major weighing sessions. There’s no such thing as calibrating too often.

In highly precise laboratories, if your balance hasn’t been calibrated for a while, your results aren’t considered reliable. That means everything must be reweighed and you may have already disposed of some samples. Calibration only takes a few minutes; it won’t interrupt your workday. In fact, if the balance offers internal calibration, it can be pre-scheduled to calibrate overnight!

Digital vs. Paper Records

Handwritten records are a thing of the past. Not only are they unsustainable, they’re subject to human error and bad handwriting. With helpful data collection software like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU" title="AdamDU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}}, you can record readings from up to 8 balances at once, without the need for any paper. AdamDU can also analyse the results to help find patterns in the data and then export everything into an Excel or CSV file.

If you need a physical copy, connect your balance to a printer like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2" title="ATP 2" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}}, which will print GLP-compliant data in as little space as possible, saving paper.

Let’s work together to create a more sustainable future. To learn more, contact the Adam team.

Let’s raise the subject of dead loads. What are they and how can you use the knowledge to benefit your customers? Let’s discuss.

What is a Dead Load?

A dead load on a weighing scale or balance is how much weight the load cell is continuously handling, even if the scale has been calibrated to ignore it in the results. It’s the opposite of a live load, or a load that’s actively placed on the pan to be measured.

For example, consider something that’s almost never removed from a scale. It constantly puts an even pressure on the load cell or force restoration mechanism, but you would never know because the weight of it doesn’t appear in the results. Have you figured it out? The weighing pan!

How Does a Dead Load Impact Your Customer’s Weighing Process?

If they’re using the scale with the sole dead load being the original hardware, then it won’t impact their weighing process at all. A scale being used with its intended pan has been built and designed with this in mind. It’s already been calibrated to accommodate the constant weight as if it’s not there.

However, you may want to recommend a heavier fitted accessory, like a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="roller deck" title="roller deck" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36729"}}, to suit your customer's weighing needs. If they’ll be using it frequently enough, it would be justifiable for them to create a dead load.

Conditions for Creating a Dead Load

Your customers shouldn’t create a dead load whenever or with anything they want, it’s only a valid practice under specific circumstances:

1. The accessory will be fitted to the scale, as a permanent addition

        - Containers like scoops or bins should not be dead loaded, even if tared, to maintain the net weight in records

2. The fitted accessory weighs more than 10% of the scale’s capacity

        - If it weighs less, the scale will automatically zero the weight and the capacity will remain in full as if it’s not there

        - Above 10%, the scale will have a hard time zeroing or taring, so a dead load is the next option. However, the capacity will be reduced accordingly to prevent overloads

3. The scale allows for external calibration and does not contain internal test weights

4. The scale is not legal-for-trade or used to price items by weight

        - Altering the calibration can void the legal-for-trade status

Creating a Dead Load

If the above conditions are met, it’s safe to suggest that your customer creates a dead load. They’ll need to call Adam Equipment’s service team to walk them through a factory calibration – a precaution to prevent unintentionally changing other important settings.

Once the scale has undergone a factory calibration with the accessory on the pan, it will have a redefined concept of zero. Your customer will never see the weight of the accessory in the results, tared or untared. In fact, their scale may even show an error code if the accessory is removed.

Simple!

Interested in learning more about how to create a dead load? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

"I am delighted to be joining Adam Equipment at such a pivotal moment in the company’s long and successful history,” Maher said. “With its strong global team ethos, I look forward to helping take the company to the next level through product innovation, an expanded product range and a continued focus on customer excellence."

Maher joins Adam on 28 July, bringing a wealth of experience in the weighing industry.

Most recently, Maher was Managing Director for the UK and Ireland for transportation manufacturer Schmitz Cargobull, following previous roles in industrial weighing technology with Minebea Intec and Avery Weigh-Tronix.

His career began with an apprenticeship and Higher National Certificate in Electronic Engineering. Starting as a service technician at Avery Weigh-Tronix, his roles in the weighing industry have included Systems Support Engineer, Product Manager for Inspection and Country Manager before becoming Minebea Intec’s Director for North America, the UK and Ireland.

Looking ahead, Maher said, “I’m really excited for this next chapter in my career. The experience and knowledge I’ve gained over the 35 years in the weighing industry has set me up well to help lead Adam Equipment forward, and I can’t wait to get started with the team.”

As CEO, Maher will oversee Adam Equipment’s worldwide operations, which include its Milton Keynes headquarters in the UK, branches in the United States, Germany, South Africa, Australia and China, alongside its manufacturing facility in China.

Maher succeeds Richard Storey, who served as Adam’s CEO / Managing Director from May 2019 — when the company was acquired by Indutrade — until his recent retirement.

Earlier this year, Storey announced his intention to retire from the business to Indutrade's board of directors. Looking back on his tenure leading Adam, he reflected that, "it has been a privilege to work with a great group of colleagues, customers and suppliers, but also my father, Alan, who set up the company, and my brothers, as we grew the company to what it is today."

“I wish Colin and the management team all the very best for the future as they continue the journey forward,” Storey said. “Having worked for Adam for over 32 years, I felt the time was right for the business and me personally to step away, but not before we had built a platform for the future and I’m looking forward to seeing the exciting steps forward that the company will take.”

About Adam Equipment

Offering more than 50 years of experience in the industry, Adam Equipment designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, and animal/veterinary markets. The company’s head office is in Milton Keynes, England and it has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany. 

Media Contact:

Brian Thomas

Adam Equipment

press@adamequipment.com

+1 (203) 790-4774

SOURCE Adam Equipment

If you’re looking to purchase a laboratory balance, you’ll be seeing semi-micro analytical balances and microbalances out in the market. What’s the difference? How do they work? Ultimately, how do you make the right choice? Let’s get into it.

What are Semi-Micro Analytical Balances?

Semi-micro balances offer highly precise, 0.01mg readabilities. Their capacities are typically no higher than 100g. Analytical balances have 0.1mg/0.0001g readabilities with larger capacities, between 80 and 510g.

Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox" title="Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}} ranges both boast two models ({{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="EAB 125i" title="EAB 125i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36610"}} & {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="225i" title="225i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36634"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="SAB 125i" title="SAB 125i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36641"}} & {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="225i" title="225i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36632"}}) that are simultaneously semi-micro and analytical balances. This function is known as dual range.

How Do Dual Range Semi-Micro Analytical Balances Work?

The dual range Equinox and Solis models provide five-place 0.00001g semi-micro readabilities up to a certain weight. After surpassing that weight and up until the balance’s capacity, they automatically switch to four-place analytical readabilities. With this ability, you can weigh a wider range of items on the same balance without sacrificing highly precise results when you need them.

Adam dual range lab balances also feature an additional function called floating range. Floating range allows for the use of heavier containers to weigh samples while still receiving five-place results. Learn more about floating range and its benefits in our recent blog here.

What are Microbalances?

Microbalances are extremely precise, particularly sensitive balances with average capacities running about 22g and readabilities as fine as 0.000001g (1 microgram, aka 1µg). Ultra-microbalances, an even rarer subcategory, can feature capacities as low as 2.1g, with 0.1µg readabilities.

They’re it – the finest readabilities offered commercially. If you’re in an industry that requires insane levels of precision, there is literally no higher step up. However, with that level of precision comes some significant drawbacks.

First, their sensitivity. Microbalances are more susceptible to environmental factors than any other type of balance, including:

     - Electro-magnetic fields

     - Static electricity

     - Vibrations

     - Air currents

     - Temperature changes

     - Dust and other small particulate matter

That can be quite frustrating because you must take a lot of precautions to ensure your results are reliable and not under any environmental influence. For example, even leaning your arm down on the surface your microbalance is sitting on could cause fluctuations. It takes a high-operator skill to be able to utilise a microbalance effectively.

Secondly, the expense. Microbalances can cost several thousands, while ultra micro balances can reach as much as twenty thousand. However, you get what you pay for, as many microbalances are fit with environmental protections to try and minimise their influence. They’re typically equipped with built-in ionisers, draught shields and anti-static glass.

Common Uses for Both Types of Balances

Microbalances and semi-micro analytical balances are used for the same things, with different levels of precision:

     - Pharmaceuticals – For research as well as quality control. Medicine doses are such that the tiniest increase or decrease of chemicals can impact efficacy.

     - Laboratories – Measuring chemicals and other substances for testing and reactionary purposes. Sometimes, less is more.

     - Forensics – From hair follicles or residues to the fibers of fabric, even the most minute evidence counts.

     - Manufacturing – For when it’s crucial that every product is created perfectly up to standards.

     - Environmental Science – Measuring the amount of airborne particles that collect on filters that could impact human and environmental health

So, How Do You Know Which Balance to Choose?

Consider the average weight of items you’ll need to weigh regularly, as well as the number of decimal places required for your data.

If you truly need that level of precision, microbalances and ultra micro balances are the only options that provide results in six or seven decimal places. They can only weigh 20g or less at a time, but if all your items are below 20g anyways and you can manage the environmental factors effectively, a microbalance may be worth it.

Otherwise, combination semi-micro analytical balances like the Equinox and Solis models boast more versatility, with both five-place and four-place results as well as higher capacities – two balances for the price of one! Plus, work becomes much more efficient for laboratories performing varied tasks in sequence. No switching back and forth between machines!

Still wondering which is best for you? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

A lesser known but no less fascinating function on some laboratory balances is called floating range, which helps make your machine more versatile. Let’s discuss what floating range is, why it’s useful and who benefits from the function the most.

Fixed Range vs. Dual Range vs. Floating Range

To understand floating range, you first need to know how the function compares to others.

Fixed

Most scales and balances are fixed range – one capacity, one readability – like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LAB 214i" title="Luna LAB 214i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30413"}}, which offers a capacity of 210g with a readability of 0.0001g. The same readability is applied whether the item on the pan weighs 25% of the capacity or 95%.

Dual

Dual range is when one balance offers two different capacities, one lower and one higher, and two different readabilities, one more precise and one slightly less precise. Up until your sample reaches the weight of the lower capacity, you’ll get the finer results. Beyond that and until you reach the higher capacity, you’ll get the less-fine results.

For example, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox EAB 125i" title="Equinox EAB 125i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36610"}} offers 0.00001g readability for net weights up to 62g and 0.0001g up to its full 120g capacity. Adam's new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris PAB 125i" title="Polaris PAB 125i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36883"}} offers 0.00001g readability up to 80g, and 4-place results until 120g. However, dual range isn’t limited to laboratory balances; some retail scales like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift Price Computing scales" title="Swift Price Computing scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}} also offer this ability. 

It’s an ideal feature for those who want to get as much use out of their weighing scale or balance as possible. With only one capacity and readability, particularly on more precise laboratory balances like semi-micro’s, you’re quite limited on what you can weigh without overloading. Dual range widens your possibilities, providing both high precision and adaptability.

Floating

Floating range is a function on some dual-range semi-micro and analytical balances, including Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris" title="Polaris" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36875"}},  {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox" title="Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}}. You can't have floating range without dual range first. It allows you to obtain five-decimal (0.00001g) weighing reults for light samples, even if they're added to a container that is heavier than the standard five-decimal threshold. 

Why is Floating Range Useful?

Let’s say you want to weigh a small amount of liquid in a glass flask that weighs 80g by itself (about the same as a bar of soap). Because the flask’s weight alone surpasses the Equinox's 62g threshold for five-place results, balances without a floating range function would only be able to provide four-place results for your liquid sample. When you need ultra-precision, four-place just isn’t enough.

Balances with a floating range function, like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Polaris PAB 125i" title="Polaris PAB 125i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36883"}} or the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="EAB 125i" title="EAB 125i" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36610"}} let you tare out the flask, after which they’ll provide five-place results for your sample as if the sample’s weight is all that matters. This gives you another 58 grams to work with at five-place precision, up until the total weight on the pan reaches the true 120g capacity. 

Who Benefits from Floating Range?

Though containers like flasks, weigh boats or beakers can be heavier than we want, they’re crucial tools when weighing. Without them you wouldn’t be able to weigh liquids or powders without the risk of leaving debris behind or even damaging the balance. That’s the last thing anyone wants to happen to such expensive equipment! Floating range lets you use quality containers without sacrificing precision, increasing the versatility of the balance and benefitting any who uses one.

Want a balance with floating range for yourself? Contact the Adam team, we’d be happy to help.

When your business is shipping tens or hundreds of orders on a daily basis, streamlining the process as much as possible can save you huge amounts of time – and money.

Such was the case with Partsource, a UK-based automotive parts supplier shipping everything from gaskets to ECUs to customers as far afield as the Middle East on a daily basis. In order to make the process of shipping orders quicker and easier, they needed an accurate, intuitive weighing scale for calculating the shipping costs for each order.

Not providing the correct weights and dimensions to couriers can lead to unexpected fees for the business – something owner Matthew Jones was keen to avoid.

Matthew says: “We dispatch both large and small orders daily, so I needed a reliable scale to accurately weigh shipments prior to dispatch.

“Up until recently, I was using a very old industrial scale from the 1960s, so an upgrade was long overdue! Key criteria included accuracy, ease of use, and suitability for a busy warehouse environment.”

Space-saving, high-capacity weighing scales

While large shipments can be weighing easily on a platform scale, some businesses need a weighing solution that’s high-capacity, but without the large footprint of a platform.

“Space in our warehouse is at a premium, and our previous scale was bulky and permanently in the way.”

This key requirement led Matthew to Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AELP Pallet Beams" title="AELP Pallet Beams" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36697"}}, which not only provide capacity options up to 3000kg and readability of 200g, but are also portable.

“I chose the AELP weigh beams because they can be stored away when not in use, freeing up valuable floor space.”

A key benefit of Adam’s AELP weigh beams in particular is the handles and wheels for moving the scale. Plus, the indicator works from a rechargeable battery, reducing the amount of cable. This makes them an ideal pallet scale for businesses that lack the space for a platform scale.

Significantly improved the speed of order prep

 Now kitted out with portable, easy to use AELP Pallet Beams, Partsource’s warehouse can get on with business – albeit achieving more in the same amount of time. Weighing shipments accurately means shipping costs are calculated far more accurately, meaning no surprise extra costs for the business. Inaccurate shipping cost calculations can waste time, and of course, money.

“The AELP weigh beams have significantly improved the speed and accuracy of our order prep. We can now calculate shipping costs with much greater precision, avoiding unexpected fees.

“The portability of the AELP really is a standout feature — it’s incredibly convenient to tuck it away when not in use. This has also freed up valuable warehouse space, which makes a noticeable difference in day-to-day operations.”

And, the convenience and business improvements that came with using the AELP led Partsource to purchase an additional Adam weighing scale – a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus Bench Scale" title="CPWplus Bench Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}}.

“The CPWplus has been especially useful for our growing sister business, Selo Source Ltd, where we specialise in fluid sealing components - o-rings, oil seals, copper washers, bonded washers and so on. It handles weights up to 75kg, which covers nearly all our regular boxed orders.”

Click the image above to download our full Case Study

Download the PDF by clicking the link above

Using one of the planet’s most renewable resources – small diameter trees and residual wood chips left over from sustainable forestry practices – TimberHP creates wood fiber insulation products. According to the company, its toxin-free insulation is resistant to moisture, mold and fire, while reducing heating and cooling loads. Its products are competitive with traditional insulation, and are safe and easy to install, requiring neither hazmat suit nor face mask. 

The company’s products line includes TimberBoard, TimberBatt and TimberFill. 

TimberBoard, a carbon-negative insulation board, can be used for both exterior and interior use. It’s available with a single-ply square edge or with a tongue-and-groove edge to connect boards together. 

Benefitting from the natural sound-absorbing properties of wood, TimberBatt is used for thermal cavities and acoustic insulation. 

Blown-in TimberFill provides dense-pack cavity insulation for walls, floors and ceilings, and loose fill insulation for attics. 

By weighing large-scale samples of its installed blowing fiber, TimberHP uses AELP for its quality assurance and continuous improvement efforts. This use is based on ASTM standard C1574, which was developed for mineral fibers but is also relevant to TimberHP products. 

AELP was also used during the installation of an 80 sq. ft. attic space, which was instrumental in developing the coverage charts the company publishes on their product bags as a reference for installers. 

“This larger sample size allows us to get a more accurate reading of the installed density, which helps to determine the coverage chart for attic applications,” according to Jason Todd, TimberHP’s Director of Building Science and Industry Support. “We can also weigh larger wall sections to ensure that the installed density within a cavity is self-supporting, meaning it won’t slump or sag over time.” 

One of the things that make AELP so useful for TimberHP is that the pallet beams can be adjusted closer together or further apart to accommodate varying sizes of goods that need to be weighed. This includes a variety of objects, like containers or platforms.  

The rugged beams – which offer capacities from 2200lb / 1000kg to 6600lb /3000kg and readabilities from 0.5lb / 0.2kg to 2lb/ 0.5kg – are built for demanding environments, making them suitable for industrial use like TimberHP. “Precision, of course, matters, but since we are an industrial facility, durability is also very important,” Todd added. 

Paired with one of Adam Equipment weighing indicators (such as the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-S" title="GK-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36758"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-Plus" title="GK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36757"}} checkweighing indicators or the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 504" title="AE 504" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29714"}} label-printing indicator), AELP can be customized to the user’s needs. 

With their AELP, TimberHP uses an {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403 washdown weighing indicator" title="AE 403 washdown weighing indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29701"}}. The rugged, stainless steel AE 403 is rated IP68, which means the indicator is fully protected from particulates matter like dust and can be safely and easily washed down. 

For easy reading of weighing results, the indicator is connected to AELP by a 15-ft. shielded cable and can be placed for optimal viewing. With built-in wheels and handles, AELP goes where it’s needed: the beams can easily be moved around in a warehouse, manufacturing facility or even on a job site. 

Scales are part of TimberHP’s production process throughout various stages, from quality control to manufacturing. 

In addition to AELP, TimberHP employs weighing scales for other uses in its manufacturing facility, including: 

     •   Weighing material in its lab and testing stations (verifying thermal or fire resistance characteristics at the correct density) 

     •   The weight of bags of TimberFill are monitored on the conveyor in the packaging line 

     •   The correct ratio of refined softwood fiber to an engineered binding fiber is determined by weight when making the TimberBatt material.  

In the field, installation support teams can weigh samples to ensure that the blown fiber is installed correctly. 

From lab testing to packaging to in-field verification, weighing solutions like Adam Equipment’s AELP pallet beams are seamlessly integrated into TimberHP’s operations. Their versatility and durability support TimberHP’s mission to deliver safe, sustainable and high-performance insulation products. 

You’ve heard that baking is a science, but have you heard of baker’s math? The age-old method of assigning percentages to baking ingredients has gotten an upgrade – with weighing scales! Let’s get into what makes percentage weighing a baker’s best friend.

What is the Baker’s Percentage?

The Baker’s Percentage, also known as baker’s math, is intended to be an easy method of scaling recipes from single to large, multi-batch proportions.

Since the main ingredient in most baked goods is flour, bakers will consider that 100%. Then, every other ingredient becomes a percentage of the flour. For example, if you’re making one Red Velvet cake, you’ll use about 375g of flour – that’s 100%. That means that 400g of sugar is about 106.6% and 6g of cocoa powder is 1.6%.

You can calculate this by performing the formula [(A/B) x 100]. A is the “part” and B is the “whole”. 400g divided by 375g is 1.067, and 1.067 multiplied by 100 is 106.7%.

So, if you’re making twelve Red Velvet cakes, that would be 4500g of flour (375g x 12) – still 100%. Now you’re able to calculate the amount of sugar and cocoa powder you need for this much larger recipe using the same percentages! By multiplying 4500g of flour by 106.7%, you’ll get about 4797g of sugar. By multiplying 4500g of flour by 1.6%, you’ll get 72g of cocoa powder.

While it’s easy conceptionally, there’s still a bit of math involved and you’ll likely need a calculator. But what if you didn’t have to do all that math yourself?

What is Percentage Weighing?

Percentage weighing is a function on a weighing scale or balance that turns the weight of an object into a percentage that can be added or subtracted from to make a new result. For example, after taring out an empty bowl, you can add flour and weigh it on the scale. After turning on the percentage weighing function, that weight becomes 100%. Then, you can add flour to go over 100% or remove flour to decrease the percentage.

Many different types of scales offer percentage weighing, from analytical balances like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna" title="Luna" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} to {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT platforms with Adam’s GK-Plus indicator" title="PT platforms with Adam’s GK-Plus indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36699"}}. Small commercial bakeries will benefit the most from bench or floor scales like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK or GFK-Plus" title="GBK or GFK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}}, depending on the quantities of goods you’re preparing at once.

How Does Percentage Weighing Change the Baking Game?

There are a few ways percentage weighing improves the batch-baking process.

Ingredients

Let’s start with the same Red Velvet cake recipe. You put your 375g of flour on the weighing scale and turn on percentage weighing. That 375g shows as 100%. Now, tare out the flour so the scale displays 0% and add your 400g of sugar – the display will show 106.7%. After taring out the sugar and adding 6g of cocoa powder, the display will show 1.6%. This is a much more efficient way to establish your percentages for scaling purposes.

Record those percentages!

When one cake becomes twelve and you need to scale up your recipe, percentage weighing can help you out there as well. Place your 4500g of flour on the scale and turn on percentage weighing so the display shows 100%. Now, simply add each ingredient until the display reaches the appropriate percentage increase. After adding the proper amount of sugar, the display should show 206.7%. If it doesn't, all you need to do is add more! Add all the other ingredients the same way to create a delicious and consistent batch of Red Velvet cakes.

Portioning

Not only can percentage weighing help with formulating large batches, it can also help with portioning. Once you homogenise the ingredients into a batter or dough, turn on percentage weighing to make the whole thing your 100% starting point. Since the plan is to make twelve Red Velvet cakes, divide 100 by 12 to determine exactly how much batter each cake should get.

In this case, 100 divided by 12 is about 8.3%. It’s not normally a very smooth percentage to work with, but percentage weighing makes it easy. Remove the bowl and the batter and set the scale to zero without turning off percentage weighing. Place your cake tin on the scale and tare off the empty tin. Then, pour the batter into the cake tin until the percentage reaches 8.3%. See? Easy!

Mix and Match

You can even mix and match both techniques. For example, adding sugar to a bowl until the display shows 206.7% and then taring out the whole thing so the display shows 0%. After adding small ingredients like cocoa powder, instead of doing the math to determine what 206.7 + 1.6% is, you’ll be able to add until you see 1.6%.

What Other Ways Can Scales Help Bakers?

Percentage weighing isn’t the only way bakers can benefit from the use of scales!

Measuring Small Quantities

Compact scales like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CB" title="CB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29736"}} or even precision balances like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland" title="Highland" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}}, which coincidentally also offers percentage weighing, are ideal for weighing small quantities of ingredients. Extracts, spices and food colourings could get lost in the results on bench or floor scales with coarser readabilities but are caught perfectly well on precision balances.

Weighing these ingredients instead of measuring by volume helps ensure that nothing is left behind in the transfer from teaspoon to mixing bowl. Sticky ingredients like honey pour slowly and they’re hard to remove completely, so measuring by weight means you’re only measuring what gets in the bowl!

Selling By Weight

When you want to offer your customers the ability to purchase a variety of baked goods without putting a charge on each one individually, you can price them by weight instead! For example, instead of letting people pile a box with a variety of cookies and purchasing them at one set price, you can weigh the box on a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale" title="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}} and charge accordingly.

The Swift is a trade approved scale, or a scale that’s been governmentally approved for commercial transactions because it’s proven to be accurate and trustworthy. Whenever you're pricing by weight, you’ll need to use a trade approved scale certified by your region’s governing body to comply with legal guidelines.

Simply set a unit price per weight, such as £2 per 100g of standard cookies. When customers bring up their box of cookies, your Swift will calculate the price they should pay based on that weight. If a customer brings up 500g of cookies, they’ll end up paying £10,  whereas someone else bringing up 1356g for a party would pay £27.12.

This method works best if you set the price per type of product. Cookies have one price per weight unit, pastries with another and keep them separate when weighing. That way, you can set more than one price and store them in your scale to recall later.

Not sure which scale or balance with percentage weighing is the right fit for your bakery? Don’t make a half-baked decision! Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

In the beverage industry, whether you’re brewing beer, producing wine or creating spirits, precision at every stage of production is crucial. From ensuring consistent formulations to avoiding packaging mistakes, accurate measurements help reduce costs, maintain quality, and guarantee regulatory compliance. This blog will explore how Adam Equipment scales and balances can help enhance your operations when it comes to:

    - Raw material intake

    - Material Preparation

    - Formulation & recipe accuracy

    - Quality control & lab testing

    - Packaging & bottling

    - Labeling & traceability

    - Shipping & distribution

Bottoms up!

Raw Material Intake

For large-scale beer or wine production, you frequently receive large shipments of hops, malts, yeast, grapes and sugar, among other common ingredients. You’ll want to ensure that the weight of the goods you’ve received matches what you ordered to make sure you’re not paying more for less. Platform scales like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam Equipment's PT" title="Adam Equipment's PT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}}, with their high capacities and large pans, are ideal for weighing these ingredients as they arrive, whether individually or on a pallet.

Weighing the incoming ingredients is also a method of inventory. Over time, you’ll learn the weight you use in ingredients over time and how quickly they deplete. You would be able to determine when to reorder supplies more effectively.

Moisture content can have an impact on the weight of your ingredients, like malt or hops. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB moisture analyser" title="PMB moisture analyser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}} can be used to test small samples of ingredients to ensure that the moisture levels are as they should be. If the moisture is too high, it’s important to notice as soon as possible because bacteria spreads rapidly.

Material Preparation

The PMB is also helpful when preparing the ingredients to undergo production. For example, pressing grapes for wine. Once the grapes have been crushed, removing the stems and breaking the skins, they move on to the pressing stage. After being pressed once, a sample of the remaining pulp can be moisture tested. If there’s a significant amount of moisture remaining, it would be worth it to press it a second time. Fair warning, however, pressing too much moisture out may turn the wine bitter!

Formulation & Recipe Accuracy

With so many different brands and flavors of beer and wine out there, the taste of your product is the most important way of standing out from the crowd and gaining a loyal customer base.

There’s a lot that impacts the taste, especially in wine – when the grapes were harvested, how they were pressed, how long they aged, how much natural sugar is in the grapes, etc. Each batch may end up different chemically, which is why sometimes other additives, like sugar or enzymes are used to help get a consistent taste.

Precision balances are a crucial cog in the process, as they provide highly accurate measurements down to the milligram. Sulfites, for example, are naturally found in grapes, but additional sulfites can be added to wine for preservation as well as to encourage good color and flavor. In beer, some hops are more potent than others, like Citra, and have high alpha acid content. Because it’s so strong, smaller quantities can be used per batch of beer, measured by weight. Measuring by weight is more accurate than volume measurements and helps guarantee batch-to-batch consistency!

Quality Control & Lab Testing

Once you’ve settled your recipe, the quality control team in the lab needs to ensure that each batch is chemically sound each time. In the production stage, when the liquid itself is being processed and tested, this involves some ultra-precise science with the help of an analytical balance.

For example, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna Analytical Balances" title="Luna Analytical Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} boast a density determination function. This can be used to test a sample’s density to the nearest 0.0001g. Ingredients like sugar can increase density, so if the result determines that the sample has a higher density than normal, it could be that there’s too much sugar. On the other hand, if the sample isn’t dense enough, there could be too much alcohol, since ethanol is less dense than water.

Analytical balances can also help measuring out exact sample sizes of both the wine or beer and a testing substance, like pH Buffers and different types of reagents. As exact ratios are required to get the reaction you need, it’s important to ensure that the quantities are weighed precisely!

Packaging & Bottling

Quality control continues all the way to the end of production, checking bottles and boxes after packaging to confirm they meet specifications. This is a highly regulated process; it’s illegal to sell a customer a product of a different weight than advertised. That’s why checkweighing scales like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK-Plus" title="GBK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} are so important. Your product needs to weigh enough to meet customer satisfaction without becoming a loss to the company.

Simply set the upper and lower limits into your checkweighing scale and watch the display from the corner of your eye as it changes colors to indicate whether the bottle, can or box is above (red), within (green) or below (yellow) the limits you’ve set. Using checkweighing scales is a quick and easy way to safeguard against losing money from over- or under-filling the product.

You’ll quickly notice when a certain batch is consistently over or under filled. Then, you’re able to stop production and check the bottling process before any more defective products are sent through to the next stage.

Labeling & Traceability

Many Adam scales and balances are Good Manufacturing Practice and Good Laboratory Practice compliant. They can be set up to provide the required date, time and user identification information along with the weight when using printers or label-printing software. This additional data is included to improve traceability.

Label printing scales like Adam’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTT" title="BTT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36770"}} are excellent during the packaging stage for this reason. You can place a label with the weight, date, time and even QR or bar codes on each box or pallet. Having the label available for viewing is not only helpful for keeping track of inventory before the product is shipped but also for identifying batches if there are any recalls or quality checks necessary.

For example, if a defect is discovered in products that were packaged on a particular date, each box will have that necessary data prominently displayed so they can be pulled off the shelves quickly.

If you’re not leaning in the label-printing direction, Adam scales and balances offer a variety of interfaces so you can connect them to accessories like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2 printers" title="ATP 2 printers" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}} or even analysis software like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU" title="AdamDU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}}. Adam Equipment’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam Connect" title="Adam Connect" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36833"}} series of wireless connectivity modules even add the capability to connect to printers, PCs and other systems wirelessly!

By taking advantage of the offered connectivity options for use with printers and PCs, you can build a thorough record of weighing information that can be used to streamline operations like inventory management, regulatory compliance and performance analysis.

Shipping & Distribution

Finally – they’re outta here. Almost!

Bottles and cans are heavy, especially if you’re sending large quantities to breweries, wineries or liquor shops on pallets. Because freight charges are frequently based on weight, you may face significant charges. You’ll want to weigh your goods before they’re shipped so you can help guarantee you’re not overcharged.

For a multi-purpose solution, try a pallet truck scale like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTSplus" title="PTSplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29723"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTT" title="PTT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29717"}} so you can weigh and wheel the pallet to the shipping doc at the same time, turning two steps into one and improving efficiency.

Though they can both weigh pallets up to 2000kg, the PTSplus is known for its color-changing display for checkweighing and its dynamic weighing capabilities so even sloshing casks and barrels can be weighed accurately. The PTT, with its built-in label printer, allows you to label the pallet with the weight, date and time for future reference.

Create and send off your bottled beverage with the confidence only a weighing scale can provide! Wondering which scale or balance would be the best fit for your beverage operation? Contact the Adam Equipment team, we’ll be happy to help.

Adam’s highlighted products include food-safe scales, washdown scales and trade-approved scales. Many offer stainless steel construction, providing durability for long-term use as well as easy day-to-day cleanup.

“Food safety is an important concern for equipment used in the food and beverage industry,” said Tom Storey, president of Adam Equipment, Inc. “We’re proud to offer a variety of NSF-certified scales that help protect consumers from food-borne illnesses, whether in manufacturing, quality control or food prep.”

Adam will be showcasing several options for NSF-certified food safe scales, such as Gladiator bench and floor scales, Aqua bench scales and Aqua Stainless Steel bench scales. Each of those scales are also IP (Ingress Protection)-rated for shielding from water and food debris. The IP designations mean that the scales can safely be operated in messy areas without their internal components being damaged by water or food matter getting inside.

Adam’s Swift price computing scale — a trade-approved scale for use where goods will be sold by a price based on weight, such as markets, delis and other retail establishments — will also be shown in the booth. Swift is approved by both NTEP and Measurement Canada, so it can be used in the U.S. or Canada. Swift’s front and rear displays allow both the seller and the buyer to see the weight, price per unit and selling price at the same time, ensuring a fair transaction for both parties.

Outside of retail, trade-approved scales may be used for selling goods by weight in a B2B setting. Adam’s Gladiator washdown bench and floor scales include several legal-for-trade models, denoted by an M in their model number (i.e., GGS 15aM), approved by both NTEP and Measurement Canada.

Other Adam offerings exhibited at the show will include products used for quality control in food testing labs like the Highland precision balance, Latitude LBX compact bench scale and PMB moisture analyzer, as well as scales that can be used for weighing commercial ingredients like the CBX portable compact balance.

To schedule a one-on-one meeting with Adam representatives during the National Restaurant Association Show, email sales@adamequipment.com. For more information on Adam Equipment and its scales, balances and associated products, go to www.adamequipment.com.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment, which celebrated its 50th anniversary in 2022, designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, botanicals/CBD, food, and animal/veterinary markets. The company’s head office is in Milton Keynes, England and it has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany. 

Media Contact:

Brian Thomas

Adam Equipment

press@adamequipment.com

(203) 790-4774

SOURCE Adam Equipment

Your scale or balance boasts enhanced connectivity – but what does that really mean? What kinds of connectivity are out there and what would be the benefit of taking advantage? Let’s discuss.

What Does “Connectivity” Mean for Weighing Equipment?

When weighing scales or balances offer connectivity, it means you can connect them to printers, PCs or other devices to transmit weight data. Adam Equipment offers five different connectivity options: RS-232, USB, RJ45 Ethernet, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

Almost all Adam scales and balances boast at least one built-in interface. Some, like our new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTT Touch-Screen Label-Printing Scales" title="BTT Touch-Screen Label-Printing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36770"}}, can be customised upon ordering to include the interfaces you want. Though you may not have that option on every scale or balance, accessories like our communication adapters can help bridge the gap. They can turn USB interfaces into RS-232 or vice versa.

Our new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam Connect" title="Adam Connect" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36833"}} accessory can even turn a USB or RS-232 interface into a wireless connection. Simply plug in the Sender ({{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTM-01" title="BTM-01" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36806"}}) to your scale or balance. Then, connect the corresponding Receiver to your PC ({{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTM-02" title="BTM-02" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36807"}}) or printer ({{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTM-03" title="BTM-03" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36805"}}) to wirelessly transmit weight data and more up to 12 metres away. This is the perfect solution when you need a wireless connection and don’t want to purchase a whole new balance.

However, what are the benefits of connecting your scale or balance to a PC or printer?

The Benefits of Connected Weighing Equipment

Connectivity benefits your business by making it easier to make the most out of such crucial results. For example:

Improved Efficiency & Accuracy

Transcribing weight data by hand has its place, but you must admit that it takes a lot longer and there’s a higher risk of human error. The time spent writing results adds up quickly, and sloppy handwriting or a 1 that looks slightly too much like a 7 can lead to compromised data. If you connect to a printer like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2" title="ATP 2" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}}, you’ll get hard copies of results that are guaranteed to be accurate with just the press of a button.

Traceability and GLP/GMP Compliance

Good Laboratory and Good Manufacturing Practices (GLP and GMP) have strict data requirements. The date, time and person working must be recorded along with the weighing data. This helps ensure that the data is traceable. That way, if there’s one batch that seems to weigh significantly more than average, it’s easier to determine if that batch genuinely is defective or if it’s user error.

Many Adam scales and balances, such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna laboratory balance series" title="Luna laboratory balance series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} and our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTT Label Printing Scales" title="BTT Label Printing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36770"}} are GLP or GMP compliant. When you connect them to a printer and print your results, you’ll have the option to include the required date, time and user ID number as well.

Advanced Data Analysis

Having data is one thing, knowing what to do with it is another. That’s why connecting to software like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU" title="AdamDU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} can be so helpful. AdamDU collects information from up to eight Adam balances simultaneously. Now, you can get real-time statistical analysis, seeing the minimum, maximum, median, mean, variance and standard deviation of your results. Then, export that data to use however you need.

Integration with Existing Systems

Have you been using a:

    • Data logger

    • PLC

    • Relay

    • Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS)

Or another kind of data collection software that you’re happy with? That’s great! Adam scales and balances can integrate with your existing systems easily. Simply connect via the available interfaces. Afterall, we wouldn’t want you to abandon programs you already know and love!

Have questions about connectivity? The Adam team is available to help.

Finding the right dedicated weighing zone for your scale can be tricky, especially if you have uneven floors to contend with. This blog will discuss why levelling scales is so important, how to level the scale to the best of your ability and what your options are if it’s just not possible. Let’s get started.

Why Do Weighing Scales Need to Be Level?

There are four main reasons to level your scale to the best of your ability:

1.      Load Cell Performance / Even Load Distribution

If your scale is uneven, the altered weight distribution of the items you’re weighing can end up wearing out the load cell(s) more quickly.

Most floor scales only have one or four load cells, either in the middle or on all four corners. Platform scales will have up to five load cells, in the middle and every corner. Uneven weight distribution means one is consistently handling more weight than another, rather than splitting the weight evenly. Eventually, your results will become irreparably inconsistent until you replace the worn-out load cell. You’ll also get inconsistent readings if the weight is constantly on one side.

2.      Accuracy

While the display translates the weight of your item into a weight reading that we can understand, the true measurements come from the load cell. When the load cell is put under undue pressure or is worn out, you’re not going to get accurate or precise results. One load cell, having taken most of the weight, will “believe” that the weight is higher than it is, and the other load cell will “believe” it’s lighter. Because they work in tandem, neither one is going to produce the best weight reading.

3.      Proper Calibration

Calibration tells your scale what’s right. If your scale requests a 200kg calibration weight and you give it a 100kg, it’s going to believe you. If you calibrate your scale while it’s uneven, your scale will consider that as the right way to be. Even if you were to level your scale right afterwards, you still wouldn’t get accurate enough results because the scale will believe it’s not right anymore. You would have to calibrate all over again! Luckily, a time-consuming but easy fix.

4.      Health & Safety

The items you’re likely to weigh on a floor or platform scale are going to be heavy. An uneven scale is not as solid and steady as an even one, creating the risk that items fall or roll off the pan. You wouldn’t want a precariously stacked pallet to tip over and fall on someone!

How Do I Level My Scale?

Start by placing your scale on the most even and flat surface you can find. However, even if you’re on the flattest surface possible, the scale itself may still not be level. You can tell if it’s level by using a levelling tool. Adam bench, floor and platform scales have one built in. If the bubble isn’t directly in the middle of the circle, the scale needs to be adjusted. Look at your scale’s feet. Most Adam scales offer feet that can be twisted up or down to align the scale. Twist the feet until the bubble lands directly in the middle of the circle.

What if I Have Uneven Floors?

If you’re using a balance or a bench scale, it’ll likely already be on a flat tabletop, even if the table is sitting on an uneven floor. If the table isn’t shaky, it shouldn’t be too difficult to level the scale using the feet. If you have a floor or platform scale and your floors are slanted, it will also be easier to level the scale using the feet. For uneven, cracked or bumpy floors where you just can’t level a scale properly using the feet, you still have a few options.

The first is to use a pallet truck scale such as the Adam Equipment {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTSplus" title="PTSplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29723"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTT" title="PTT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29717"}}. Pallet truck scales operate on two wheels and lift pallets into the air to weigh items. They still need to be generally level for safety purposes, but they can be wheeled to a temporary location with better floors for weighing.

Pallet beams like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AELP" title="AELP" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29740"}} are another option. Instead of a full platform, pallet beams are thin and portable. They can be spread apart at different angles to accommodate both oddly shaped items and uneven floors. Easily move them around until you find a spot they can sit as evenly as possible.

Need help with troubleshooting or getting the right scale for your circumstances? Contact the Adam team, we’re happy to assist.

From smooth navigation to near-limitless customisation,  touch-screen interfaces are the future of weighing. Adam Equipment’s Equinox series of balances as well as our NEW AE 505 Label-Printing Indicators are examples of two different approaches to providing precision at the tip of your finger.

The Equinox and the AE 505 / BTT

Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox" title="Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} series of semi-micro, analytical and precision balances are the ultimate choice for any high-performance laboratory. Sleek and sophisticated, it boasts logical progression from one step to another to make even the most complex lab weighing tasks simple.

Our new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 505 Touch-Screen Label Printing Indicators" title="AE 505 Touch-Screen Label Printing Indicators" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36769"}} can be purchased independently or with a platform as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BTT Bench and Floor Scales" title="BTT Bench and Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36770"}}. They’re a logistics manager’s dream – near boundless capacity to store and manage data on hundreds of unruly products with just one device.

Two different scales, the same goal: bringing precision close enough to touch. Let’s get into the top four benefits of touch-screen interfaces like theirs.

1.     Intuitive Navigation

Scales and balances with graphic or LCD displays often feature around five multi-purpose buttons. These allow you to access different settings and applications when hit in the right order. The correct order isn’t difficult to learn, but new users may require a read-through of the manual and some practice before it becomes second nature.

The Equinox touch-screen display is icon based, so it’s extremely easy to learn where different applications and settings are because you can see them on the same screen all at once, clearly labelled. Tap on the icon you want to immediately enter the process for that weighing mode, with the balance itself walking you through each step.

The AE 505 offers a combination of buttons and dropdown options that change based on your selections. A full QWERTY keyboard and numeric keypad are available to input sample sizes, checkweighing limits and more than 1,000 PLUs.

With labels for every function, the AE 505 leads you through the process, allowing an exceptional amount of customization, so you can get just the results you need.

1.     More Weighing Information at Once

With generous  5” / 127mm and 8” / 200mm touchscreens, the Equinox and AE 505 can provide more information at once than a graphic or LCD display.

It’s more common for balances with a graphic or LCD display to show only the result you’re looking for, rather than the components making up the result. On the Equinox’s parts counting screen, for example, you can see the parts count, unit weight, net weight, tare weight and the capacity tracker all on the same screen.

The AE 505 is especially advanced, able to show the weight reading, tare weight, gross weight as well as the low, within and high limits for checkweighing and check counting all on the same screen, with space to spare. Depending on your settings, even more information can fit. It can also display values as Barcodes so that they can be scanned to other devices, a feature unique in the weighing industry.

1.     Advanced Data Entry and Storage

Adam’s new AE 505 and BTT are built to house large amounts of data, accessible at the tap of your finger. With more than 1,000 product look ups, counting and stock taking tasks have never been easier.

PLUs

The AE 505 can store 1,006 goods in its memory. You can add these items by importing a spreadsheet or adding them as stock one at a time. Once the information is stored, you can export it to any computer through the RS-232 or USB interfaces, or the optional Bluetooth, Wi-Fi and Ethernet.

You can assign each sample a reference number, name, unit weight, tare weight (if the goods are packaged), size, stock count and even high and low weights when performing checkweighing for quality control. The possibilities are endless.

Stock

The stock management function can store the weight stock and quantity stock for every item stored in the scale. Select a stored item and the current stock weight will display next to the options “In,” “Out” and “Take Stock.”

Selecting either In or Out, weighing the item and selecting Print will automatically add or subtract the weight of the item from your current stock count. Selecting “Take Stock” will add the product as a new item, with stock weight equaling that of the one product.

Limit Tracking

If you choose to select the Record function, two new rows will display. The first tracks how often your samples have been below, within or above counting or weighing limits and the second displays the average weight or piece count of the number of samples within those categories.

1.     Multi-User Access & Security Features

You can set specific users on both the Equinox and the AE 505. Work can be attributed to the proper people, which improves data traceability, something so important when it comes to meeting GLP and GMP guidelines.

The Equinox can be set to require a unique password for each user, to be entered before being able to access any of the balance’s functions. The AE 505 requires a password to change the settings and applications. Sensitive data can’t be accessed or adjusted unless given express permission from password-holders. This enables the same scale to be used for a wide variety of purposes without the risk that information is mishandled switching between them.

Need help deciding which display is right for you? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to discuss your options.

Portable balances are some of the most versatile in the Adam Equipment range, ideal for a variety of on-the-go jobs that need quick and easy weighing results. But how do you keep your balance working at its best? We have four simple maintenance tips that will help.

1.     Protect Your Balance from the Environment

Portable balances can go anywhere you go.  Wherever you bring them, take precautions against environmental factors that can influence their results or even harm the balance itself. For example, if there’s any risk of the balance getting wet or especially dusty/dirty, employ an in-use cover to prevent water and debris from seeping into the weighing mechanisms (unless it’s IP rated). Not only can water or dirt on the pan add extra weight to your weighing results, but they can also cause damage to the balance itself.

We also recommend that you use your portable compact balance out of direct sunlight, and any particularly freezing or hot temperatures, as the heat and cold can expand or contract the metal and cause fluctuations in results. Adam’s data sheets indicate the acceptable temperature range for use.

2.     Store Your Balance Properly

When you’re not using your portable balance, ensure that there’s no weight on the pan, even if it’s small. Keeping weight on the pan for a long span of time can slowly weaken the load cell. Store your balance in a cool, dry and stable location. Cover it with an in-use cover or place it in a case if there’s a possibility it will get covered in dust or other particles. This will save you time cleaning later.

Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Core" title="Core" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29732"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland Precision" title="Highland Precision" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} balances are uniquely designed to be stackable. Simply stack them one on top of the other using the designated slots. The weight is distributed on the casing instead of the pan, which doesn’t impact the load cell. Stacking the balances is particularly helpful in classrooms where there’s multiple machines for many students, but low storage space.

3.     Avoid Overloading and Shock Loading

Portable balances last longer when care is taken to avoid overloading and shock loading.

Overloading

Overloading is when you place an item on the pan that’s heavier than the balance’s capacity. It’s easy to do by accident, but you’ll be able to recognise that the product is overloaded because the screen will show dashes instead of a weight. Remove the weight as soon as you notice. The occasional slight overload won’t do any harm, if it happens consistently and by a large margin, it could be something to be concerned about.

Shock Loading

Shock loading is when you apply a heavy weight with too much force, like dropping it on the pan. This sudden stress on the load cell can lead to your portable balance becoming inaccurate.

While avoiding both is the best way to maintain your balance’s overall ‘health’, Adam Equipment’s Highland and Core portable precision balances offer ShockProtect® technology, lending them an advanced defense against overloading and shock loading. In fact, you can even punch them! So, whether you’re dealing with clumsy students or the unexpected out in the field, you can trust your balance is durable enough to do the work.

4.     Calibrate Regularly

Portable scales are likely to get less accurate and precise as time goes on. Luckily, this is both reversable and entirely avoidable with regular calibration.

For most Adam compact and portable balances, you’ll need to invest in at least one external calibration weight. You can learn which one to purchase through either the balance itself or the manual – and you’ll learn which type to order with help from our blog. For example, you would buy a Dune DCT 2000 a 2000g calibration mass, while you would purchase the DCT 201 a 200g. Don’t forget to treat your calibration weights well!

Some of our Highland Portable Precision Balances offer HandiCal® technology, a form of quick and easy internal calibration that involves using a key to lower an internal weight onto the load cell. This is a convenient option if you don’t want to deal with calibration weights.

After calibration, your portable balance will ‘remember’ what the correct weight values are and be able to provide accurate and precise results again.

Need help deciding which portable balance is right for you? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

Calibration weights are deceptively simple. Aren’t they just a piece of metal? No, they’re not. Calibration weights can truly make or break your weighing results, which is why it’s crucial to avoid these common mistakes when using them.

What Are Calibration Weights?

Calibration weights are blocks of finely crafted metal intended to perfectly emulate a specific weight value. A 1kg calibration weight must weigh as close as possible to what’s globally considered the “true kilogram,” as well must a 1g weight weigh as much as what the world accepts as the true gram.  

These weights are used to train your scales and balances so they provide the correct weighing result every time. Though most scales and balances only require one or two weights for calibration, it can be worth purchasing more weights so you have a method of verification.

For example, if your {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna Analytical Balance" title="Luna Analytical Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} only requires a 100g weight for calibration, you may want to purchase a 1g weight anyways, especially if your most weighed items measure around that result. Before important weighing sessions, you can place the 1g weight on the pan to guarantee your balance will give you the correct result – if not, take the time to calibrate.

Choosing the Wrong Calibration Weight Class

Adam Equipment offers OIML calibration weights, both in sets and individually. Which ones do you need? 

OIML weights are grouped into classes. Adam offers OIML classes E1 through M1. OIML E1 is the most precise and accurate weights available on our site. They’re made from finely crafted stainless steel and are perfect for verifying weights as low as 0.01mg or calibrating semi-micro and analytical balances like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox" title="Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna" title="Luna" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}}.

Here’s how you can decide:

    • OIML E1 – Ideal for semi-micro balances with readabilities of 0.00001g (0.01mg).

    • OIML E2 – Perfect for analytical balances with readabilities from 0.0001g (0.1mg) to 0.00001g.

    • OIML F1 – Useful for analytical and precision balances with readabilities from 0.001g (1mg) to 0.0001g.

    • OIML F2 – Great for precision balances with readabilities of 0.001g and up.

    • OIML M1 – Ideal for compact balances and bench scales. M1 weights made of cast iron are used for high-capacity floor or platform scales.

Of course, perfect isn’t possible, so it’s the manufacturer’s obligation to provide you with the knowledge of how much you could potentially expect your weight to be “off” from perfect, also known as weight tolerances:

This is quite a simplification. For a more detailed explanation, see our other blog, Weighing in on Calibration Weights.

Don’t get caught using the wrong calibration weights – do your research so you get the best ones for your scale or balance.

Touching Calibration Weights with Bare Hands

Test weights, especially OIML E1, are so finely and accurately crafted that touching them with your bare hands can degrade the metal over time and cause them to become less precise. This is because the oil on your fingers, also known as sebum, is slightly acidic, with pH ranging from 4.5 to about 6.2.

With bigger calibration weights the impact may not be as noticeable, but it can become a serious problem the smaller they get, down to the 1mg weight we offer in some of our weight sets for verification purposes.

Instead, we recommend using cotton gloves with bigger weights and tweezers for smaller weights. This way you’re preventing skin-on-metal contact and your calibration weights will stay accurate and precise for longer.

Dragging Calibration Weights Across the Pan

When placing and lifting a calibration weight, it’s easy to drag or shift it across the pan, whether it’s to get it into the right position or just accidentally. However, it’s important that you place and pick up your calibration weight directly up and down, without dragging it.

The first reason is that the metal-on-metal friction can lead to static electricity building up. With more sensitive balances, this can begin to affect your weighing results. You may see your weight readings drifting or being unable to settle. The second reason is dragging your calibration weight can cause scratches to the surface that, like the oil in your fingers, can degrade the weight over time.

If you notice the effects of static electricity and you know it’s not caused by your calibration weights, we recommend investing in Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABI-1 Ioniser" title="ABI-1 Ioniser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32762"}}, which neutralises static electricity.

Not Allowing Calibration Weights to Acclimate

Metal expands in the heat and contracts when it’s cold. If your calibration weights have been languishing in a stuffy closet the AC doesn’t reach and you bring them into your 17-degree laboratory, they’re not going to be as accurate as they could be.

Ensure you’re always giving your calibration weights time to reach room temperature before use. This helps guarantee they’re at the same level of expansion and contraction as your balance’s hardware.

Improperly Storing Your Weights

Unfortunately, you can’t just leave your weights in any-odd place. Some main environmental factors to keep in mind are:

1. Temperature – try to keep your calibration weights stored at the same temperature you’re likely to use them in. That way, the acclimatisation period will be shorter. Avoid placing them in direct beams of light.
2. Humidity – If there’s too much humidity, the moisture could accumulate on the calibration weights and lead to corrosion over time.
3. Stability – The last thing you want to do is drop your weights, damaging them and making them less effective. Store them in a stable location unlikely to move.
4. Dust – Adam recommends storing your weights in a container or bag, not just loose. This prevents dust accumulating and adding more weight.
5. Contact – keeping the weights in a box or individual bag prevents the weights themselves from touching each other.

Cleaning Weights Too Harshly

If you’ve already touched your calibration weights with your bare fingers or they’re covered in dust, you can still perform some damage control. With a soft brush, microfibre towel or compressed air, you can gently brush, wipe or blow away the offending particles. There’s no need to use harsh cleaners, soap or even water (truly, if it’s THAT bad, it might be best to invest in a new weight).

After cleaning, inspect the weight for lint or particles left behind. Then, let it rest to remove any static charge that could have built up in the process. Avoid touching the cloth or brush with your hands so you don’t contaminate them with your finger oils, though it’s good practice to clean the brush or cloth anyways.

Need help figuring out which calibration weights are right for you, or whether you’re handling them properly? We can help with both. Contact the Adam team here.

What Are Platform Scales?

Industrial weighing scales like platforms offer high capacities and weighing pans large enough to require dedicated floor space. Unlike bench or floor scales, the indicators on platform scales are typically connected via a long cord, rather than built in or mounted on a pillar. This allows you not only to mount them wherever you want but mix and match indicators for what suits you the best. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platforms" title="PT Platforms" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}}, for example, are compatible with eight different weighing indicators.

We recommend using the flattest possible area for the platform. You can use the adjustable feet and the built-in leveller to help ensure it’s as even as possible.

5 Benefits of Heavy Duty Scales on Construction Sites

Because of their large size and durability, heavy duty platform scales are excellent for bulky, large items, such as bags of sand or concrete, lumber, steel and more. Let’s get into the top four reasons every construction site should have a platform scale.

Enhancing Safety and Compliance

When utilising equipment like forklifts or cranes to transport heavy materials, it’s important to keep in mind their load bearing limit. Electric three-wheel forklifts, for example, can only hold 3,000kg. If exceeded, not only does the extra weight increase wear and tear on its components but it also poses a significant safety risk. If the machine fails or the load falls, workers in the vicinity are in danger of injury.

Platform scales help prevent this by allowing you to guarantee the load is below the machine’s carrying capacity. If it’s not, you have an opportunity to either split the material into multiple trips or use stronger equipment. Adam’s PT platform scales offer models that can weigh up to 4500kg. Protect your employees’ lives, save yourself a lawsuit  and invest in a platform scale.

Improved Compensation Tracking

Because each project is different, keeping a record of how much weight in material your construction company is using will help you charge better for your services. For example, if you ordered 4,500kg worth of lumber but ended up only using 3,500kg, you can easily calculate what you should receive monetarily in return, even if it’s not direct recompensation for the original purchase.

Preventing Overcharges for Waste Dumps

Many waste dumps for discarded materials charge by weight, which as we know can get expensive. Platform scales are a method of calculating how much they might charge you for the waste you’re leaving there. If they charge £‎50 per ton, you can help guarantee you’re not getting overcharged.

Streamlining Project Efficiency

Adam platform scales provide accurate results within seconds, easily eliminating any guess-work and uninformed trial-and-error that could cause delays in a project.

For example, instead of mixing bags of concrete with different amounts of water each time, a platform helps keep the weight ratio of concrete to water consistent. , which is why our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-Plus Checkweighing indicator" title="GK-Plus Checkweighing indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36757"}} can be so helpful. Inputting high and low limits ensures you’re always in the right range. This prevents having to waste time remixing and helps guarantee a better final product.

A smaller platform but just as useful, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LBL Heavy Duty Precision Balances" title="Luna LBL Heavy Duty Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35290"}} offer a wide pan that’s perfect for concrete testing. You’ll know without a doubt whether concrete is a proper density for construction.

Key Features to Look for in Industrial Weighing Scales for Construction

High Capacity

The trick is to think of the heaviest items you may need to weigh on a regular basis and add 5 to 10% as a buffer when wondering what the right capacity is for you. Whether it’s 2,500kg or 4,500kg, the buffer will prevent you from overloading the platform scale, which, just like your other equipment, can cause harm over time.

Large Weighing Pan

When using a weighing scale, it’s best if materials don’t extend too far beyond the pan during weighing. This can impact the balance and how weight is distributed, making inaccurate results more likely. Because of this, it’s important to invest in a platform scale with a large enough pan. Adam PT platforms offer weigh pans up to 1500 x 1500mm, ideal for most large loads.

Durability

You need a platform scale that can survive the tough day-to-day of a construction site. Adam’s PT Platform scales are constructed from durable mild steel that can withstand anything you may weigh. Adam’s PT Platforms come with extra protection when {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="paired" title="paired" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29659"}} with the IP68 rated {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403" title="AE 403" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29701"}} indicator. 

Wondering which platform scale is right for you? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

A great weighing scale is worth its weight in gold … so which accurate gold weighing scale is right for the job? In this blog, we’ll discuss the relationship between the weight and purity of gold when it comes to its value, as well as how you can use the weight of gold to determine its purity.

Why is the Weight of Gold Important?

You buy and sell gold that’s in bar or bullion form by weight. The standard unit of measurement for gold (and other precious metals) is the Troy ounce. You’re likely to see grams, kilograms or pounds as well, depending on where you’re looking. The more gold weighs, the more it’s worth. In general, the weight of gold has a higher impact on its value than purity.

What’s the Right Weighing Scale for Gold?

Because they’re selling by weight, gold distributors must utilise a trade-approved weighing scale to comply with government regulations. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland Approved Portable Precision Balance" title="Highland Approved Portable Precision Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29730"}} makes an excellent compact gold weighing scale.

The Highland Approved offers all the necessary units for accurate gold weighing, including Troy ounces, standard ounces, grams, kilograms, pounds and even grains. There are six models within the Highland Approved range, with capacities between 100g and 5000g, and readabilities approved for commercial transactions (the “e” value) from 0.01g to 0.5g. Because it’s legal-for-trade, consumers can trust that the weight they’re getting charged for is accurate and endorsed by their government.

How do You Measure the Purity of Gold?

You measure the purity of gold in karats, in which 1 karat represents 1 part out of 24 parts in gold alloy. 24k gold is the purest available, being 24/24 parts or 99.9% real gold. For comparison’s sake, 8k is only 8/24 parts or 33.3% pure, which means 16/24 parts or 66.6% is another type of metal, often silver, nickel or copper. In the US, gold must be at least 10k, or 41.6% gold, to be considered “real gold.”

The purer the gold is, the more it’s worth. This is especially true for jewellery sold in stores that are priced more so on design, artistry and functionality than weight. 18k and 14k gold are the most common for jewellery, as anything more is too soft for everyday wear. However, if you’re buying or selling scrap gold at a pawn shop, the weight may have a larger influence.

What’s the Relationship Between the Weight and Purity of Gold?

The purer the gold, the more it’s worth. The more it weighs, the more it’s worth. However, you’re never going to find that you’re purchasing or selling gold based only on one or the other, it’s a complex relationship.

A 1ozt bar of 24k gold will always be worth more than a 1ozt bar of 10k gold. It would take about 2.5ozt of 10k gold to be worth the same or more as 1ozt of 24k gold.

As of January 2025:

• Low in weight + low in purity = least value
  • 1ozt + 10k = £932

• Low in weight + high in purity = low-to-mid value
  • 1ozt + 24k = £2,235

• High in weight + low in purity = mid-to-high value
  • 1kg + 10k = £29,976

• High in weight + high in purity = highest value
  • 1kg + 24k = £71,892

What Else Impacts the Value of Gold?

Purity and weight aren’t the only influences on price you need to keep in mind.  

The Market

The prices of gold surge during times of economic instability or uncertainty, particularly when inflation is on an upward trend. In times of deflation, gold is still a great backup, as it doesn’t decrease in value as much as other items. When the economy is stable, the price of gold is at its lowest. This is when investors pounce, as the waters won’t be calm forever. 

Investors use gold to diversify their portfolios, so they have something to fall back on if their stocks, cash or other investments disappear. The largest investors in gold are governments and banks, but individual households own a large percentage in the form of jewellery.

Gold prices are subject to supply and demand, just like everything else.

Premiums

When looking into purchasing gold, you’ll notice that the prices may be higher than the value, purity and weight seem to call for. This can be for multiple reasons, but most likely because of added premiums. Premiums can be added because the seller is well known for being reputable or for some kind of protection for the gold, such as insurance or storage. If they’re in a bar or coin shape, the premium can come from manufacturing costs. It’s rare to find gold sold at face value.

Can You Use the Weight of Gold to Determine Its Purity?

Yes! If you want to ensure your gold is a specific karat or purity, you can use a portable gold scale or balance to perform density determination. Pure, 24k gold should have a density of 19.32 grams per cubic centimetre. 22k gold is around 15.6 g/cm3 and 14k can be between 12.9 and 14.6 g/cm3, depending on the mix.

Some balances, like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna range" title="Luna range" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29743"}} offers a density determination function. This means that the balance will prompt you to weigh the sample in air and a specified liquid, then perform the necessary calculations internally to provide you with the final density in grams per cubic centimetre.

If you don’t have a balance that offers this function, you’re able to perform the process manually. Download the infographic below for a detailed explanation on how to manually perform density determination with a balance using two different methods. The first involves using a balance with a weigh-below hook, such the Highland Approved. The second method is top pan for balances like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Dune" title="Dune" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29721"}}. You can perform this process more easily using a Density Kit. 

The density of your gold will provide a strong hint as to how pure it is. You’ll be able to accurately price the gold or prevent yourself from getting scammed when purchasing.

Click the image above to download our two page density determination infographic

Other Ways to Determine the Purity of Gold

Weight isn’t the only way to determine the purity of gold, but other ways can be destructive to pieces that turn out to be “fake gold” – though, as we’ve seen, lower karats can still net big prices in large quantities.   

One way is the ceramic test, which involves scratching part of the piece with unglazed ceramic (speaking of, we weigh that too). If the scratch is black, it’s “fake”.

Another method is to test the gold using nitric acid. Once again, you scratch the piece, then you drip nitric acid over the scratch. No reaction means that it’s real gold, whereas if it turns milky white or green, it’s fake.

Finally, a drop of vinegar on the piece may reveal if the purity is less than stellar. However, it’ll discolour the spot permanently if it turns out to be fake.

All of these are simple determinations of “real or fake,” but not true indications of purity, which can make a difference in how it’s priced. Plus, you’ve just scratched or discoloured the piece, which can impact the quality. Determining the density with a balance is far less destructive and a better indication of purity.

Still wondering which scale or balance is best for you? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

Without quality control, a product would never be the same twice. Scales and balances are one way to make certain that each product is consistent. This blog goes into the top three types of weighing equipment we recommend for quality control applications.

More of a visual learner? Download our complementary infographic by clicking the picture below.

1.  Moisture Analysers

When manufacturing a product, there are very specific requirements on moisture content. This is because moisture impacts the product’s stability, quality and shelf life. With too much moisture, a digestive biscuit may be more chewy than crunchy, with a higher chance of growing mold. Too little moisture and toothpaste would be more like a minty chalk or powder. It would be hard to squeeze and difficult to brush with.

Moisture analysers like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB" title="PMB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}} play a large part in quality control. They check products like food, plastics, cosmetics and pharmaceuticals to ensure each batch maintains moisture standards.

Why Choose the PMB Moisture Analyser for Quality Control?

To determine the moisture content of a sample, you must weigh the sample. Then, heat it until dry and weigh it again. You then take the difference between the initial and end weights and use it to determine the overall moisture content. This is known as the loss-on-drying method.

A common way people perform this process is to weigh the sample on a scale, then bake it in an oven. Once dry, they weigh it again and calculate the percentage manually. This is inefficient, as it takes a long time and can be prone to human error. The PMB removes these concerns.

All-in-One Operation Reduces Errors

Adam’s PMB Moisture Analyser performs the entire process, from weighing to drying and calculating the moisture percentage, by itself. This is significantly more efficient than switching from scale to oven and back again. It also eliminates the risk of errors caused by manually miscalculating the moisture percentage.

Quick Drying Improves Efficiency

Since the surface area of the PMB’s pan is small, it’s able to dry samples quickly. This is opposed to an oven which dries slower due to a higher surface area. Drier samples like cocoa powder only take up to two minutes of drying time. Meanwhile, liquids like red wine would only take 15-20 minutes to dry. Such rapid, accurate results minimise production delays as much as possible.

Recipe Recall Saves Prep Time

After you properly prepare the sample, you can choose between the PMB’s three heat settings and four preset drying modes. The manual recommends beginning with a temperature of 100ºC, a time interval of ten seconds and a sample sized three to eight grams for initial testing, though this downloadable chart includes the settings for common samples.

Once you’ve discovered the best settings for a particular sample, you can save the “recipe” in the PMB’s memory for recall later, reducing prep time and ensuring consistency between tests. Adam’s PMB can hold up to 49 different recipes as well as the results of up to 99 tests in its memory.

2.  Checkweighing Scales

It’s illegal for a company to sell a product that weighs less than the standard weight printed on their packaging or their websites – unless the price fluxes accordingly with the weight. It’s not only because they’re paying full price to receive less than they purchased, but because a product of a different weight can imply quality issues overall.

Why Choose Checkweighing Scales for Quality Control?

Checkweighing scales ensure that each product meets the standard weight requirement without also exceeding it, which would waste materials and cost the company money.

Three Different Methods of Notification

Quality control is a fast-paced operation. If there’s a consistent problem with a product, it needs to be addressed as soon as possible so it doesn’t delay production. You can’t spend time analysing each result – which is why Adam Equipment’s new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK/GFK-Plus" title="GBK/GFK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK/GFK-S" title="GBK/GFK-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36713"}} checkweighing scales offer clear 40mm-high digits, colour-changing displays an optional audible alarm.  If a product is under or over limits, you’re quickly notified through three different means that can all be understood from a distance.

Customizable Limits Ensure Product Consistency

With a full numeric keypad, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CKT Checkweighing Sale" title="CKT Checkweighing Sale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} and GBK/GFK-Plus allow you to easily and fully customise your checkweighing limits, so you can get as specific as necessary. For example, if a box of pumpkin pie must be at least 140g to meet legal and quality standards but can’t exceed 142g. Entering these weights as your high and low limits gives you a speedy way of quality control.

Limit Recall Saves Time and Prevents Errors

It can be a pain to re-enter checkweighing limits every time you need them, especially if you’re quality checking the same products frequently. Adam Equipment’s GBK/GFK-Plus as well as Adam’s Cruiser CKT Checkweighing Scale allow you to store up to ten preset limits for quick recall later, including the weighing units being used. This way, you can jump straight into checkweighing instead of spending time on prep. 

3.  Analytical Balances

The smaller a product, the bigger the deal it is when its weight is a few ticks off standard. If a medicine capsule, for example, weighs more or less than it should, it could mean that there’s an incorrect level of medication within. This could be dangerous, as medicine is formulated with extremely precise dosages in mind.

To quality control such small samples, analytical balances are an excellent tool.

Fine Readability Assures Precision

With readabilities between 0.1mg and 0.0001g, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox," title="Equinox," template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna" title="Luna" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} Analytical Balances can detect the most minute differences in weight.

Luna Analytical balances also offer a checkweighing function, so you can set highly precise weighing limits that guarantee each small sample is correct.  

Guarantee Traceability and Accurate Records

All of Adam Equipment’s moisture analysers, checkweighing scales and analytical balances offer advanced connectivity. They can be connected to printers and software like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU" title="AdamDU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} to maintain accurate records and keep track of statistics. With our communication cables, even if what we offer as standard doesn’t match your requirements, we’re able to accommodate.

Adam’s PMB and Analytical balances offer Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) standard printouts, with spots for date, time and other information that make them easy to identify and replicate. Adam checkweighing scale’s printouts are compliant with Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) standards, for the same reason.

Help guarantee that each quality control check means something with consistent records and evidence to back up your findings. If there’s a discrepancy, it may be a fluke manufacturing error, or it could be a pattern that needs to be resolved. Make your scales and balances work for you!

Wondering which quality control scale is best for your application? Contact the Adam team – we’ll be happy to help.

Fascia’s Chocolates, a family business in Waterbury, Connecticut local to Adam's United States office, has been joyfully handcrafting delicious confections since 1964. From assorted bite-sized morsels to chocolate-covered coffee beans, potato chips and even Gelato, they’re the place to go when your sweet tooth starts aching.

As the holiday season approaches, Adam Equipment contacted Fascia’s to learn how they use weighing scales in their facility. After speaking with Carmen Romeo, Fascia’s President since 2009, it’s apparent just how much weight scales pull in the chocolate industry.

Where Does Fascia’s Use Scales?

“We have lots of scales in our facility, lots and lots of scales.” – Carmen

Production

Fascia’s kitchen employs many techniques, both time-tested and new, to create a variety of delicious products.

Fascia crafts its confections in bulk, requiring the use of large trays, bowls and molds, so the team uses a large-pan bench scale with a mountable display, such as Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus M" title="CPWplus M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} range, for easy viewing.

Carmen explains that Fascia’s confectioners will often use molds with four cavities to get a consistent shape and fill. They first tare out the mold. Then, a chocolatier pours chocolate while monitoring the weight on the display. They stop pouring when each cavity is the correct weight.

Since this process takes two gloved hands, Fascia’s confectioners need to be able to press the Tare button with ease, even with an elbow. They prefer a scale with a simple display that offers just a few large buttons – “the bigger the better,” Carmen states.

When weighing ingredients like “strong essence oils, flavourings or natural colourings,” which they use in tiny amounts at a time, a more precise compact scale like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam’s CBX" title="Adam’s CBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29695"}} is ideal. Though these ingredients may be liquid, Fascia’s uses a scale instead of measuring by volume. Oil can be expensive, so this method allows them to keep every drop instead of scraping the side of a teaspoon and leaving waste behind, allows accurate measurements even when pouring flavours of different densities and reduces the clean-up process.

Packaging

In their packaging department, Fascia’s employs a checkweighing machine. It has the sophisticated ability to trickle and shake products until it reaches the proper weight. For example, if each bag of chocolate covered raisins needs to be at minimum 4 oz. The machine lets raisins through or shakes them off until the weight is as close as possible to 4 oz. By law, Fascia’s must always err on the side of giving too much to their customers, rather than not enough.

In all other cases there may be six or eight pieces to a box instead of 50. They hand count each one and weigh them with a scale for quality control purposes. Carmen states that they also “weigh boxes of chocolates after we’ve packed them, just to make sure they’re within specifications.” Being so thorough contributes to why they’re successful!

Retail

When you’re visiting Fascia’s Chocolates, you’ll find that you can purchase most loose (not previously packaged) items by weight. This requires a trade approved scale like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale." title="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale." template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}} All boxes, bags or cups are Tared before product is added to ensure customers are getting exactly the amount of chocolate or Gelato you’re paying for, no more and no less. 

When purchasing by piece, you would request the number of candies you want. They separate your choices by type and weigh them to determine your price. Fascia’s “charges based on the fractional weight rounded to the decimal.” Of course, this means that their retail scale must offer a minimum weight of at least 0.1oz. Depending on what you decide to purchase, the products may have different price levels. The totals are all added up and become the price you pay.

Shipping

Shipping is the department that requires simple “brute force,” where they simply “round to the next pound” when weighing, which is enough for UPS or USPS services. However, Carmen shares that the “dimensional weight” of their shipments can be just as, if not more, important than the physical weight when it comes to their shipping prices. Large packages, even if they’re light in weight, may cost more money to ship simply because of the amount of space they take in the truck.

The biggest culprit for Fascia’s? According to Carmen, it’s “big bundles of popcorn” – chocolate covered, of course, their Popcorn Nut Crunch mix. Light but bulky.

As Fascia’s usually ships products to individuals as it’s ordered, rather than in bulk, a bench scale like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus S, P or M" title="CPWplus S, P or M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} models is ideal for simply calculating the price they’ll get charged by the carrier.

What Features Does Fascia’s Value the Most in Weighing Scales?

Easy to Clean

There’s not much mess in Fascia’s kitchens, but when drips happen, it’s much easier to clean if the scale offers a stainless-steel pan, sealed keypad or an IP rating. That way, they can be wiped down with soapy water and a gentle cloth. If messy scales were more typical, a scale like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW" title="Aqua ABW" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29656"}}, which boasts an IP67-rating, would be recommended. 

Simple Operation

As a small business, Fascia’s prefers their weighing scales straightforward and easy to use – even with their elbows. This keeps their processes as smooth and efficient as possible, allowing staff to focus on their work. 

Multiple Weighing Units

Many Fascia’s products are measured out in ounces, while others are measured out in pounds. Without multiple weighing units, you may be able to tell that a 16 oz. bag is one pound, but when larger orders come in, it’s much easier to see 4.7 lbs. instead of 75.2 oz. A weighing scale that allows for that kind of flexibility is crucial at Fascia’s.

Facilitating Fascia’s Confections

Fascia’s Chocolates relies on weighing scales to:

     • Craft consistent and high-quality confections.

     • Accurately measure and package products.

     • Offer fair pricing for retail customers.

     • Optimise shipping costs and logistics.

Without scales in their facility, Fascia’s may not be the success they are today – officially 60 years in business!

If you’re curious where you can find scales like those used at Fascia’s, contact our team, we’ll be happy to help.  

If you want to provide the best experience for your guests, investing in a great restaurant scale is a necessity. But what sets a great scale apart from one that’s just… alright? Let’s look at some of the traits that make a scale the cream of the crop.

NSF Certification

While not legally required, using a scale with an NSF certification is highly recommended. The NSF is the National Sanitation Foundation, an organisation that standardises food safety and sanitation. NSF approved scales are made from materials that don’t leach chemicals into food. They’re also easy to clean, resistant to bacteria and more.

Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW" title="Aqua ABW" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29656"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude" title="Latitude" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} scales boast NSF certification. Between all four, there are a total of 31 models to choose from. If you want to ensure that the scales you’re using in your restaurant will meet the rigourous needs of a professional kitchen, you want to guarantee your scale is NSF-certified.

Click on the image above to download our full infographic

Quick Stabilisation to Keep Up with Busy Chefs

Restaurant kitchens are bustling and busy, especially on Friday nights and weekends. When 30 tables need their food, there’s no time to be waiting for your scale to weigh.

The length of time it takes a scale to settle on a result after you place food on the pan is called its stabilisation time. Of course, the faster the better. The Latitude, ABW and ABW-S stabilise within one second. The Gladiator will have the result within two seconds. With weight information provided quickly, you’re able to maintain the speed and momentum you need to provide customers with delicious, high-quality food backed by data.

An IP Rating to Protect Against Spills and Messes

Kitchens are messy, with staff using raw meat, flour, vegetables, fruits, oils, seasonings and other ingredients constantly. A great restaurant scale provides an IP rating to protect itself against damage from liquids and solids that may splatter, splash, or spill.

IP stands for Ingress Protection, and the higher a rating the scale has, the better it’s able to defend against liquids and solids. Adam Equipment’s Aqua ABW offers an IP67 rating. It has protection against fine solids like flour as well as from brief submersion in water when you need to hose it down in the sink.

Adam’s Aqua ABW-S and Gladiator series both feature an IP68 rating. This means you can hit them with jets and submerge them in water at deeper levels and for a longer time. This is perfect when you handle meat or fish, which spread bacteria quickly and can lead to cross contamination. Or if something sticky gets on the scale and it you want to scrub it well. Whether it’s an IP67 or 68 rating, you’re guaranteed a quick clean-up so you can get back to food prep without delay.

Click on the image above to download a PDF of our infographic

Scales like Latitude that don’t come with an IP rating but provide sealed keypads also make wonderful restaurant equipment. You may just have to take a few extra precautions to prevent them from getting especially messy. For example, weighing items in a container or utilising an {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="in-use cover accessory" title="in-use cover accessory" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32718"}}.

Easy Tare Function

Speaking of containers: you get more precise results if you don’t include the weight of the container in the reading. The Tare function makes this possible. Adam Equipment scales offer the Tare function front and center on the displays. 

Once you place an empty container on the pan, press the Tare button to remove the weight from the results. You can then add food to the plate and get an accurate reading. After removing the plate or container, you’ll find that the scale displays a negative number. To set the scale back to zero, you’ll need to hit the Zero button. Sometimes, Zero and Tare are the same button.

Tare improves your restaurant’s precision and reduces the chances of error, because you know you’re not accidentally assuming an ingredient or meal weighs too much when the plate is impacting the numbers.

Rechargeable Battery for Portability

Space is a hot commodity in many restaurant kitchens, so flexibility is a valuable trait in a scale. Every NSF-approved weighing scale Adam offers comes with a rechargeable battery, so you’re not tied to an electrical outlet or a specific area. If you need to plug the mixer in and there’s just not another spot for it, don’t worry! Your weighing scale will operate perfectly fine for many busy hours to come – the Latitude has a 210-hour battery life!

Multiple Weighing Units

Many recipes call for ingredients measured in grams, but we all know you always weigh a nice juicy steak in ounces. A scale that can provide both units, amongst others like kilograms, will save you time and effort by increasing the versatility of your scale.

Looking to add a great scale to your restaurant’s kitchen? Contact the Adam team, we’ll provide a menu of options you can’t resist.

Check counting is a lesser known but extremely useful function on weighing scales and balances. What is it, how does it work and how can it be used? Let’s discuss.

What is Check Counting?

Check counting is a function on some weighing scales that compares a total number of identical pieces by weight to determine if they’re below, at or above your desired preset total. Every Adam Equipment counting scale offers a check counting function. Meanwhile, some non-counting scales like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AGB and AGF Bench and Floor Scales" title="AGB and AGF Bench and Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29738"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT Checkweighing Scales" title="Cruiser CKT Checkweighing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} boast the ability as well.

How Does Check Counting Work?

Check counting combines the capabilities of parts counting and checkweighing functions. Parts counting counts identical parts by weight. First you provide a small sample of the parts or enter in the unit weight. Then it’s able to determine the average weight of each and uses that information to count large quantities. Checkweighing allows you to set high and low weight limits, then informs you via colors on the display, a sound or another indication whether the weight on the pan is below, within or above those limits.

Just like parts counting, check counting requires that you provide a sample of the parts you’re counting to get an average. It’s crucial that the parts are all identical, as the count won’t be accurate if they vary in weights. Once the scale has a record of the average weight for those parts, you’re able to enter how many parts you want. Then, when you place the parts on the scale in bulk, it will let you know when you’re below or above that number so you can make the appropriate adjustments.

For example, each box needs 200 large screws. You place a small sample of screws on the pan so it can get an average, which is 3.5g each. As you place more screws on the pan, the scale will use the weight to count how many are present. Until you reach 200 screws, which is 700g, it will give you a Low reading, and if you go over (201 parts, or 703.5g), it will display High. When you get the count exactly right, the display will read OK.

Product Lookups, or PLUs, are a way to store the unit weight of your most counted items. Once you’ve assigned the product a number and stored the unit weight in the scale’s memory, it saves you a step when you’re looking to call it up for check counting. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CCT Counting scale" title="Cruiser CCT Counting scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29716"}} offers 100 PLUs, while the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BCT Advanced Label Printing Scale" title="BCT Advanced Label Printing Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29748"}} offers over 1000 PLUs, plenty for any mid-to-large operation.

Why Choose Check Counting?

Checkweighing is excellent, but it displays the weight, not the count. Parts counting is also a great function, but it doesn’t provide a verification like checkweighing, so you must truly pay attention to the number on the display. Check counting combines counting and verification into one process. This means you don’t have to pay strict attention to the parts count, because your scale pays attention for you.

The most common purpose for check counting is packaging and distribution in industries like manufacturing, retail or e-commerce. When large orders come in, it’s significantly more efficient to count by weight as opposed to counting by hand, and it reduces the risk of errors. After a small sample has been weighed and a desired count has been set, you can pile on the pieces up to the scale’s capacity.

When check counting, there’s no such thing as “close enough” as there might be with regular parts counting. Either you’re below, above or right on target. This prevents the risk of providing slightly more or less for the customers than they’ve requested, since the display can’t be misread, misunderstood or ignored. Every customer gets no more and no less than they order, and your company isn’t under or oversupplying. Win-win!

If you need help finding the best weighing scale with a check counting function for you, contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help.

Crane scales are used for two primary purposes. The first is to weigh especially large or abnormally shaped objects that wouldn’t sit correctly on a floor model. The second is to ensure that the crane or gantry carrying and transporting these objects isn’t overloaded. Both involve suspending heavy items in the air, which could pose a serious safety hazard if the proper precautions aren’t taken.

Adam Equipment’s crane scales are designed to minimise this risk as much as possible. This blog will discuss the top 5 ways Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS" title="IHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="SHS" title="SHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29710"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="LHS" title="LHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29727"}} crane scales take safety into account.

1.     Operation Via Remote Control

The first rule of utilising crane scales is to maintain a safe distance when the items are suspended in the air and especially when they’re moving. However, it can take more time and delay processes if you need to keep raising and lowering the material when you need to adjust the crane scale’s settings, such as changing the weighing units.

When you’re frequently raising and lowering the load, operators and those working in the area are more likely to have their attention wane and become laxer about maintaining a safe distance until the load is safely on the ground. Even worse, operators may become tempted to climb on top of a load to reach the crane scale instead of removing the material first in their impatience, which may lead to overloading the scale, material breaking and/or operator getting injured. 

Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS" title="IHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="SHS" title="SHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29710"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="LHS Crane Scales" title="LHS Crane Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29727"}} each come equipped with a remote control that’s able to tare, zero, change weighing units and hold the settled values from up to 9 meters away. Raising and lowering the load will be necessary less often, which encourages those in the area to pay more stringent attention and discourages unsafe practices like climbing on top of loads when impatience strikes.

2.     Rotating Shackle Hook

Handling large, cumbersome materials can be challenging, particularly when trying to manoeuvre them into the correct position for most effective weighing. Adam Equipment’s crane scales feature a 360-degree rotating safety hook, which reduces the need to ensure precise alignment when loading.

Loads can attach from any angle and can rotate if necessary, which reduces the strain on both the load itself and the scale, as well as preventing the lifting rope or chain from twisting. In addition, it’s much less likely for the load to swing unexpectedly, which helps prevent accidents. Should a crane or gantry be transporting the material a great distance, those receiving the delivery at the end of the line can unhook more easily when they can choose the direction the items will sit. They have more direct control over how the load will be moving, allowing them to set up the safest and most effective method for the circumstances.

Click to download the full infographic

3.     High Overload Protection

It’s essential to respect the capacity of any scale or balance to protect its performance and longevity. Regularly overloading your crane scale can damage the load cell, which leads to inaccurate results. However, it’s not always possible to know whether your material will exceed the scale’s capacity, so accidental overloads are likely inevitable. For example, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS 10" title="IHS 10" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30199"}} offers a capacity of 10,000kg, the highest available out of Adam’s crane scales. If it’s overloaded to 10,250kg, the scale would buzz and the display would show dashes to indicate it’s overloaded, rather than providing a weight reading. At this point, you should immediately unburden the scale.

All Adam Equipment crane scales are designed with an overload limit of 125% of the capacity precisely to withstand occasional overloads. The IHS 10’s overload limit is 12,500kg. Beyond this, there is sure to be permanent damage, and the structural integrity of the scale will be compromised, which can be incredibly dangerous. So, while the IHS 10 can handle up to that amount, this is purely for safety purposes. The high threshold is there to minimise risk to both operators and equipment in case of accidental overloads, but regular use should always stay within the scale’s capacity.

4.     Robust Construction & Materials

Significant overload protection is fantastic for maintaining safety, but the reason Adam crane scales can boast such overload protection is because of their robust and durable construction.   

Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="SHS Crane Scales" title="SHS Crane Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29710"}} accommodate lighter loads with capacities of 50kg – 300kg and finer readabilities between 0.01kg and 0.05kg. Bright orange poly-carbonate housing and a large, chrome-plated steel hook and shackle provide exceptional durability and help maintain visibility when in the air.

Mid-capacity, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="LHS Crane Scales" title="LHS Crane Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29727"}} can handle weights between 500kg and 2000kg. To match its heavier responsibilities, LHS Crane Scales are constructed with vivid yellow cast-aluminium magnesium and chrome-plated steel hook. The {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS" title="IHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}} is built for very large masses with aluminium diecast housing, plated steel hook and an oversized shackle for extra sturdiness.

The SHS, LHS and IHS each feature a safety catch on their hooks, holding the weight secure and preventing materials from slipping off the hook and tumbling to the ground, injuring those below.

5.     Clear Display for Accurate Readings

Adam Equipment crane scales feature bright red LED displays. Increasing with their capacities, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="SHS Crane Scales" title="SHS Crane Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29710"}} offer 15mm-high digits, while the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="LHS" title="LHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29727"}}’s are 25mm-high and the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS" title="IHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}} boasts the biggest at 30mm-tall. Having such large, clear results improves visibility in low lighting and outdoor conditions. This reduces operator errors and allows safe use at a distance, where you can confidently tell if the crane is overloaded and record the weight of the material without getting too close.

If the load gets too high before you’re able to read the result, simply activate the Hold function on your remote. The weight will still be shown on the scale when the material is removed and the scale within reading distance again.

Looking for a safe crane scale? Contact the Adam team, we’ll be happy to help make a perfect match.

*Adam Equipment Co. Ltd. its directors, owners and affiliated companies and organisations cannot be held liable for any resulting damage or injury sustained as a result of the machines being used in excess of their stated maximum capacity, capabilities and ultimate overload limits. To avoid possible injury or death, read all instructions stated in the Manual before using.

As we’re ramping up for the holiday season, it’s time to get your shipping & receiving operations into tip top shape. Adam Equipment offers various scales to help any warehouse minimise errors and improve efficiency. Let’s dive into our top 5!

1.    Platform Scales

Platforms are one of the largest types of scales available for a warehouse, built to withstand overlarge or heavy shipments that need to be weighed. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTM Platform Scales" title="PTM Platform Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29718"}} are ideal for shipping departments that use hand-trucks as their primary method of transporting packages for weighing. The PTM is designed with ramps and bumpers that make rolling the hand-truck on the platform especially easy.

For shipping warehouses that feature more vertical space than horizontal and require a forklift to maneuver pallets and crates between high shelves all day, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platform" title="PT Platform" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} may be more your speed. With platform options between 1000mm² and 1500mm² there’s plenty of room for a forklift to drive up and lower the pallet or crate onto the platform.

Do you operate a hand-truck and forklift equally as often? Pair Adam Equipment’s PT Platforms with ramp accessories to enjoy the best of both worlds.

Should you not have the space to dedicate to a platform scale, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AELP Pallet Beams" title="AELP Pallet Beams" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29740"}} can be spread apart up to 5 metres to accommodate the largest of shipments, then be stacked and stored away until next use.

2.   Counting Scales

The next pickup is looming and you’re rushing to fulfill those last few orders so the shipments go out according to schedule. When time is of the essence, or even when you value your own time and effort in general, a counting scale is an effective partner. Counting scales like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CCT" title="Cruiser CCT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29716"}} can take the average weight of a small sample of identical pieces to provide an accurate count of many. Three displays share the total weight, individual piece weight and the piece count for absolute transparency.

Counting a ton of parts by hand can take a significant amount of time and there’s always the risk of miscounting. This can lead to dissatisfied customers, whether it’s for long waiting times or for receiving the incorrect count of items. Jaguar Land-Rover was struggling to pack large orders, some up to 4000 single parts, in a timely fashion before they discovered Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBC Counting Scales" title="GBC Counting Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29733"}}. By employing an army of GBC’s, JLR was able to complete picking orders in up to 85% less time.

3.    Checkweighing Scales

Everything has a weight limit – from boxes to delivery trucks. Weight limits are usually enforced because going beyond may lead to structural integrity being compromised, which could lead not only to product being damaged but workers being harmed as well. Cardboard boxes, for example, are measured in burst strength, or how much force it can take before breaking. In shipping departments, it’s a balancing act packing each box, crate or pallet with enough product to justify its use without going overboard.

Checkweighing scales allow you to input high and low weight limits. Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-Plus Checkweighing Scale" title="GFK-Plus Checkweighing Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} offers a full numeric keypad to enter in your exact desired limits. Once entered, the display changes colours to a vivid yellow, green or red if the weight is below, within or over the limits. This allows you to place a box on the scale and keep track in real time to ensure you’re not over or under packing.

Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403" title="AE 403" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29701"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-S" title="GK-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36758"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-Plus" title="GK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36757"}} indicators also offer colour-changing displays and can be connected to any Adam platform for high capacity checkweighing. Ensure the safety of your employees and delivery drivers by respecting the weight limits on your crates, pallets, equipment and trucks.

4. Label Printing Scales

Label printing scales print sticky labels that you can customise to include whatever information you’d like. Then all you do is weigh a package, press the Print button on your scale and out pops an instant record of the weight, piece count, checkweighing result, date, time and more. You can even include a bar or QR code.

Instantly improve traceability with the power to label each package or pallet with the exact date and time the weight was taken. Minimise errors by taking the data recording out of your own hands and get accurate and reliable information at your fingertips. Plus, catch potential issues sooner rather than later if the piece count recorded on the label isn’t what was requested. They’re also especially helpful for stock taking season, recording the piece count in each box for easy recall later.

Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BKT" title="BKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29734"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BCT" title="BCT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29748"}} Label-Printing Scales cover your bench and floor scale needs. For advanced parts counting, the BCT offers a full numeric keypad and over 1000 PLU’s for typing in sample sizes, piece weights and committing them to the internal memory. For extra versatility, Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 503" title="AE 503" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29724"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="504" title="504" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29714"}} indicators can be paired with any Adam platform scale. Weigh your way!

5.    Pallet Truck Scales

Are you constantly in motion, hustling from one area to the next in a sprawling warehouse? If so, you’re likely looking for a weighing scale that will help you maintain your momentum, rather than slow it down. Pallet truck scales like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTT" title="PTT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29717"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTSPlus" title="PTSPlus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29723"}} will give you the best bang for your buck, allowing you to transport and weigh palletised goods at the same time. But wait – there’s more!

Adam Equipment’s PTT Pallet Truck Scale is known for its label-printing capabilities, so once your shipment has been weighed and arrives at its destination in the warehouse, a label with the weight, date, time and even a bar code can be attached. The PTT does three jobs in one – weighs, transports and labels. How efficient!

Click the image above to download the full infographic

BONUS: Parcel Scales

Sometimes simple and dependable is all you need in a scale. When that’s the case, such as when you’re weighing completed parcels before they’re sent out, Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus series" title="CPWplus series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} is the solution. The CPWplus series offers four different stainless steel platform configurations so you can select the best one for you. Choose between our standard and Pillar models with a 300x300mm platform, our medium models with a 500x500mm platform and our large models with a 900x600mm platform. Each one offers a simple interface for easy operation with little to no learning curve for when you just want to weigh and get on with your day!

Wondering which type of scale would be best for your shipping department? Contact the Adam Equipment team, we’ll be happy to help.

Charcuterie boards are all about balancing beauty with flavor. From producing each component to caterers carefully arranging them on the board, scales and balances are crucial. This blog will outline the ways scales and balances impact every element of a delicious charcuterie board.

Manufacturing & Grocery

Cheese

The perfect meat and cheese combination depends not only on the desired flavor profile but texture as well. Brie offers a stiff rind and creamy, soft center, while gruyere is hard throughout. Likewise, soppressata is typically cut so it’s thick and chewy, while prosciutto is meant to be thin and papery – and they’re both pork.

Cheese grows bacteria quickly if proper moisture levels aren’t maintained – and though blue cheese contains mould (the same mould that makes penicillin), you don’t want it growing unintentionally. To help guarantee cheese stays in the right moisture range, tools such as Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB Moisture Analyser" title="PMB Moisture Analyser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}} perform quality control throughout the development process.

Cheeses meant for purposes like charcuterie boards (as opposed to being used within another product) are tested for moisture content particularly after the curds have been pressed and shaped into wheels, to make sure it’s ready for aging, and then frequently throughout the aging period.

Cheddar, for example, should contain no more than 39% moisture. A few batches will need to be sacrificed for testing, since it’s best to use a true representative slice, as if someone were cutting it for charcuterie. Alternatively, a tool could be used to poke a hole in the wheel to retrieve a slice that way, which ensures the center is reached and tested. The slice is placed on the PMB’s pan, which would weigh the sample, then heat it up until it’s dry and weigh it again to provide a moisture percentage. This is called the loss-on-drying method. The PMB is much quicker and doesn’t need as large of a sample as traditional moisture testing with an oven, saving time and product.

Meat

Cured meat is (arguably) the pièce de résistance of any charcuterie board. Curing refers to salting, aging and drying uncooked meat so it reduces moisture, which lends it a significantly longer shelf-life than raw or cooked meat. There are many regulations on curing meat that help ensure public health and safety, including monitoring the weight ratio between cured and uncured meat.

Have you ever ordered an 8oz ribeye and received a cooked meal that looks like it weighs much less? The 8oz is based on the pre-cooked weight, which includes all the juices and moisture from the meat. Both cooking and curing dry out these juices, and thus reduce the weight. In fact, it’s against regulations for most cured meats to weigh the same as or more than the uncooked product, and some must be a specific percentage beneath. Dry cured ham, for example, must weigh 18% less than the ham before curing. This requires that the ham be weighed both before and after – the perfect job for an NSF-certified washdown bench or floor scale like Adam Equipment’s IP68-rated {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}}.

Deli Meat & Cheese

Deli meat and cheeses are prepared the same way as ones outside on the shelves, the only difference is instead of taking the entire package, customers can request a specific weight of sliced product. Selling meat and cheese by weight in a deli legally requires the use of a trade-approved scale. For larger and messier orders, Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator Approved Floor Scales" title="Gladiator Approved Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33575"}} is a great fit, while most small to mid-size orders are easily handled by the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator Approved Bench Scales" title="Gladiator Approved Bench Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33575"}}. 

Fruits & Veggies

Fruits and veggies are the perfect way to liven up any charcuterie board with bright, eye catching colors and fresh flavors. Customers will typically purchase fruits and vegetables either packaged or loose. Both require scales, but for different reasons.

Packaged fruits will have been weighed using a trade approved checkweighing scale such as Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT-M" title="Cruiser CKT-M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33580"}}. Since fruits and vegetables aren’t all uniform sizes, checkweighing scales ensure each package weighs approximately the same amount. The CKT-M’s display changes color when the product is less than, within or over set limits. This ensures that each package can be the same price.

For loose produce, like bell peppers, apples or melons, trade approved scales are once again the best option. They make sure that customers are paying proportionally for what they’re taking – the largest bell pepper would of course cost more than the smallest.

Crackers, Breads & Nuts

Crackers, bread and nuts are great for elevating a charcuterie board by adding a crunchy texture.

Both crackers and bread are baked goods, created from flour, sugar, salt and a variety of other ingredients. To keep each batch consistent when manufacturing bread and crackers in bulk, scales are used to weigh each ingredient. Volumetric measurements in baking can lead to errors, as it depends on how densely packed the ingredients are. Since weight ignores density, it’s the perfect measuring system. Select crackers and breads during production would be chosen as quality control samples and weighed, to help guarantee that each batch are sufficient. This could be done with NSF-certified scales like Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} which offers capacities between 4kg and 32kg with readabilities from 0.1g to 2g. 

Nuts are roasted in batches, and it’s important to ensure that approximately the same number of nuts are cooked at the same time. This helps guarantee an even, consistent roast, as the air circulation, heat absorption and the amount of surface area exposed impacts how long they take to roast. 100 nuts in a batch will cook a lot faster than 200. The {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT" title="Cruiser CKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} can help by basing the batches on weight.  

Jams, Jellies & Sauces

Whether sweet, savory or sour, once a dip is chosen, the charcuterie board is complete. Each jar of dip boasts a uniform taste and texture with carefully controlled ingredients, particularly in jams and jellies where they’re primarily fruit based. Each jar must have approximately the same amount of fruit, measured by, you guessed it, a washdown or checkweighing scale.

Restaurants & Catering

Charcuterie boards are popular offerings in restaurants and wineries, they’re also frequently catered for large parties. Charcuteries are presented and eaten from one plate or board, which means proper portion sizes are important. There must be enough opportunities for each person eating to enjoy the variety of flavors and textures presented. Below is a chart which outlines how much of each component should be included depending on how big the party is.

If the charcuterie board is an appetiser, it’s recommended to lean on the lower side of each range. If it’s meant to be the main meal, aim for the higher end to make sure each person leaves with a full belly. Knowing what the charcuterie board is intended for will help prevent food waste and improve customer satisfaction.

Adam Equipment’s NSF-Certified {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude Compact Bench Scale" title="Latitude Compact Bench Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, with capacities between 3kg and 30kg with readabilities from 0.5g to 5g is the perfect instrument to measure out the perfect portions. The Latitude also offers a 210-hour battery life, plenty of juice for up to 26 busy working days.

From manufacturing to charcuterie board, scales and balances have encountered every component. To find the right one for your application, contact the Adam Equipment team, and we’ll be happy to help.

Pharmaceutical drugs are continually being discovered, developed and manufactured. Scales and balances are a key part of the process, from conception to your medicine cabinet. They provide precise measurements that help guarantee the medications on the market are the safest and most effective they could possibly be. In this blog, we’ll discuss where you’ll find scales and balances making a difference.

The Process & Timeline

Potential drugs endure a long, through research and testing process, lasting up to 20 years and costing up to a billion pounds. Like a funnel, fewer and fewer drugs progress through to the next stage each time, with most being eliminated in preclinical and phase 1 clinical trials. This ensures only the best, most effective are released to the public. Here’s the general process and timeline:

Identification

     -  Pharmaceutical scientists work to identify a compound (a substance formed from two or more chemical elements) against diseases, viruses or conditions

     -  The goal is for the compound to have a positive impact and eventually ease symptoms or provide a cure, without harm to the human body

     -  Lasts an average of four years

Preclinical Trials

     -  Test the compound on animals to get information on how the drug may work in humans

     -  Help develop a base understanding of potential potency (concentration), efficacy (ability) and toxicity (side effects)

     -  Take an average of two years

Clinical Trials

After preclinical testing on animals, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) or the European Medicines Agency (EMA) in the EU must approve the jump to testing on humans. If it’s approved, it then moves through a further three phases. Throughout each, scientists attempt to further their understanding of the drug, reconfirm previously established details and justify testing more people in the next phase.

Phase 1

     -  Human testing with a relatively small group of healthy volunteers (20 – 100)

     -  Establishes the safety and proper dose

     -  Ranges from several months to two years

Phase 2

     -  Human testing with a larger group of volunteers (100-300) that actively suffer from the targeted disease or condition

     -  Establishes efficacy and side effects to confirm safety

     -  Takes anywhere from several months to two years

Phase 3

     -  Human testing with a large group of patient volunteers (300 – 3000)

     -  Compares the efficacy and safety of the potential drug against what’s currently used to treat the targeted disease, virus or condition

     -  Establishes how the drug interacts with other drugs and comorbidities, or diseases and conditions beyond those the drug seeks to treat

     -  Attempts to prove that the drug is safe, beneficial and effective

     -  Lasts between two to four years

FDA/EMA Review

     -  The FDA or EMA reviews all trial and test results on both animals and humans

     -  The FDA or EMA decide whether the drug can be officially released to the public

     -  The review process takes between six to ten months, though some can be expedited if they’re high priority

Phase 4

     -  Occurs after approval by the FDA or EMA, manufacturing and distribution

     -  Performs long-term surveillance to study risks after long-term use

     -  Observes the efficacy of the drug during normal, widely varied everyday life

     -  Monitors for up to 15 years after distribution

How Are Scales and Balances Used in the Drug Development Process?

Now that we know the general process of a drug’s development, we’ll get into what areas you’ll find scales and balances most often.

Assist in Establishing Potency and Efficacy

A drug’s potency refers to the dose necessary to provide the level of response they’re looking for. Determining a drug’s potency involves precisely weighing compounds and testing them until the desired response is achieved. A drug’s potency is an important indicator of its potential dose – you may have noticed that most drugs are sold or prescribed in milligrams. Weighing solid compounds instead of measuring by volume offers more consistency and ensures that anyone with the precise recipe can reliably recreate it.

A drug’s efficacy is how effective it is at producing the desired response. A drug’s efficacy may be what makes or breaks its overall approval. It may take 2mg of a specific compound to begin degrading or killing diseased cells (a high potency), but if it doesn’t do it well, for example, only kills a fifth of the necessary cells, then it offers an insufficient efficacy.

Efficacy is relative to the problem you’re trying to solve – if you’re looking to completely relieve severe pain and produce a euphoric sensation, Acetaminophen won’t cut it, it has a low efficacy compared to a drug like Morphine. However, if you’re looking to relieve everyday aches and pains, Acetaminophen has a great efficacy and Morphine is overkill.

When dealing with such small quantities of chemicals, a semi-micro or analytical balance such as {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam Equipment’s Equinox" title="Adam Equipment’s Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} would be the best choice. The Equinox EAB offers readabilities as fine as 0.01mg and boasts a formulation function. This allows pharmaceutical scientists to create and store formulas for compounds with ingredients and tolerances. Without the precision of analytical and semi-micro balances, accurately determining a drug’s potency would be nearly impossible, which would make the whole development process much more difficult and more likely to fail.

The EAB connects easily to a or computer and provides GLP compliant data including date, time, user ID and more to ensure full traceability.

Help Develop Reliable Doses

As mentioned above, a drug’s potency is an indicator of its dose, or how much is recommended for someone to use. Potency essentially establishes the bare minimum requirement. To truly establish the correct dose, factors including a patient’s body weight must be considered. Body weight impacts how medicine is distributed throughout the body and how quickly it’s metabolised. An example you may recognise is that those with a higher body weight can handle quite a bit more alcohol than those of a lower body weight.

When presenting information to the FDA/EMA during the approval process, they’re going to want to see evidence of how the drug interacts with people of different weights, especially if they’re intending to market the drug to both children and adults.

Some drugs may be sold in a standardised dose because they’re not easy to overdose on and don’t cause any significant side effects, so scientists can effectively assume “one size fits all,” except for extreme circumstances. Others, like insulin for diabetics, will always have to have the dose adjusted per person, which is called an individualised dose, because the patient’s body weight and metabolism play such a heavy role.

The provided dose would need to be measured extremely carefully with an Analytical or Semi-Micro Balance like the Equinox or Adam Equipment’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}}. Inconsistency can render the trials useless and prevent the drug’s approval.

Maintain Effective Quality Control

Once the drug has been approved and it’s being manufactured, spot testing for quality control is very important. A precision balance is likely enough, such as Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland HCB" title="Highland HCB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna Precision Balance" title="Luna Precision Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29743"}}, with readabilities between 0.001g and 0.1g. Though not required, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Trade Approved Highland" title="Trade Approved Highland" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29730"}} would lend credibility, as its approval guarantees the balance meets the accuracy requirements of state and government testing.

The weight of a medication after it’s been produced is one of the most important qualities to double check before continuing the manufacturing process. By this point, every pill or tablet produced should contain exactly the right amount of active ingredient. If quality control notices that a batch of medicine is commonly weighing 320mg instead of 300mg, this could be enough to scrap the batch.

Performing quality control with precision balances ensures that consumers aren’t using medicine in incorrect doses that can lead to ineffective treatment or an increase of harmful side effects.  

The correct moisture content in pharmaceuticals is also crucial – you can read our blog on the topic by clicking here.

Medicines are dosed by weight, so they should be measured by the most accurate Adam Equipment scales and balances. For assistance with choosing the right balance, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

Weighing scales play an essential role in secondary school education, offering students practical experience in various subjects, from biology and chemistry to physics, mathematics and even cooking and crafts. This blog will discuss the types of weighing scales Adam Equipment recommends for secondary school students and how they can be used for daily operations.

Why is Weighing Accuracy So Important in Education?

One critical lesson all students learn through their educational careers is the importance of fact as well as how to determine and prove facts. This skillset is developed within classes such as chemistry or biology, where we follow the scientific method, or math, where there’s only one right answer. Beyond secondary school in the higher education and working world, inaccurate information could have disastrous consequences. Accurate weighing helps students learn the importance of consistency and precision, not only in STEM but in artistic endeavors as well.

Compact Balances

Compact balances will never go out of style in education. They require little training to operate, with some like Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Dune" title="Dune" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29721"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CB" title="CB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29736"}} only featuring three buttons each.

Adam Equipment’s Dune, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland" title="Highland" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Core" title="Core" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29732"}} compact balances boast overload protection, which helps prevent damage should a student inadvertently place an item heavier than its capacity. Meanwhile, should a student drop the balance or place an item not-so-gently on the pan, they’ll still be in proper working order with Adam’s ShockProtecttechnology, significantly increasing the lifetime of your balance. This classroom praises Core for surviving a spill on their Chemistry room floor.

If students are allowed to spread out around the classroom, school or even outdoors for a project, compact balances are particularly easy to transport. Adam’s Highland and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CBX" title="CBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29695"}} even boast internal rechargeable batteries, so you don’t have to keep replacements on hand.

Compact Balances for Biology

     - Comparing the weight of a plant from seed to sprout

     - Weighing organs of dissected animals

     - Basic weighing tasks

     - Introduction to accurate and thorough data collection

Compact Balances for Chemistry

     - Preparing basic solutions

     - Measuring chemicals by weight rather than volume is more accurate

     - Portability allows them to be shared between students and workstations

Compact Balances for Physics

     - Readabilities between 0.1g and 2g, Adam’s Dune & CB offer results that are simple to use in calculations, by hand or with a calculator

     - Teaches weight vs. mass

     - Introduction to the different units of measurement

Compact Balances for Cooking/Baking

What is cooking and baking if not a delicious form of chemistry?

     - Weighing ingredients has been found to be more consistent and accurate than measuring by volume

     - Easier to follow recommended serving sizes when portioning food

     - Easy to clean should dry ingredients spill

Click Here to Download Our Full Infographic

Mechanical Balances

Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="TBB Triple-Beam Mechanical Balances" title="TBB Triple-Beam Mechanical Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29708"}} are a popular choice for education. The learning curve isn’t very steep and their affordability makes it easier to purchase more sets, so students could have individual use, rather than sharing between their classmates.

Mechanical Balances for Physics

     - TBB’s hands-on operation provides students a way to see and understand the balancing process

     - Improves student’s ability to manually calculate weight values

Mechanical Balances for Chemistry

     - The TBB’s attachable legs provide room for below-balance weighing, useful for determining density

     - No need for a special table permitting under-balance weighing

     - TBB allows the opportunity to learn how to calculate density manually, rather than a digital balance providing results

Bench Scales

Bench scales are extremely versatile weighing equipment that often offer many functions in addition to weighing. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude compact bench scale" title="Latitude compact bench scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, for example, boasts parts counting, percentage weighing, checkweighing and display hold. They’re ideal for high-capacity applications and for demonstrating how scales and balances can be helpful beyond simple weighing, which could give your students an extra leg-up when it comes to problem solving in their future careers.

Parts counting could help a future warehouse manager during inventory season. Checkweighing may help a future quality control technician maintain consistency from product to product, while display hold will be quite helpful for a future veterinarian attempting to weigh a wiggly critter. Bench scales are perfect for truly getting the most bang from your buck and being able to teach how weight may become a recurring theme in their lives.

Bench Scales for Physics

     - {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT" title="Cruiser CKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AGB" title="AGB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29738"}} feature a peak hold function, excellent for measuring force via drop tests

     - Students can measure the weight of an item, then drop it on the pan from differing heights to see how force affects the object’s weight

     - Peak hold freezes results on the display so students can record the result without rushing

Bench Scales for Cooking

     - Helps keep a tight control of bulk ingredient inventory in the classroom

     - Available ingredients can be calculated by comparing quantities provided in the recipes

     - If you have 15 students and they all require 120g of flour for today’s lesson, if you only have 1.68kg of flour (1680g), one student will end up disappointed. It pays to be prepared!

Bench Scales for Crafts

     - Bench scales like Adam’s Aqua {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABW" title="ABW" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29656"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABW-S" title="ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} are fantastic for craft classes such as Sculpture, Woodwork or Pottery/Ceramics

     - Weighing creations throughout the process teaches how to use materials effectively, without waste

     - Weighing pottery helps with consistency between pieces, with our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus" title="CPWplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} an excellent surface for weighing with proper visibility

     - Aqua ABW and ABW-S are IP67 and IP68 for protection against glitter, clay, paint or water from washing those off

Hanging Scales

Instead of placing items on a platform like using a regular weighing scale, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="SHS hanging scale" title="SHS hanging scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29710"}} provides results by measuring the force of gravity as an item hang’s from its hook.  

Hanging Scales for Physics

     - Perfect for testing tensile strength

     - Adam’s SHS is extremely durable, so students can be rougher with it

     - An easy, fun and engaging method of measuring how much force is required for an object to break

Precision Balances

Precision balances are a wonderful middle-ground between bench scales and analytical balances. Bench scales come with higher average capacities yet less fine readabilities, while analytical balances are more precise but offer lower capacities and are generally less affordable. Adam’s precision balances possess capacities between 360g and 34kg, with readabilities between 0.001g and 0.1g.

Precision Balances for Biology

     - Ensures consistent samples in experiments to ensure that they’re following the scientific formula

     - Allows for testing the weight of an item over time as it’s being used for an experiment

     - Helps make experiments clear and repeatable with controlled variables

Precision Balances for Chemistry

     - Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna Precision Balances" title="Luna Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29743"}} are equipped with a dynamic/animal weighing function, which records the average weight of an item over a set time period

     - This makes weighing liquid chemistry solutions easier and more accurate

     - No need to guarantee that the solution is still and settled first

     - The Luna’s percentage weighing helps precisely measure out exact percentages and ratios of chemicals, streamlining the weighing process

Precision Balances for Physics

     - The Highland Compact Precision Balance offers accumulation

     - Excellent for projects requiring multiple trials

     - Students can add up each result, divide by the number of attempts to reach an average weight

Analytical Balances

Analytical balances are the most advanced that we’d recommend for a secondary school, but Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text=" Lunas’ " title=" Lunas’ " template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}}are just right for the job. They’re versatile and effective without being overly complex or distracting. You can choose between capacities of 120g to 250g, with readabilities of 0.0001g.

Analytical Balances for Chemistry

     - Helps students see the difference between compact balance and analytical balance readabilities

     - Encourages an understanding of when total accuracy and precision is necessary

     - Perfect for determining molecular weights

     - Performing quantitative analysis

     - Preparing solutions

     - Provides students with clear weight values to eliminate guesswork, increasing confidence

In Summary, Recommended Balances by Subject

Still not sure which weighing scales may be best for your classroom? Contact our team and we’ll be happy to help.

Adam Equipment recently launched our new {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-S" title="GK-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36758"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK-Plus" title="GK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36757"}} indicators, joining our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK" title="GK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35482"}} for a well-rounded weighing family. This blog will go into detail on the differences between each of our GK indicators and the features that make the range worth expanding.

Bench, Floor and Platform Scales

The GK has always been a versatile indicator, and we saw no reason to reduce that when designing the new GK-S and GK-Plus. Altogether, our entire GK family is offered in more than one-hundred different configurations, not including the indicators on their own. You can enjoy the GK family in combination with:

                  Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK" title="GBK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29698"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK-S" title="GBK-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36713"}} & {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK-Plus" title="GBK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} Bench Checkweighing Scales

                  Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK" title="GFK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29739"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-S" title="GFK-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36713"}} & {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-Plus" title="GFK-Plus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36712"}} Floor Checkweighing Scales

                  {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT" title="PT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} Platform Scales

                  {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTM Platform Scales" title="PTM Platform Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29718"}}

                  {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AELP Pallet Beams" title="AELP Pallet Beams" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29740"}}

The weighing world is your oyster with the GK family, so let’s get into what makes them unique.

Click here to download full infographic

Display

Each indicator offers an LCD backlit display so the results can be read in any lighting. With 20mm-high digits, our GK is easy to read from 2.43 metres away. This reduces the need for proximity and enables quick readings from a distance.

With even more convenience in mind, our new GK-S and GK-Plus indicators both boast 40mm-high digits, expanding the readable distance from 2.43 metres to 4.88 metres – double the viewable distance. They can be read even in crowded or busy areas and more people have access to the results, helping to improve transparency within operations.

Checkweighing

The GK features a series of nine small LCD bulbs beside the display that light up when it senses an item is above, within or below your limits, like a traffic light. With nine bulbs, three per designation, the GK can notify you of the weight’s progression. For example, if the item is significantly below your limit, one amber light will shine, and another if more weight is added to the pan. If it’s within your limits but on the higher side, three green lights will glow, etc.

Our new GK-S and GK-Plus are also designed so you’ll know where you fall on the scale of your limits, but in a quicker, clearer way. The display itself, rather than lights next to the display, change color to amber, green or red if the item is below, within or above your limits.

The GK’s traffic-light system is excellent for those that would prefer to know approximately how close they are to achieving their goal without needing to pay strict attention to the results themselves. Those who want a clear, eye-catching indication with no fuss will enjoy the GK-S and GK-Plus’s simplicity. If you’re constantly moving around in your workspace, the GK-S and GK-Plus displays can be seen and understood out of the corner of your eye, while the GK requires the ability to look straight-on regularly.

Keypad

Both our GK and GK-Plus possess full numeric keypads to make setting complex checkweighing limits simpler. Dedicated buttons allow you to head straight into entering high and low limits, saving time and effort when checkweighing is performed regularly.

For those who perform checkweighing less regularly and would prefer a more simple, straightforward keypad, the GK-S is here to impress. Five dual-purpose buttons cut down on the learning curve and allow you to focus on your work – and when that work includes checkweighing, access to the function is close at hand.

Interface

All three indicators offer an RS-232 interface as well as the option for a USB, which would allow you to connect to a computer or printer easily. Computer software such as {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU" title="AdamDU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} can connect with up to eight scales or balances at the same time. You’ll receive immediate analysis of weight results. For example, should customers complain that their pies are looking a little stingy on the filling, you may want to look at an analysis of your recent weight results. If you find that all your most recent pies, though within your acceptable limits, have been on the lighter side, then perhaps it’s time to shift your production practices!

Connecting to our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AIP" title="AIP" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32749"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP2" title="ATP2" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32727"}} printers makes it easy to sustain thorough, hard copies of your records. Thorough records ensure transparency in operations and allow you to travel back in time, if necessary, to cross reference details.

Power

When electricity’s scarce, you don’t want to worry about which equipment can safely be unplugged to free up space before you can use your weighing scale. Our GK and GK-Plus both boast internal rechargeable batteries, while our GK-S offers the option. With these, you can weigh wherever you want, rather than where there’s a power source. A 120-hour battery life ensures you get through 15 eight-hour workdays before recharging.

Other Applications

Neither the GK, GK-Plus or GK-S exclusively perform checkweighing tasks. All of them retain parts counting, percentage weighing and check counting functions. Both the GK-S and the GK-Plus boast accumulation, while the GK-Plus goes above and beyond offering dynamic/animal weighing and net total weighing. While you may not need every function on a day-to-day basis, they’re available as an additional convenience if the opportunity arises.

Incidentally, should you perform parts counting operations more often than checkweighing, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GC Counting Indicator" title="GC Counting Indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35481"}} may be right for you.

We know over one-hundred different options can get overwhelming, so for help choosing which indicator and platform you need, contact our team!

There are many types of warehouses, but one thing they all have in common is how much utilising a weighing scale improves daily operations. This blog will go into depth on types of scales commonly used in warehouses and how they would boost efficiency handling day-to-day tasks.

Counting Scales

Counting scales like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CCT" title="Cruiser CCT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29716"}} are specially designed to make frequent counting tasks easier. Adam counting scales offer three different displays so that the total weight, individual piece weight and the counting result can be seen simultaneously.

Counting scales are also able to store this information in their memories, so you can store and then recall a product you find yourself counting regularly. These are called Product Lookups, or PLUs. Our CCT boasts the ability to store up to 140 products.

Whether the unit weight is known, unknown or stored, the full numeric keypad with dedicated buttons helps speed up each transaction. Buttons for Sample, Unit Weight and PLU let you start anywhere in the counting process quickly and easily.

Which daily warehouse tasks can you count on counting scales to improve?

Inspecting Incoming Goods

When your warehouse accepts an order delivery, it’s a worthwhile practice to count the contents before unpacking. This helps verify that you’re receiving exactly what you’ve paid for. The piece count provided by your scale should match your order exactly. If it doesn’t, it could be indicative that there’s been some mix-up or mistake. When using a counting scale, you’re aware of this error within seconds, rather than the hours it might have taken to count the pieces manually. This also makes it simpler to correct than if the goods had been distributed to other areas or sold before the issue was noticed. 

Inventory

Inventory season is one of the most stressful. Accurate counts are crucial for a variety of reasons, including maintaining operational efficiency, managing supplies and strategic decision making. It can take a long time to count everything individually, especially small parts or products piled in boxes. After a while, your counters begin to get tired and their progress slows, with accuracy becoming more and more questionable each hour. With a counting scale, you can cut down the amount of time spent on inventory significantly. Mistakes are reduced, efficiency improved and your staff still have energy after the job is done.  

Order Picking

Customers want the quantity they’ve paid for, and it all depends on the pickers. It’s a lot of pressure, which is why they need a counting scale to share some of the responsibility. Pickers can depend on a counting scale to guarantee that each order has the correct quantity of items. Customers are getting their orders quicker and more accurately, boosting your company’s reputation and helping to encourage repeat business.

Pallet Truck and Platform Scales

Pallet truck scales are built like a regular pallet truck, with steel forks and rolling wheels. They’re attached to a weighing indicator that can display the weight of any pallet or item carried by the forks. Platform scales are large, high-capacity scales that typically stay in a dedicated space on the floor of a warehouse. What’s the use of these scales day-to-day?

Multitasking

Our pallet truck scales, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTT" title="PTT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29717"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTSplus" title="PTSplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29723"}}, are excellent when time is of the essence and multitasking is a must. Save effort and time by weighing and transporting a pallet simultaneously with easy-rolling, non-marring polyurethane wheels. To aid in thorough record-keeping, the PTT weighs using the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 503" title="AE 503" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29724"}} label printing indicator. Once the weight stabilises, simply print out a fully customisable label and slap it on the pallet for a quick reference later. Your label can include the weight, date as well as a scannable barcode or QR code that leads to more information. No more guessing, hunting down paperwork or reweighing!

Heavy Loads

Platform scales like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT" title="PT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} are perfect for pallets as well as other heavy, non-palletised items. Since they often offer extremely high capacities and robust construction, you’re earning improved peace of mind knowing that your scale is durable enough for daily use. Also, all Adam platform scales can be mixed-and-matched with almost any Adam weighing indicator. You can truly tailor your weighing experience to get the most out of your scale.

Unusually Shaped Loads

Sometimes unusually shaped objects are difficult to weigh on a normal platform scale. For example, large sheets of glass, oversized crates or long pipes. They would more than likely hang off the edge of a platform scale, which can impact the weight distribution and lead to inaccurate results. Pallet beams like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AELP" title="AELP" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29740"}} are essentially two thin platform scales connected by a wire. The beams can be spread apart to accommodate any sized or shaped item.

Checkweighing Scales

Checkweighing scales are like counting scales in that they’re designed to ease the process of frequently performing checkweighing tasks. Though our checkweighing scales, such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT" title="Cruiser CKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}}, only feature one display, it changes color in response to weights that are below (yellow), within (green) or above (red) the limits you’ve set.

Safe Loading & Shipping

Companies like Amazon set weight limits on their deliveries – each box should weigh no less than 1lb and no more than 50lbs, except for singular items weighing over 50lbs on their own. This protects those who are packing and delivering the boxes from injuries sustained while lifting and carrying them. Certain types of containers may have their own weight limits. For example, plastic shipping bags may be able to hold less than an average box.

After setting high and low limits, your workers won’t even have to pay strict attention to realise when they’ve surpassed the regulated weight. All they need to do is keep an eye on the display in case it turns red!

Knowing the weight of a package before it’s shipped is also necessary for safe truck loads. Overloading your delivery truck can decrease its fuel efficiency, increase wear and tear and even be dangerous in some circumstances. Taking the time now to weigh each item and pack them carefully will save you trouble in the long run.

Hanging/Crane Scales

Hanging scales, also known as crane scales, hang in the air suspended off weigh-beams (or cranes) to weigh items using the undefeatable power of gravity. Simply attach the product or its container to the crane scale’s hook. Each of our hanging scales offer swivel hooks for easy loading. Worried about safety? A remote control allows you to operate the crane scale from a safe distance.

Why might you choose to use a hanging or crane scale in your warehouse?

Especially Large Items

Even if you have the space for a platform scale, you may require the use of a hanging scale to weigh very large items.

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS" title="IHS" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}} can accommodate as much as 20,000lb/10,000kg, so it will almost always be equipped for the job. It will help guarantee accurate results with very large items, such as shipping containers, industrial machinery or wind turbine blades, to name a few. If an object is so large that it hangs off even a platform scale, it may be better to weigh it in the air instead.

Save Space

Despite their rather large capacities, crane scales are quite compact, so they don’t take up a lot of space when they’re not in use. You can store them away somewhere or leave them hanging until you need them again, with the floor space underneath available for normal use. This contrasts with platform scales, which typically stay where they’ve been placed and take up quite a bit of floor space. On the other hand, platform scales can perform other functions such as checkweighing or parts counting, while crane scales are limited to weighing and hold.

You know your warehouse will benefit from a weighing scale, the only question is, which one? If you’re not sure which weighing scale you should stock for your warehouse, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

You’ve started a small business – congratulations! Some of your products must be priced by weight and you can’t decide between all the trade approved options out there, including price computing scales. Which type of scale is best for your small business? There’re seven key factors to keep in mind while shopping. Let’s discuss.  

What’s a Trade-Approved Scale?

First and foremost, when you sell products by weight, you are legally required to use a trade-approved weighing scale to determine prices. Trade-approval is an extra certification that signifies your readings are accurate enough to be used for commercial purposes. If you’re discovered to have been using a scale that isn’t trade-approved to set prices, you could be heavily fined. For a small business, fines can be a monumental setback for operations.

Some industries, like the botanicals industry, simply employ trade approved scales not to price by weight but to ensure that everything is accurately and correctly tracked – recording the value in a trustworthy manner.

Different regions have a different association that grants trade approval. In the United States, scales are granted approval from the National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) while Canada grants Measurement Canada approval. Europe gets European Commission (EC) approval, while in South Africa it’s from the National Regulator for Compulsory Specification (NCRS). Finally, Australia is approved by the National Measurement Institute, or NMI.

What’s a Price Computing Scale?

It’s important to understand that a price computing scale is a type of trade-approved scale. However, unlike regular legal-for-trade scales that have been certified as accurate enough for commercial use, price computing scales have been designed specifically for retail applications. They display not only weight, but unit price and total price for a customer to pay. They also typically offer extra features, such as an extensive memory, that may help make certain processes easier. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale" title="Swift Price Computing Retail Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}} is one-of-a-kind in our product lineup.

Which is Best for Your Small Business?

Not all small businesses are built the same, so of course, there’s no one right answer. However, there are a few aspects to take into consideration when you’re shopping for your new business scale.

1.     Necessary Capacity

We offer eight different pillar and non-pillar models of the Swift Price Computing Retail Scale. Their capacities range from 1.5kg / 3kg to 15kg / 30kg, ideal for most average sized products. However, should your products fall on the lighter side, you may wish to utilise our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland Approved Portable Precision Balance" title="Highland Approved Portable Precision Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29730"}}, which would grant you finer precision in exchange for less capacity. The Highland is ideal for high-quality precision work in the jewellery industry. Likewise, if the products you sell are typically heavier than 30kg, a higher capacity floor scale such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK-M" title="GFK-M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33578"}} or our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PTaM Platform Scales" title="PTaM Platform Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35283"}} are an excellent choice. 

2.     Your Environment

The Swift features a stainless-steel pan for easy cleaning as well as drip channels to divert any spills away from the scale’s internal components. It’s fantastic for those that don’t need much protection from water or dust.

For those whose business involves the risk of frequent spills or other messiness that will necessitate thorough cleanings (such as catering or a restaurant), we recommend our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator Approved Bench or Floor Scales" title="Gladiator Approved Bench or Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33575"}}, which are IP68 rated. The Gladiator is fully water and dust-proof, perfect for any damp, dirty, wet or humid environment you may find yourself in.

3.     Business Operations and Efficiency

For very small businesses with only a few products, a trade approved scale without price computing abilities offers efficiency stemming from their simpler operation. This is because determining pricing manually won’t be as time-consuming. Businesses on the medium to large side of small will find themselves more efficient with our Swift.

Swift boasts an extensive memory system – 161 Product Lookups, or PLUs. PLUs allow you to store the unit prices per 100g or per kilogram of up to 161 products. This makes it exceedingly quick and efficient to determine the proper pricing for a customer. Simply type in the reference number for the product, weigh it, and the Swift will instantly calculate the price your customer will pay.

Swift may take a bit more initial effort on your part to input all the product information, but if you have a higher number of products, it’s well worth the time now to reduce the time spent calculating prices manually later. When you need to change your prices or add a new product to your selection, once the details are in your Swift, there’s no learning curve involved. You don’t have to remember that the price changed – your Swift does it for you.

4.     Multifunctionality

Some scales like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT-M Approved Checkweighing Scales" title="Cruiser CKT-M Approved Checkweighing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33580"}} are multifunctional. This is excellent for businesses that have some products priced by weight while others aren’t – a two for one deal, if you will.

For example, if you sell individual fruits and vegetables by weight but sell boxes of produce for one set price. The checkweighing application can be used to help guarantee that each carton of fruit is approximately the same weight as another. For example, cartons of blueberries.

In addition, the CKT-M offers parts-counting, check counting, accumulation and percentage weighing. You can perform a variety of weighing tasks in addition to pricing by weight. Our Swift can only perform price computing function in addition to regular weighing.

5.     Customer Experience

All our trade-approved scales are undeniably effective behind-the-scenes as well as front-and-centre. However, if your business is customer-facing, you can’t beat Swift in terms of overall customer experience.

With three displays on both the front and rear of the scale, the weight of the product, unit price and price to pay are clearly visible to both you and your customer. This inspires a level of trust you may not otherwise get should these results be withheld. It allows for immediate feedback and communication – if there’s an issue or a discrepancy, it can be noticed and rectified before the transaction is complete.

Furthermore, people don’t like waiting in line. There are other errands to run, people to see, jobs to get back to. It’s stressful trying to manually calculate prices when there’s ten impatient people staring at you. Swift reduces this stress by helping smoothy facilitate each transaction, allowing you to focus on building a rapport with your clientele.

6.     Data and Reporting

Our trade-approved scales, including Swift, require an additional accessory such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2 Thermal Printer" title="ATP 2 Thermal Printer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}} or our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam DU Data Collection Software" title="Adam DU Data Collection Software" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} to effectively provide you with data reporting. Otherwise, any records will need to be recorded manually.

Our ATP 2 Thermal Printers allow you to print weighing results on paper, which you can tear off and provide to your customer as a receipt or keep for your own records and inventory tracking. Printed records straight from your weighing scale reduce the risk of errors from copying the results incorrectly, whether handwritten or typed. Swift has the additional benefit of including not only the weight in the printout but the unit price and total price via the RS-232 interface – like the image below.

The Adam DU is advanced software that can connect as many as eight scales at once. It performs detailed data analysis that you can use to make informed business decisions. Track sales quickly and easily.

7.     Cost and Budget

If you’re just starting out or you maintain a less-is-more business structure, our Swift may seem like a bit too much in scope and expense. When you’re only juggling a few priced-by-weight products and you’re not required to speed through transactions, a legal-for-trade compact, bench or floor scale is an affordable and convenient solution.

However, if you’re planning to grow or you already have an extensive list of products that are priced by weight, the higher initial investment for the Swift is worth it. It’ll pay for itself in saved time, improved efficiency and reduced errors in the long run.

With proven precision and accuracy, near instantaneous stabilisation times and long battery lives, you can’t go wrong with any of our legal-for-trade or price computing scales for your small business. If you’re still unsure which one’s right for you, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

Expanding the Luna range, which already features analytical LAB and precision LTB/LBB/LPB models, the Luna LBL sets a new standard in precision weighing. With its innovative features and robust design, the Luna LBL caters to diverse applications and provides users with unparalleled accuracy and convenience.  An improved precision load cell offers more advanced processing capabilities from the board and chips, which allows for finer accuracy at a higher resolution. 

In addition to the convenience of RJ45 ethernet connectivity, the process of data sharing and connecting to devices like PCs or printers is simple. For effortless communication, the new Luna LBL also comes with standard USB and RS-232 interfaces. Luna printouts are formatted for compliance with Good Laboratory (GLP) guidelines. 

An ABS plastic indicator, a die-cast aluminum base and a large 11.8"x15.7" / 400x300mm stainless steel pan help make LBL both easy to clean and durable enough to withstand demanding field or benchtop use. 

LBL’s six models range in capacity from 14kg to 34kg, all with a fine readability of 0.1g. Weighing units include g, kg, ct, GN, N, lb, oz, lb:oz, ozt, dwt, T and a custom unit. 

Like the rest of the Luna family, LBL’s generously sized LCD display features bright 0.9”/24mm-tall digits against a black background, allowing the user to easily and efficiently read weighing results. The indicator is removeable, allowing placement either on the body of the machine or wall-mounted with an included bracket for easy viewing. Several models offer a pillar-mounted option. 

Luna LBL offers a wide variety of applications, such as weighing, parts counting, percentage weighing, dynamic/animal weighing, checkweighing, check counting and density determination.  

LBL also offers selectable digital filtering to help minimize the effects of vibration and other disturbances, a zero-tracking feature to ensure the display returns to zero and a capacity tracker built into the display for monitoring possible overloads. 

Options include a hook for below-balance weighing and a rechargeable battery for up to 50 hours of on-the-go use. 

Like the rest of the Luna line, LBL comes with Adam’s industry-leading five-year warranty, offering peace of mind to users that they can count on LBL for years to come. 

To learn more about the Luna LBL range, as well as the rest of the Luna family of balances, visit www.adamequipment.com. 

About Adam Equipment 

Adam Equipment, which celebrated its 50th anniversary in 2023, designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, botanicals/CBD, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.  

SOURCE Adam Equipment 

Whether you’re a new farmer or looking to improve your operations, weighing your livestock is critical for farm management. This blog will explain why weighing livestock is so crucial, as well as provide some methods and tips for weighing properly.

Why Livestock Weighing is Crucial

You may know successful farmers who have never weighed their livestock. While it’s certainly possible to manage without utilising weighing scales, incorporating these tools in your day-to-day makes monitoring animal health, optimising feed efficiency, managing breeding, babies and selling meat significantly less difficult. Without weight data, these tasks involve a lot of time-consuming trial-and-error to learn what works best. By incorporating weighing scales into your daily routine, you can streamline these processes and improve your business’s efficiency.

Monitoring Health

The weight of any animal naturally fluctuates over time based on their activity levels, food and water intake and excretion. Small weight changes are normal on a day-to-day basis, so it’s important to understand your livestock’s average weight to identify significant deviations.

To track weight effectively, you must establish a baseline weight for your livestock. If you only have a few animals, you can track each one’s weight individually. If you have a large herd, you could record individual weights on our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT platform scale" title="PT platform scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} and then calculate the average weight for the entire group. Calculate the averages for all males and all females separately.

Now that you’ve determined both individual and average weights, it’s much easier to identify individuals that have deviated outside of the normal healthy range. In general, if the animals gain or lose more than 7-10% of their body weight, there may be a problem. They may have a parasite or disease, developed a pregnancy or they’re being bullied out of food by the rest of the group. The faster the deviation is recognised, the more quickly it can be resolved. This saves you time and trouble, particularly if the animal in question turns out to be suffering from something transmissible to the entire herd.

Feed Efficiency

Understanding your livestock’s average weight also helps you determine whether you’d like to cut or increase their food intake. Weighing their feed on a floor scale such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} can help you make informed choices on how much food you should provide to get the livestock to your desired weight. And don’t worry about messes or spills – the Gladiator is IP68-rated waterproof, so it’s extremely easy to clean.

Mature farm pigs, for example, should eat about six to eight pounds of food a day – each. If you have ten pigs, that’s 60 to 80 pounds of food every day. That’s a serious expense, so you want to ensure you’re not wasting your money by only providing the amount of food necessary. Weighing the feed helps make sure they’re getting the right amount – no more, no less.

To check whether your changes are getting the desired results, weigh your livestock regularly. If you need to give them more food, you’ll know before wasting too much of your time. If you need to give them less, it could save you money sooner. It may take some trial-and-error to determine the right amount to raise or lower their weights, but collecting weight data informs each trial and makes the whole process significantly easier.  

Breeding Management

Breeding is an essential part of agriculture. However, to save both your pockets and the lives of your assets, you want to ensure that you’re only breeding healthy livestock. They should be at their optimal weight before attempting to breed them, as you’ll have to work much harder to get them to a healthy weight after they’re pregnant, when they require more food. Using a floor or platform scale to regularly weigh your female livestock can provide an excellent indication as to which individuals are healthy enough for breeding.

Paying special attention to pregnant individuals is a good idea, as they’ll have different nutritional requirements than the rest of the herd. You’ll want to increase their food intake and make sure they’re eating it all alone, rather than potentially sharing it with others. This has additional benefits, as mothers of a healthy weight birth healthier offspring to add to your herd and healthy dairy cows and goats provide the best and highest-quality milk.  

Babies develop incredibly quickly out of the womb, and it can be difficult to determine how much food to provide once they’re naturally weaned from milk by their mother. Or, if you’re feeding them formula, which can get expensive, their weight can help determine when they can begin eating hay and grass instead. Weigh them regularly on a bench scale such as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}}  or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="MTB Veterinary Scale" title="MTB Veterinary Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29742"}} if they’re small, then a floor scale, then a platform scale as they’re growing until they’re mature. This way, you have data to make informed adjustments to their feeding.

Meat Selling

If you’re a meat farmer, you know that healthy animals of proper weight with a nice balance of fat and muscle produce the best meat. Besides that, though, once your livestock has been butchered, the meat itself is sold by weight, which requires the use of a trade-approved scale.

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift price computing retail scale" title="Swift price computing retail scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}} helps you set prices per weight and can store them in the scale’s memory to be recalled later. In case you sell items other than meat at a farm shop or farmers market, or multiple kinds of meat, the Swift can hold up to 161 prices in its memory. With displays on both the front and rear for weight, unit price and total cost, both you and your customer are kept well-informed on how much they’re receiving.  

Methods of Weighing Farm Animals

The traditional method of weighing farm animals is not really to weigh them at all, but essentially to guesstimate based on their size and measurements. You could measure the circumference of your dairy cow or goat, for example, from just behind their front legs straight around their upper belly to the back, as if the measuring tape is a belt. Then, measure the length from the cow or goat’s chest diagonally to the top of their tail. The calculation to determine their weight would be the circumference multiplied by the circumference, then multiplied by their length. After you get that number, divide it by 300.

(Circumference x Circumference x Length)

_______________________________________

300

Pig measurement is slightly different due to their more rotund frame – measure the circumference around the upper belly, then measure from behind the ears to the base of the tail. Then, multiply the circumference by the circumference, then by the length, and divide by 400 instead.

(Circumference x Circumference x Length)

_______________________________________

400

That’s quite a bit of math and to perform those measurements on each of your livestock would be incredibly time consuming. Luckily, modern weighing scales take all the calculations off your hands. They’re also incredibly versatile and can help with more than just basic weighing.

Other Applications for Weighing Scales

Checkweighing is an excellent application for any livestock farm, particularly if you have set standards you wish to maintain. If you know, for example, the minimum and maximum weights a healthy goat can be, you can set those as low and high limits on your floor or platform scale.

If any of your goats are lower than the minimum weight, the display will turn yellow and if any are heavier than the maximum weight, the display will turn red. Now you know which animals to provide specialised care immediately, without having to spare too much attention to each individual result. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK Checkweighing Floor Scale" title="GFK Checkweighing Floor Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29739"}} or our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platforms with GK Indicator" title="PT Platforms with GK Indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29725"}} both offer extra features for easier checkweighing.

A dynamic/animal weighing feature is a must if you know your livestock won’t stand still long enough for a stabilised result. Dynamic/animal weighing takes the average weight over a set time, which helps accommodate for the movement. Our PT Platforms and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator Bench and Floor Scales" title="Gladiator Bench and Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} offer a dynamic/animal weighing application.

Best Practices for Weighing Livestock

Before you throw yourself into weighing your livestock, here are a few tips to help make it easier.

Regular Weighing Schedule

Weighing infrequently isn’t going to provide much help, as the goal should be to catch livestock that are becoming an unhealthy weight before it becomes an issue. Ideally, you would weigh livestock every few weeks, at least, so you can establish a dataset, timeline and track their progress if necessary.

Sheep, for example, grow thick and coarse wool throughout the year, which significantly changes their average weight. If you were to weigh the sheep once after shearing and only again right before shearing, you might be concerned why they’ve all gotten so much heavier. Weighing at least once a month ensures that you’re taking this into account and you’re establishing a new average regularly.

Proper Handling Techniques

Some livestock may be fine standing on a scale, while others will be a bit harder to control. If that’s the case, we recommend placing feed on the scale, taring out the weight, and allowing your livestock to eat while they’re being weighed. This keeps them preoccupied and, hopefully, still enough for a proper weight reading.

Data Recording and Analysis

We recommend storing weight records on your computer, rather than writing on a document by hand. There’s less of a chance of it being lost, destroyed or messy handwriting mixing up one number for another. We offer {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU Data Collection" title="AdamDU Data Collection" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} software that can be downloaded onto your computer and connected to any of our scales and balances via the RS-232 interface. AdamDU performs real time analysis on your results, supplying deeper insights than you might be able to obtain from raw data.

Equipment Maintenance

Remember to calibrate your weighing scales at least once a year, to guarantee that you’re getting accurate results every time. Bench and floor scales will likely require finer-tuned calibration weights, while our platform scales must be calibrated by kilogram M1-class weights to make sure that even your heaviest livestock are accurately weighed.

If you’re wondering which scale is right for your farm, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

Across facilities like warehouses, factories and construction sites, industrial weighing scales are crucial equipment. Though our industrial scales work well on their own, we offer weighing accessories to help increase performance and boost efficiency, as well as provide added protection and value. This blog will go over the top 6 accessories that we offer for industrial and commercial settings.

1.     Platform Ramps

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platform Scales" title="PT Platform Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} are excellent for weighing pallets, drums, crates and other oversized and heavy objects with their capacities up to 4,500 kg. Due to their durable reinforced frames, they’re raised 109.2 millimetres above the ground. This isn’t an issue when items are loaded by hand or dropped off by a pallet stacker that’s able to lift beyond that distance.

However, if your preferred weighing method is wheeling your items onto the platform via a pallet truck, overcoming this height can be a nuisance. We offer mild steel ramps for all PT models. Connect up to four ramps, one on each side, for an instant improvement in how easy it is to load and unload using a pallet truck or other wheeled method.

2.     In-Use Covers

Warehouses and factories can get messy, which can be irritating if it begins to impede the functioning of your equipment. our industrial scales, including the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland HCB" title="Highland HCB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}}, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser series" title="Cruiser series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK" title="GBK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29698"}} & {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK" title="GFK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29739"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude Compact Bench Scale" title="Latitude Compact Bench Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}} and many of our discontinued products.

3.     Calibration Weights

Even industrial scales require regular calibration. We recommend calibrating bench scales every few months and anything larger at least once a year. The more often calibration is performed, the more confident you can be that your results are always 100% accurate.

We offer both ASTM (US exclusive) and OIML (international) test weights. Most industrial scales will use Class 4 ASTM weights or M1 class OIML weights. These classes are built to accommodate high-capacity scales that don’t need to be as ultra-precise as an analytical or precision balance.

Whether you’re looking for a few individual weights or a full set, we have what you need. To learn more about calibration weights, check out our blog on the topic here.  

4.     Hard Carrying Cases

Hard carrying cases make it much easier to transport your industrial bench scale to other necessary locations. They also protect your device scale from harm while they’re not in use, helping defend your investment against all the hustle and bustle of industrial work.

5.     Printers

It’s important to keep weighing records handy. That way should any issue or inconsistency pop up, you would notice significantly faster. While handwritten or typed manuals are great, there’s always a risk of human error. What would normally have been a minor typo or bad handwriting has suddenly turned into a big problem for your company. Instead, try out our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ATP 2 Thermal Printer" title="ATP 2 Thermal Printer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36656"}}, able to connect to most Adam scales and balances via an RS-232 interface. With the tap of a button, the ATP 2 prints clearly legible and accurate weighing results that you can keep for your records.

6.     Light Tower Kit

Checkweighing is a common application in the industrial world. Our checkweighing scales boast color-changing displays that show yellow, green or red if the weight is below, within or above your preset limits. However, sometimes not everyone who needs to know the results is standing in a convenient location. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="light tower kit" title="light tower kit" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32772"}} connects to your scale via an installed relay box. Once connected, the tower lights up with beaming yellow, green and red colors that can be seen from any direction.

Weighing accessories can give your workspace the boost it needs to be extra productive and efficient. If you’re wondering what accessories are best for you, contact the Adam team or chat with Adam AI, either will be happy to help.

You know that crops need water, soil and sunlight to flourish. However, it’s a bit more complicated than that. Too much of any is just as damaging as too little. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB Moisture Analyser" title="PMB Moisture Analyser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}} helps you manage the moisture impacting your crops from seed to soil. This blog will discuss why moisture management in seed storage and in different soils is so important for helping your crops thrive, preventing waste, and saving money.

Understanding Seed Development

A seed begins as a zygote, which then develops into an embryo that will eventually grow and become a crop, flower, tree or bush. Some seeds contain an endosperm, which is essentially nutrient storage. To stay viable before it’s planted, the embryo draws nutrients from the endosperm. Other seeds draw nutrients from the embryonic leaves, or cotyledons. This keeps them alive while they’re waiting to be planted.

Unplanted seeds can last up to a few years, depending on the type and whether it’s stored properly. However, the longer the seed waits, the more difficult it may be to germinate as their nutrients run out.

Both endospermic and non-endospermic seeds are protected by an outer layer called the seed coat. This is what you can see with the naked eye and keeps the embryo safe until it’s time for it to grow. The seed coat isn’t completely infallible – if it were, the embryo could never breech. Poor storage and planting practices can ruin a seed’s viability.

Moisture Management in Seed Storage

Even though seeds come with their own nutrients, they can’t be left just anywhere and forgotten until growing season. They need to be stored with respect to moisture and humidity. Proper storage will be in air-tight containers in a location where the humidity levels are around 40% or below.  

For a much higher likelihood of success, we recommend testing seed moisture using our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB Moisture Analyzer" title="PMB Moisture Analyzer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}}.

Most seeds can be safely comprised of 5 – 8% moisture, though others like barley seeds can handle a bit more, around 12%. Anything above and they may begin to grow mold, fungi or attract hungry insects. They may even begin to germinate prematurely. If you want to make sure that you’re storing your seeds properly, occasionally using a moisture analyser to test the seeds can provide insight.

Testing Seeds with a Moisture Analyser

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PMB Moisture Analysers" title="PMB Moisture Analysers" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29745"}} determine moisture by measuring how much weight the sample lost before and after the drying process. This is called the loss-on-drying method.

Take between 2 – 10g worth of seeds and spread them evenly across the moisture analyser pan. For best results, it’s recommended to grind the seeds into a fine powder, but it’s not strictly required. Once the seeds have been prepared, set the heat and timer on the moisture analyser. The default setting is recommended for first use. Depending on how the sample reacts – burning, forming a skin, turning dark brown – you’ll know whether to lower the heat. Below are the settings recommended for some common seeds.

If the average moisture content for barley seeds, for example, is 12.7%, you should begin to be concerned if your results are significantly higher or lower than that. Higher signifies that the environment they’re being stored in may be too humid or let in too much moisture – such as if they’re left outside in the rain. Lower means that they may be too dry, and the seeds may be desiccating, or losing their viability. This can happen if they’re left in the hot sun for too long.

Keeping your seeds safe through moisture analysis both saves you money and increases your crop yield. The better they’re stored, the more survive until planting and the higher chance you have that enough will germinate and produce healthy crops. Otherwise, you would need to spend money purchasing replacement seeds which may get more expensive closer to season. Or, you can simply plant the ones remaining and risk a lower yield.

Soil Varieties and Moisture Requirements

Before you plant, make sure you perform research into the types of soil that will benefit your seeds the most. There are many types of soil, and each one maintains moisture differently. As some crops need more water than others to thrive, matching the right crops to the right soil in the right environment will help you increase your yield. You don’t want to waste money or effort by planting crops in unsuitable soil.

Four terms you need to understand are saturation, field capacity, permanent wilting point and available soil water. Each relates to how much water is filling the pores of your soil, or the spaces between soil particles, as well as how easy it is for the crop to draw water.

Saturation

Saturated soil means that water is filling the pores entirely. It takes little effort for plants to absorb the water. However, water in saturated soil is drained quickly before the crops can take full advantage. Therefore, not all the water in saturated soil is considered available for crops. Soils with a slow drain rate are at risk of drowning or killing plants as well.

Field Capacity

Soil at field capacity means that there’s been some drainage, so not every pore is filled with water. This is generally considered an ideal condition to grow crops.

Permanent Wilting Point

Soil that is at a permanent wilting point has little water between pores. Plants can no longer draw water from the soil, so it begins the wilting process. Even if re-watered, crops that have endured soil that dry will not recover.

Available Soil Water

Available soil water is the amount of water in the soil between the field capacity and the permanent wilting point. The soil holds enough water to prevent wilting but not enough to drain quickly, so it’s considered fully available for crops.

Though field capacity is the most ideal condition to grow crops, the most realistic goal is to provide enough water to stay at or below field capacity and above the permanent wilting point. Each type of soil has different moisture thresholds for field capacity and wilting point. Though there are many different combinations of soils, we’ll focus on the top four common types. Oklahoma State University provides statistics for the soil water thresholds:

Clay

Field Capacity: 40%

Permanent Wilting Point: 22%

Clay soil is extremely dense, which means it holds water and doesn’t drain well. Because it holds water so well, it’s quick to frost and freeze in low temperatures, and slow to rewarm in the spring. Clay soil may not be the best to use if you’re in a climate where it rains frequently.

Sand

Field Capacity: 10%

Permanent Wilting Point: 4%

Sandy soil is the opposite of clay – it’s not dense at all and doesn’t retain water. It’s slow to freeze and quick to warm up. Sandy soil may be unideal in a very dry climate, as much more water will be necessary to keep the field moist enough.

Silt

Field Capacity: 30%

Permanent Wilting Point: 6%

In terms of particle size, silt is only slightly larger than clay. It drains better than clay does while still being able to retain water.

Loam

Field Capacity: 27%

Permanent Wilting Point: 12%

A loamy soil is a combination of soils. There’s sandy loam, clay loam, etc. Loam soil in general, however, is an equal mix of sand, silt and clay. Because it’s a mix of all three, a significantly greater number of crops can thrive. The field capacity is lower than silt and clay, but the permanent wilting point is only lower than clay. It’s easier to keep crops thriving with less water, but you also need to be more consistent about keeping the soil moist.

Keep in mind that though your crops may be able to grow well in these types of soils, the soils themselves may need addendums to provide the right level of nutrients for your specific crop, such as fertilisers or compost. They’ll also need to be planted in the right season and receive adequate levels of sunlight.

Analysing Soil Moisture

When you understand the ideal moisture point for your crops, you want to be able to provide that level as often as possible. Frequent moisture analysis is an excellent way to help keep your soil between field capacity and permanent wilting point. Testing a few grams every day can give you incredible insight into how much and how often to water or irrigate your crops, especially when you’re unfamiliar with the soil you’re working with.

Let’s say you’re growing tomatoes in sandy soil. You know that sandy soil needs between 4% and 10% moisture to have enough available for the tomatoes to drink. However, you’re not sure how much water you need to use to keep it in between those levels. You decide to perform some tests with a moisture analyzer.

You water your crops as you normally might, then test the soil after giving it some time to absorb. You discover that the soil only contains 5% moisture. You now know that you need to provide more water in one go, or else you’ll be watering every hour to keep the sandy soil above wilting point. You water more, give it time to absorb, then test it again to find 8% moisture. With this level of water, your crops are safe.

You might decide to test a few hours later to see what the level of moisture is then. This can tell you how often you need to water in addition to how much. Because sandy soil drains quickly, you’ll need to water more often in a dryer climate than in a humid climate. It's better to learn how much moisture is required as early into the planting process as possible, and recheck as your crops go. This way, you're always acclimating to your crop's increased demand, and thus guarantee your yield is nice and healthy. 

For more information about how scales and balances benefit the agriculture industry, check out our blog “Scales and Balances for Agriculture” here.

Sustainability Through Water Conservation

Testing your soil with a moisture analyser helps you determine the ideal level of moisture for your crops over time. This prevents overwatering, thus conserving your water supply and saving you money on your water bill. Overwatering may cause leaching that spreads pesticides and other addendums beyond your field, which wastes those as well, since they’re no longer being used to benefit your crops. In a wider scope, leaching can harm your local ecosystem, especially if it gets into the local water supply. Overwatering also harms your crops in the long run, wasting time, effort, money and good produce that may have provided nutrients to members of your community.

From seed to soil, our PMB Moisture Analyser is an excellent tool to help you maintain your crops correctly. If you have questions, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

Whether you’re weighing dogs, cats, or hamsters, you want accurate results every time. This blog will discuss why it’s important to keep track of your pet’s weight with a vet scale as well as three tips for doing it well.

Why Should You Weigh Your Pet?

Just as people should have a complete physical once a year, your pets should get annual veterinary check-ups. As part of the process, your veterinarian will take their weight. Veterinarians weigh your pets because their weight is a strong indicator of their overall health and well-being. It also helps them properly dose medications. A heavy dog will need a greater amount of medicine than your typical lean cat.

If your pet is prone to health issues, it may be a good idea to keep a veterinary scale at home or somewhere nearby so you can weigh your pet more frequently.

Weight fluctuations are normal and depending on the animal, may even be expected. Bears, for example, hibernate during the winter, going for as long as 100 days without food or water. To prepare, they eat a ton in the fall so they can rely on their fat stores. During hibernation, they can lose between 15 and 30% of their body weight.

Domestic animals, however, don’t hibernate during the winter. If your pet were to lose 15 to 30% of its body weight over the course of three months, something may be seriously wrong. In fact, you should begin to get concerned if your pet loses or gains 10% or more of their body weight over a short period of time.

3 Tips for Ensuring Accurate Weighing Results for Pets

If you want the most accurate weighing results, you’ll need to guarantee that you’re using the right type of scale, keeping a thorough weight record and preparing your pet properly.

1.      Choose the Right Scale

You’ll need to choose an appropriate weighing scale for your pet, with the right capacity and other features that may help ease the weighing process.

The type of scale you purchase for weighing your pet largely depends on both its size and weight. Horses wouldn’t fit on anything smaller than a platform scale. Our largest is the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT platform" title="PT platform" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} with models ranging from 1000x1000mm to 1500x1500mm and capacities between 1000kg and 3000kg. 

For large dog breeds, a smaller platform scale like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus L" title="CPWplus L" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} with a 600x900mm pan size and capacities between 35kg to 300kg may be best. For large dogs that are comfortable sitting on the scale and medium-sized dogs, a floor scale may be sufficient. For cats, bunnies and small dogs, a bench scale will work the best, especially a medical scale like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="MTB" title="MTB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29742"}}. Hamsters, birds, and lizards will fit perfectly on a compact balance.

Now that you know what type of scale to go for, let’s investigate features that could help narrow down your options.

What’s Dynamic/Animal Weighing?

The weighing process will be more efficient and less stressful for both you and your pet if your scale offers a dynamic/animal weighing application. This application can take the average weight of a moving animal over a set time frame.

Your pets may not understand that it’s time for them to stand still when they’re on a weighing scale. It can be frustrating if their movements prevent an accurate weighing result. When you use the dynamic/animal weighing function, you can allow the animal to move relatively freely and still obtain an accurate weight.

Both our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK" title="GBK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29698"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK" title="GFK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29739"}} Bench and Floor Checkweighing Scales as well as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AGB and AGF Bench and Floor Scales" title="AGB and AGF Bench and Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29738"}} offer dynamic/animal weighing, which makes the weighing process easier. Our PT Platforms, when paired with our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GK" title="GK" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29969"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403" title="AE 403" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29701"}} Indicators, also include dynamic/animal weighing.

What is the Display Hold Feature?

Display hold is another feature that can make weighing animals easier, especially if the animal is likely to try and bolt off the scale as soon as they’re set down. Display hold records and holds the steadiest weight that the scale experiences on the display. You’ll be able to write down the result with time to spare, even if the animal has already stepped off.

Our AGB and AGF Bench and Floor scales offer display hold as well as our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude Compact Bench Scales" title="Latitude Compact Bench Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="MTB Digital Scale" title="MTB Digital Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29742"}}. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus series" title="CPWplus series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} offers a display hold function as well as a variety of platform sizes, so you can choose the best option for you.

With the right scale and some helpful features, you’ll be more apt to get an accurate weighing result each time.

2.      Establish a Weighing Record

Your pet’s weight may be accurately displayed on the scale, but if you don’t have anything to compare it to, does the accuracy really matter?

Sometimes sudden weight changes may be obvious from a visual perspective, such as your horse’s ribs beginning to show more prominently through their short coat. Other times, like with Samoyed dogs or angora rabbits, their long fluffy fur may help to disguise any physical changes. This is why it’s important to weigh your pet regularly (at least once a month) and establish a record.

In general, your pet’s weight should be consistent, though slight fluctuations may be expected. Once you’ve established their normal, healthy weight, you can use this information as a baseline. Should they begin losing/gaining up to or beyond 10% of their baseline body weight, you have a significant amount of evidence that you can show to your veterinarian, who is less familiar with your pet than you are.

Based on your record, the vet can more easily determine if tests are necessary and which course of treatment to pursue. Your diligent record-keeping may help to identify health issues early on before they become truly serious.

3.      Prepare Your Pet for Weighing Properly

Though a scale with display hold or dynamic/animal weighing will help you get accurate results, it’s still possible without those features if you prepare your pet properly.

First things first, if your scale has a stainless-steel pan, we recommend placing a non-slip mat down, or a blanket. Stainless steel can feel cold and be a bit slippery with fur and nails, which can put pets on edge. Make sure to Tare out the weight of the blanket from the scale so it doesn’t impact your weighing result. It’s softer on their feet and lets them get comfortable. Our MTB features a secondary pan with a non-slip mat particularly for animals that have trouble gripping on.

Small pets like mice or hamsters could fit within the draught shields of our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Core" title="Core" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29732"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland Compact Balances" title="Highland Compact Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}}, since they have a removeable and breathable top. For larger pets that tend to scurry, a Tupperware container or a storage tub could help to contain them.

If your pet is particularly food motivated, this can be an excellent motivator for staying still on the scale, even if you must place the food on the pan for them to eat while they’re being weighed.

If your pet is more comfortable being held in your arms and your scale has a high enough capacity, you could step on the scale and Tare off your weight. Then, pick up and hold your pet while you’re on the scale to see their weight.  

The goal is to keep them as still and cooperative as possible so that your weighing results aren’t struggling to adjust to movement, and you’re not growing frustrated. Record your pet’s weight in a safe location.

Common Causes of Weight Change

If you’re concerned about your pet’s significant or sudden weight gain or loss, please consult your veterinarian. However, there are a few common causes for significant weight change, and most are easily avoidable.

Too Much or Too Little Food

Please do thorough research on how much food is required for your pet. The same amount of food that may happily sustain your chihuahua (between a quarter and a half cup a day) will not sustain your German Shepherd (between three and five cups a day). If your pet isn’t getting the correct level of calories and nutrition, their weight may begin to change.

The level of exercise your pet gets also affects how much food they should be receiving. A chihuahua that goes on daily hikes will require more food than one that spends all day comfy in bed.

It’s generally understood that dogs and cats should consume between approximately 20 and 30 calories per 0.45kg of their body weight. Aim for closer to 20 if they’re not very active and closer to 30 if they get a lot of daily exercise. Horses need between 20 to 25 calories per 0.45kg of body weight, while bunnies need 25 – 30 calories per 0.45kg.

A 29kg dog that is moderately active should be consuming about 1611 calories each day (29 divided by 0.45, then mulitplied by 25 Cal). Your pet’s food should have a calorie guide listed clearly on the packaging to help with this.

If you want to keep track of your pet’s food intake, you could also use a scale to weigh their portion sizes.

Stress

If your pet’s daily routine or environment has changed, this may cause stress. Just like humans, a common response to stress is to eat less, resulting in weight loss. Luckily, this isn’t permanent, but can be resolved quicker if you develop a new routine, provide adequate stimulation, and foster a calm environment.

Dental Pain

If your pet is having dental issues, the pain caused by eating or chewing may cause them to eat less. Signs of dental pain could be a preference for eating softer foods, a resistance to having their snout/mouth touched, and bad breath. A vet is necessary in this instance to properly determine the cause and provide treatment.

Pregnancy

This one is quite clearly exclusive to female pets. If your pet isn’t spayed and has been in contact with an intact male, she may be pregnant.

Serious Medical Conditions

Though the worst-case scenario, a variety of diseases and parasites may cause concerning weight loss or gain. A few of the most frequent include hyperthyroidism, tapeworms, diabetes, cancer, or Cushing’s disease. If you suspect that your pet may be undergoing a serious medical condition, please contact your veterinarian immediately. Once diagnosed and offered treatment, continue weighing your pet to keep track of recovery.

Please note that the content provided on our blog regarding pet weighing is for informational purposes only and should not be construed as professional veterinary advice. We encourage readers to consult with their veterinarian for personalised guidance concerning their pet's health and well-being.

If you need assistance deciding which animal scale is right for you, contact us, and we’ll be happy to help.

The following is a guest blog written by Athena Addison of The Sixth Degree Media.

_____

The mining industry is the backbone of the global economy, providing essential materials for everything from construction to technology. At the heart of this sector's efficiency and profitability lies a factor that is crucial, yet often overlooked – accurate weight measurements.

For mining professionals, understanding the importance of accurate weight measurements and implementing advanced technologies and best practices in this field isn’t optional – it's a critical component of success. Precision in weight measurements throughout the mining process is fundamental for several key reasons, as we’ll explore in this blog post.

Regulatory compliance

Due to the nature of the practice, the mining industry is heavily regulated by authorities, meaning operators must adhere to strict rules concerning the amount of material that is extracted and handled. Inaccuracy can lead to non-compliance fines and, in extreme cases, can even put a mining company's licence to operate in jeopardy.

Revenue calculation

The revenue of a mining company is highly dependent on the weight of the material sold. Underestimating weight can lead to significant revenue loss over time, while overestimating can damage customer relationships and trust. Making long-term business decisions based on inaccurate information can also have negative consequences, so precision is key at every stage of the process.

Operational efficiency

Optimised load distribution ensures that machinery and transportation equipment operate within safe weight limits, which maintains efficiency, prevents equipment strain, and prolongs the lifespan of vehicles.

Enhancing operational efficiency also goes hand in hand with boosting a company’s eco credentials. The mining industry is being scrutinised more than ever for its impact on the environment and the use of unethical practices. Making the whole process more efficient through effective payload management can help to reduce waste which is one of the most important criteria of sustainability.

Challenges faced in weight measurement

Mining presents several challenges to accurate weight measurement:

Harsh environments

Mining sites are often located in extremely rough terrains with conditions that can impair the accuracy of weighing systems.

Dynamic conditions

The materials' moisture content, which can fluctuate due to environmental conditions, impacts weight and requires dynamic adjustment.

Large-scale operations

The sheer volume of material and the size of the equipment used in mining requires robust and highly sensitive weighing systems.

Solutions for accurate weight measurements

To combat these challenges, the mining industry utilises a number of different specialised weighing technologies and best practices:

Integrating industry-standard weighing equipment

Modern weighing systems, designed specifically for the mining industry, are robust, require minimal maintenance, and provide accurate measurements regardless of environmental factors. In addition, onboard truck scales can provide measurements while materials are in transit, meaning site conditions become less of a factor.

Regular calibration and maintenance

Regular upkeep and calibration of weighing instruments ensure their accuracy persists over time, despite the stresses of daily operation. AI is supporting mining companies in this area, providing real-time data to predict when maintenance may be required to reduce machinery downtime and enhance efficiency.

Data management systems

Comprehensive data systems collect and analyse weight information, providing insight into operational efficiencies and areas needing improvement.

Accurate measurements are worth their weight in gold

The need for accurate weight measurements permeates every aspect of the mining industry. It ensures compliance, profitability, and safety – all of which are vital to sustainable operations in today’s market. In an industry where precision is such an integral part of the operation, taking the guesswork out of the process is essential to making the materials’ journey from mine to market more efficient.

With new technologies constantly evolving and reshaping the mining landscape, it’s imperative that professionals in the industry stay abreast of these advancements in weight management to maintain and enhance operational efficiency.

_____

Adam industrial scales and balances are critical for complying with regulations, calculating revenue as well as operating efficiently within the mining sphere. They’re suitable for harsh environments, dynamic conditions, and large-scale operations:

       • {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LBL Heavy Duty Precision Balances" title="Luna LBL Heavy Duty Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35290"}} are ideal for weighing precious stones and metals with an impressive readability of 0.1g. The stainless-steel pan can handle rigorous use and allows for swift cleaning. Easily connect to computers and printers with convenient USB and RS-232 interfaces.

       • Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platforms with GK Indicator" title="PT Platforms with GK Indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29725"}} are built for adaptability, with capacities between 1000kg and 4500kg. A dynamic weighing application allows for the scale to take an average of weight exerted over a period to account for moving or liquid materials.

       • With outstanding capacities between 1000kg and 10,000kg, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS Crane Scales" title="IHS Crane Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}} are designed for heavy-duty weighing. With a robust metal housing and steel hook and shackle, the IHS can be relied on to weigh mining materials safely and accurately.

To view other Adam scales and balances suitable for the mining industry, head here. Should you have any questions, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

When it comes to the food & beverage production industry, cleanliness is of the utmost importance - and there's rarely room for down-time. Given that weighing ingredients - and keeping the weighing scales you use clean - can be quite messy, it's important to use a suitable scale that can withstand harsh environments and won't let you down. Enter the Adam Equipment waterproof scale.

1.     NSF Certified

The most important benefit of our waterproof scales is that they're NSF Approved! All our washdown and waterproof products meet strict standards for public health protection. You can use them when dealing with food and beverages safely.

2.     Fully Protected from Water Ingress

Waterproof scales are washdown scales, but not all washdown scales are waterproof scales. A waterproof scale is a scale that has an ingress protection (IP) rating of at least 68. This means that it’s fully protected against solids (the 6) and liquids (the 8) getting inside and messing up the hardware. You can immerse a waterproof scale with an IP68 rating in depths of water over one metre for an extended period. For more information about IP ratings, check out our blog.

Adam waterproof scales include the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua Stainless Steel Waterproof" title="Aqua Stainless Steel Waterproof" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} bench scale as well as the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator series" title="Gladiator series" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29719"}} of bench and floor scales. Both are fully equipped to handle dirty, wet, dusty, or humid environments with ease.

There’s not going to be much need to fully dunk your weighing scale in a metre’s worth of water. However, many ingredients and drinks are made of liquid and accidents happen! If there are any spillages, there’s no need to worry about the safety of your waterproof scale. Dry or wet, it will operate exactly as it was designed.

3.     Exceptionally Easy to Clean

A second benefit of waterproof scales is that when those pesky spills happen, they’re extremely easy to clean. IP68 rated waterproof scales can handle low temperature jets. If you need to take your scale out back and hose it down, your scale will be perfectly fine.

Cross contamination can also become a real issue, especially when dealing with perishables like meat, fish, or dairy. Scales used for weighing these items should be cleaned thoroughly with soap or gentle cleansers every day to maintain hygiene standards. This way, you’ll protect consumers from the threat of food poisoning or unhealthy bacteria caused by build-up on a dirty food scale.

We have seven tips for cleaning your washdown scale – you can read them in this blog.

4.     Extremely Durable Construction

We’ve established that waterproof scales are protected from water, which makes them durable right off the bat. However, our waterproof scales are all constructed from high-quality Grade 304 stainless steel, which has quite a few benefits in and of itself.

Many components of the foods and beverages we eat and drink are acidic, and could cause damage to a less durable scale over time. Grade 304 stainless steel is highly resistant to corrosion, so frequent contact with corrosive liquids will not be a hindrance to your operations.

In general, metals like mild steel or cast-iron rust easily when left in contact with liquids for too long. Stainless steel is much less susceptible to rusting. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} features stainless steel housing and pan, making it durable top to toe. The Gladiator series is constructed from our stainless steel IP68 {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403 Indicator" title="AE 403 Indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29701"}}, both of which can be purchased individually.

Such a durable metal also allows for them to hold more weight, allowing for the exceptional capacity range of 16lb/8kg to 330lb/160kg on the Gladiator and 9lb/4kg to 70lb/32kg on the Aqua ABW-S.

Along with their operational benefits, our waterproof scales also look highly professional on your benchtop. The shiny stainless steel and sleek design are sure to dress up any workspace.

5.     Able to Be Used Outdoors

Our Aqua ABW-S and Gladiator waterproof weighing scales boast rechargeable batteries. This can be an extremely helpful feature when harvesting fruits and vegetables at a farm, orchard, or vineyard. Harvesting staff can effectively organise produce by weight, which any grocery store or farmer’s market may appreciate. If every box of produce weighs about the same, or if you organise the produce from heaviest to lightest, this makes it easier to calculate prices later. 

The inherent durability of our waterproof scales, with their protection against water, dirt, and corrosion, make them perfect outdoor tools. Is it starting to rain? No need to pack up your scale. Are the potatoes a bit dirty? Get as much off as you can – dirt has weight too – but if your scale gets a bit messy in the process, no problem! Hose it off your scale when you have the chance.

6.     Multifunctional

Our waterproof scales aren’t only waterproof scales, they also offer additional applications to help make your day to day in the food & beverage industry a bit easier. Our Aqua Stainless offers checkweighing, percentage weighing and parts counting, while our Gladiator range offers those as well as check counting, dynamic/animal weighing, and a helpful Hold function.

These applications can be exceptionally helpful in the food and drink industry. Dynamic weighing and the hold function on the Gladiator can be particularly useful when dealing with cans, bottles or barrels filled with liquid. Since it’s moving around inside, you don’t want to have to wait for the liquids to settle before weighing, so the dynamic weighing feature takes an average weight to solve this issue.

Checkweighing can be used to help make sure that each completed product, such as apple pies, are within acceptable limits and not under or over filled. Parts counting can help pack bags or boxes with the same amount of product – bags of candy should have the same number of pieces in each!

Our waterproof scales feature these applications for your convenience; however, if you’re using these applications on a day-to-day basis, we recommend investing in dedicated checkweighing or counting scales. To learn more about whether you need a checkweighing scale or a part counting scale instead of a weighing scale that has these features, read the blogs linked here!

7.     Fantastic Value for Money

Waterproof scales are inherently convenient, improving operational efficiency with less effort and fuss. They look great and they have superior longevity, preventing you from needing to frequently replace your scale. A slightly higher price is worth long-lasting peace of mind. Our Aqua ABW-S comes equipped with an impressive three-year manufacturer’s warranty, while our Gladiator range offers an excellent five-year warranty! We trust our products, so can you.

Do you need help deciding on a waterproof scale? Contact us for help.

When you have a bunch of parts to count, and it’s looking overwhelming, is it better to invest in a counting scale, or a scale with a counting function? What’s the difference, and when would you choose one over the other? This blog explains what parts counting is, the difference between counting scales and scales with a counting function, and real-world applications where you might need one or the other.

What is Parts Counting?

Parts counting is an application that allows your weighing scale to calculate the number of parts that you’ve placed on the scale. To do this, the scale requires a small sample of the parts, let’s say five or ten, so it can gather an average weight of each part. Once the scale has an average weight, you can pile on parts at random, and the scale will be able to display the correct count. 

As pieces are added to the scale, it will recalculate and refine the piece weight, should the average turn out different than that provided in the sample. This is called parts counting optimisation. Of course, make sure you're not mixing different types of parts together, since the scale won't be able to determine which is which and you’ll likely have an incorrect count.

Scales with a Counting Function vs. Counting Scales

Many weighing scales offer supplemental applications such as parts counting as bonuses in addition to regular weighing. These applications are excellent for when you’re only performing parts counting occasionally, rather than every day.

For example, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Aqua ABW-S" title="Aqua ABW-S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33127"}} is an IP68-rated waterproof scale. It offers parts counting, checkweighing, and percentage counting as additional functions. However, there are few features specific to each additional function because you would use the ABW-S primarily for regular weighing in wet or dirty environments. On the rare occasions where you do need to perform parts counting with your ABW-S, the built-in application saves you from purchasing a counting scale built for the job.

A counting scale is a scale with features that help make parts counting easier and more efficient. They’re perfect if you use parts counting in your day-to-day work. Here are some of the features that would benefit you should you purchase a counting scale:

Full Numeric Keypad

Many scales with a counting function will require you to choose between a certain number you must provide as a sample size. For example, the ABW-S asks you to place five, ten, or twenty screws on the pan so it can gain the average weight. For those less experienced with parts counting, this is a great way to guide you through the process and help you out.

Counting scales will allow you to type in whatever sample size you’d like on the full numeric keypad, which provides a simple yet meaningful way to be more convenient for those who use parts counting often. In this case, frequent fliers likely already know what a decent sample size is and will place some on the pan accordingly. This also allows you to type in the average weight you’d like to use if you happen to know it already, without weighing a sample first at all.

Specialised Buttons

A counting scale will typically offer dedicated buttons on the display that will automatically bring you to certain stages of the process. For example, on the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GC Counting Indicator" title="GC Counting Indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35481"}}, you can press the Sample button to enter your sample size. Likewise with the Unit Weight button, so you could type in the unit weight without a sample. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude Compact Bench Scale" title="Latitude Compact Bench Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}} offers a simpler button system as a non-counting scale. The same button performs multiple functions, which you press in a sequence to access parts counting.

Three Display Screens

Counting scales are convenient because they boast three different display screens. The first screen is for overall weight. The second is for the average weight per piece, and the third is the official count of parts. This helps keep all the numbers distinct in your mind and makes keeping records easier. Since regular weighing doesn’t require three screens, one will be enough for most other weighing scales, with the screen switching modes when necessary.

PLU’s

Many counting scales, like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CCT Counting Scale" title="Cruiser CCT Counting Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29716"}}, offer a PLU function, or "Product Look-Up." This means that if you frequently need to count ½-inch Phillips head screws, for example, you could save the unit weight for them in the scale itself, under a numeric code you assign to that part. This saves you time, since you don’t have to gather samples and unit weights more than once. To access these PLUs, there’s also a dedicated PLU button. Checkweighing and retail scales also offer PLUs, making operation quicker and more efficient overall. To learn more about PLU’s, check out this blog.

Auxiliary Platforms

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CDT Dual Parts Counting Scale" title="Cruiser CDT Dual Parts Counting Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29673"}} can be connected to an auxiliary platform. The CDT may have the readability and capacity you desire most of the time, but when you require a higher capacity, there’s no need to purchase an entirely different scale. A weighing platform can be connected to the CDT via cable, providing you with the higher capacity you need.

If you’re always counting in large quantities, or with heavier items, not to worry. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFC Floor Counting Scales" title="GFC Floor Counting Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29713"}} are available with capacities from 75kg to 300kg.

Real-World Applications for Counting Scales

What kind of jobs would require the use of a counting scale?

Counting Scales in Manufacturing

There are multiple stages of the manufacturing process that would require the use of a counting scale. For example, when you pack boxes or containers of items. Let’s take a box of tea bags. Each box of the same flavor and brand should have the same amount of tea bags – but counting them all manually would add precious time that could be spent packing more boxes. If you provide your counting scale with a sample of tea bags, you’ll then be able to pile on bags until you get the amount required in each box. Rinse and repeat.

Assembly lines are well-oiled machines, but sometimes human error can get in the way. For example, if one step of the process is to add four screws to four corners of an item, then there better be four screws available to complete this step. If there’s a quota of products you’re trying to complete each day, a counting scale will help you make sure that there is enough of each component to meet that goal without requiring a refill before or during the process, saving you time. 

Parts Counting for Stock Taking/Inventory

In a similar vein, when it comes to the time for inventory counts at the end of the year, your counting scale will make this a breeze. Taking an accurate inventory is extremely important, as it can help you keep track of your merchandise and parts. This way, you know exactly how many you’ve used or sold, and can order more when necessary. There’s nothing worse than finding you’re out of stock of a highly requested item and may have to delay shipment.

Do you need to keep a record of how many four-count bags of 5/16-inch Zinc-plated Steel Square Nuts are stocked in your hardware shop? Instead of taking the time to count manually, let your counting scale do all the work for you. Then, when you’re done, you can store that part in the scale’s memory for recall next time you perform inventory.

Need help deciding which counting scale, or scale with a counting function, is right for you? Contact our team, we’ll be happy to help.

After months of cheering on their favorite football teams, Super Bowl LIX is finally coming to the US. The Chiefs versus the Eagles – and one team is taking home that coveted trophy.

Before and during the game, they’ll use over 100 footballs to keep things fair. How are these footballs made and how does their weight impact the game fans will watch this Sunday? Let’s explore.

How are NFL Footballs Made?

NFL footballs are all made by a dedicated team at The Wilson Sporting Goods Football Factory in Ada, Ohio. Here’s their process:

1. A tool like a cookie-cutter cuts sheets of cowhide into four almond-shaped pieces to construct each football.

2. They press the football company brand and other customised details into one of the sheets.

3. A seamstress sews cotton onto the underside of each leather piece to lend strength.

4. They sew each of the four sections together, using steam to make the leather flexible and easy to work with. The top stays open.

5. They then stuff the rubber bladder that holds the air inside the open top. They add enough air to make lacing easier.

6. Next, they sew the top closed with a thick, strong synthetic lace. (Football players line their fingers up with the lace for a better throwing grip.)

7. They fully inflate the footballs with standard air pressure.

8. They weigh each completed football on an electronic balance scale. They also measure the length and width. This quality control process helps make sure that each football is within standards.

9. Finally, they send off the approved footballs to your favorite team.

How Does the Weight of a Football Impact the Game?

The Standard

A standard NFL football must weigh between 397 and 425 grams. Most of this weight is the materials, but some of it is air pressure. Each ball has between 12.5-13.5 pounds per square inch (PSI) of pressure.

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CKT Checkweighing Scale" title="CKT Checkweighing Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} with its color changing display is ideal for determining whether the ball is within limit quickly and efficiently. Requiring a weight range for footballs helps players. This way, they know what to expect and how to handle each one, which prevents unfair advantages.

During the Super Bowl this Sunday, they’ll use at least 120 footballs. Half for one team, half for the other, and a few dedicated for kicking. They’ll likely bring even more for practice and some to keep as back-ups.

About two-and-a-half hours before kickoff, the footballs intended for game use will all examined by an official. They'll weigh, measure, check for air pressure, and pass approval, then bring them to the field.

Because they split the 120 footballs in half and give them to each team, those teams will mostly use and interact with their own side's footballs. With the exception, of course, of interceptions and fumbles. They play a new football every down.

Deflate-Gate

Many remember “deflate-gate,” back in 2015. Deflate-gate is a controversy wherein the New England Patriots’ quarterback Tom Brady was accused of cheating. Allegedly, he and the Patriots were involved in the deflation of his team’s footballs, about 140.6 grams per square centimetre below standard.

Regular NFL games use about 12 – 24 footballs per team instead of 60 or so. After an interception by the Indianapolis Colts against the Patriots in 2015, that ball was handed over to be replaced with a new one as normal.

An official noticed that the ball had lost more weight and air pressure than expected, prompting an investigation.  As the footballs had been approved about two hours before the game, the deflation would have had to have occurred in the span of time after approval and before kickoff.

Deflating footballs reduces the volume of air inside, impacting the weight of the football itself. It also makes the football more malleable, so it’s easier to grip and throw. Had the Patriots been using deflated footballs during their game against the Colts, it may have been a contributing factor for their win that day. Seeing as that win led the Patriots to the Super Bowl that year, it was especially important to rule out cheating.

However, the Patriots denied these claims, suggesting instead that external temperature changes between the approval room and the field caused the deflation.

Some sources argue that cheating is more likely since the weather would have impacted all footballs, rather than just the Patriots’. Other sources say there is a lack of proof, and we should give the team the benefit of the doubt. What do you think? Let us know in the comments.

How Else Does Weight Impact Football?

Not only does the weight of the footballs have an impact on the game, but the weight of the players themselves also matters. As you may know, there’s a lot of tackling in this game, as well as quick maneuvers and exciting sprints down the field. The size and weight of the player will have an impact on which positions they’re able to play – so if one wants to stick to their favorite position, they’d better stay consistent.

For example, most of the linebackers are heavier than the average of their team. This is because they need to act like boulders, blocking, tackling, and just being difficult to get around. If they’re light as a feather, the opponent will mow them down without issues.

Running backs are lighter, on the lower end of the average, as they need speed and agility to score touchdowns. Those gaining or losing more than they intended may experience some unforeseen consequences.

To measure their weight, professional athletes often weigh themselves on our stainless steel {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWPlus M and L" title="CPWPlus M and L" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} athlete scales, with capacities between 150kg and 300kg. Our heavy duty {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AGF Floor Scales" title="AGF Floor Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29738"}} are also popular, with capacities up to 600kg.

Whether the Chiefs or the Eagles win, we hope you tune into Super Bowl LIX – and you share your newfound knowledge of official football weight measurements with your viewing party.

Looking for a weighing scale or balance but not sure where to start? Contact our team for help.

Though people often assume “scale” and “balance” mean the same thing, the differences between the two types may impact your choice of purchase. This blog will discuss scales and balances, their differences, and which one to choose for your needs.

What is a Weighing Scale?

A weighing scale is a type of device that determines weight by measuring deflection. Mechanical scales, which don’t require electricity, operate using springs that stretch when weight is applied.

The radial dial displays the amount of force required to stretch the spring, which has been translated into kilograms. These days, though you may have a bathroom scale or kitchen scale at home, spring scales are outdated for professional purposes. Instead, digital scales with load cells have transformed the market.

Load cells are transducers that can convert the force, or weight, of an item exerted onto it into a measurable electrical output. Essentially, the load cell, constructed from aluminium or stainless steel, has an electrical current that runs through it. These metals have a certain give to them, causing the load cell to bend when weight is applied to it. The electrical current senses how much it bends, translates it, and shows it on the digital display.

So, digital scales measure deflection like a spring scale, but they’re much more durable and accurate. For example, our digital {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="IHS 10 Crane Scale" title="IHS 10 Crane Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29703"}} can measure weights up to 10,000kg – a spring must be extremely large to handle that much. It would also be incredibly dangerous if the spring broke. Meanwhile, the IHS is relatively compact.

What’s a Balance?

Balances have been around a lot longer than scales – a few thousand years longer. If you’re interested, we discuss the evolution of the laboratory balance through time in this blog. Instead of measuring deflection, balances require the application of known weight to determine your unknown weight.

An example of a modern mechanical balance is our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="TBB Triple Beam" title="TBB Triple Beam" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29708"}}. Each beam has a weight attached, which, when slid along the beam away from the pan in the correct order, eventually creates balance. Add the weight required to get there, and you have your result. The TBB is excellent for classroom use, as it’s hands-on and demonstrates the weighing process.

For professional purposes, digital balances are used the most often. With digital balances, the process of creating a force equal to your item is all internal, using a force restoration mechanism. The force restoration mechanism uses coils mounted in a magnetic field to create enough force to balance the object. The amount of force necessary is what gets displayed as the weighing result.

Should You Choose a Scale or a Balance?

All-in-all, when you’re looking for the right weighing machine for you, the choice will come down to the capacity and precision you require. Here’s how scales and balances compare in this regard:

Capacity

You’ll find that most weighing machines with capacities above a few kilograms will be scales instead of balances. Bench, floor, platform, and hanging scales are all examples of products that can handle a lot of weight.

Load cells are highly durable, and, using our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platform Scales" title="PT Platform Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} as an example, some can have more than one. The PT Platform Scale has four load cells, one at each corner. You get an accurate weight reading no matter how the item is placed on the platform. This allows the PT to have capacities between 1000kg and 10,000kg.

On the other hand, semi-micro, analytical and precision balances have significantly lower capacities. Their force restoration mechanisms must be able to create an equal amount of force against the weight of your object. This is much easier when objects are a few kilograms or less. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox EAB 125i Semi-Micro Balance" title="Equinox EAB 125i Semi-Micro Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29735"}} has a low capacity of 62g – for good reason!­­­

So, if you need a weighing machine with a high capacity, you’ll almost certainly be purchasing a scale, rather than a balance, and vice versa.

Precision

Balances are more precise and accurate than scales are, with much finer readabilities. The EAB 225i may be able to hold only 62g, but it can provide results as accurately as 0.01mg! Our least fine balances still have readabilities of 0.1g or less, with capacities as high as an impressive 22kg.

For comparison’s sake, the IHS 20a Crane Scale with 10,000kg capacity has a readability of 2kg. However, you certainly won’t be using our Equinox balances for the same purposes that you would use an IHS Crane Scale. If you’re crafting medicines, results as fine as 0.01mg are crucial – but when you’re weighing shipping crates or other large items, a 2kg readability is ideal!

The precision of balances also makes them much more sensitive than scales. Often, with such fine readabilities, simply weighing on an open pan like you can with a bench scale isn’t enough. The finer the readability, the more precautions you must take to prevent outside disturbances from affecting your results.

For example, most of our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland HCB Portable Precision Balances" title="Highland HCB Portable Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} feature a removeable drought shield. You could use the balance without a drought shield perfectly fine if there’s a normal level of disturbance happening around you (air conditioning, people walking by, etc.) but if you’re outside and it’s windy or students are stomping around the room, it’s a good idea to pop that top on.

Our Equinox, Solis and Luna Precision balances feature non-removable drought shields, because regular day-to-day air droughs may impact your results. Our Equinox, Solis and Luna Analytical Balances also feature drough shields, but they’re recommended to be used in tandem with an {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AVT Anti-Vibration Table" title="AVT Anti-Vibration Table" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/36655"}} and an {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABI-1 Ioniser" title="ABI-1 Ioniser" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32762"}}, since small vibrations and static also become a concern Meanwhile, busy and active warehouses and factories frequently use our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CKT Bench Checkweighing Scales" title="CKT Bench Checkweighing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}}.

Whether it’s balances or scales, you’re sure to get a quality weighing machine with Adam Equipment. Unsure which of our wide range of scales and balances is best for you? You can contact our team for help.

Today’s STEM students are our future, which is why it’s important for educators to have the proper top loader balance when teaching. Adam provides a range of high-quality top loader balances that are perfect for each stage of a student’s educational journey. This blog will discuss what type of top loader balance is best for your classroom, and how you can use it to enrich your lessons.  

What is a Top Loader Balance?

A top loader balance is a balance without a built-in draft shield, so the pan is easily accessible from all sides. There are many kinds of top loader balances, including mechanical triple beam balances, compact balances, and precision balances.

Triple Beam Mechanical Balances

Mechanical balances, like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="TBB Triple Beam Balances" title="TBB Triple Beam Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29708"}}, operate without electricity. The weight of an object is determined by actively moving counterweights to physically balance the item. Our TBB Triple Beam Balances have capacities from 610g to 2610g, with readabilities of 0.1g. 

Why Should You Choose the TBB for Your Classroom?

We recommend our TBB Triple Beam Balance for ages nine to fourteen. The lack of electricity or electrical parts makes using our TBB a very hands-on activity. This gives students a way to visually see and understand the balancing process as it happens. This is opposed to an electrical scale automatically performing all the work and calculations.

Despite all the moving parts, the TBB is easy to operate. This reduces the learning curve and helping them focus on why weight and mass matters. The budget-friendly TBB allows schools to purchase more units at once so fewer students need to share during lessons.

Compact Balances

Compact balances, with their lightweight design, offer portability and occupy minimal space. They frequently feature batteries, enabling operation without requiring a power plug. Our compact balances range in capacity from 100g to 30kg, with readabilities from 0.001g to 5g.

They are fantastic for quick, easy-to-understand results that don’t require sub-milligrams. Their portability allows them to be set up at different workstations or taken with students around the building as necessary. No need to be tied to precious electrical outlets!

Which Top Loader Compact Balances Do We Recommend for Your Classroom?

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Dune" title="Dune" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29721"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CB" title="CB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29736"}} compact balances are suitable from ages six all the way up to eighteen, depending on your lessons. The CB only has three buttons – including the off/on button – for extremely simple operation. With ABS plastic housing and a stainless-steel pan, the CB is durable enough to last in the hands of clumsy kids and teenagers.

For those extra cautious, our Dune Compact Balances offer the same simple interface in addition to an internal overload protection feature. If you’re nervous about your students exceeding the scale’s capacity, overload protection will give you peace of mind. Internal components will be protected – to a reasonable degree, of course.

A step ahead in terms of precision yet easy to operate, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Core Portable Compact Balances" title="Core Portable Compact Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29732"}} are an outstanding value for science classrooms. Many CQT models come with an optional draft shield. In field lessons, utilizing the Core ensures that results remain unaffected by wind. Additionally, CQTs' unique design allows them to safely stack with each other despite being larger than the CB and Dune. This is helpful for reducing space taken up when placed in supply cupboards and prep rooms.

Precision Balances

Precision balances often provide finer readability than compact balances because they intend to deliver highly precise weighing results. Unlike compact scales, precision balances offer more functions than weighing alone. For example, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LTB Precision Balances" title="Luna LTB Precision Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29743"}} boast parts counting, checkweighing, dynamic weighing, and percentage weighing applications. Our selection of top loader precision balances ranges in capacity from 2100g to 15kg, with readabilities from 0.001g to 0.1g.

What Top Loader Precision Balance is Best for Your Classroom?

When your students need precise results but still need to be able to travel, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland balances are suitable" title="Highland balances are suitable" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} for ages twelve all the way to university. Highland HCB balances offer internal calibration with patented HandiCal® technology, so you don’t have to worry about externally calibrating the scale should the results begin to drift. The HCB also boasts ShockProtect® just in case a student were to drop the balance or use a bit more force than necessary to place an item on the pan – ShockProtect significantly improves the lifespan of your machine.

Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LTB and LBB" title="Luna LTB and LBB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29743"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox ETB" title="Equinox ETB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29735"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis STB" title="Solis STB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29696"}} ranges are our best options when it comes to higher educational and professional top loader precision balances. Though they’re all similar in terms of readability, the Luna Precision offers the most diverse range of capacities should you be looking for something specific. If your lessons include research, the exceptional Solis can store up to 99 ingredients for recall later. If you value convenience above all, our top-of-the-line Equinox features a touch screen display, making it extremely easy to access and use the eleven different applications it offers.

How Can Schools Utilize a Top Loader Balance?

If you’re looking for ideas on how to incorporate a top loader balance into your lessons, we have some suggestions. Adam Equipment offers a variety of freely downloadable experiments on our Education Resources page, all using top loader balances! You can choose between experiments that involve determining molar mass, observing and measuring osmosis, chemical reactions and more.

Both classrooms and real-world jobs can utilize top loader balances for various purposes. Helping your students build a solid foundation and familiarity with these extremely helpful tools truly benefits them in the long run.

Still not sure which top loader balance is best for you? Contact us, and we’ll be happy to help.

It’s officially the holiday season! With the holidays comes an increase in consumer spending, which is good news for businesses large and small. Everyone is purchasing gifts for their loved ones as well as a plethora of groceries to prepare for parties and gatherings. Some of those gifts and groceries are priced by weight, which is why Adam’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift SWZ Price Computing Retail Scale" title="Swift SWZ Price Computing Retail Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}} is crucial for making this year a true ‘sale’-bration!

If you aren’t familiar, the Swift SWZ is a trade-approved weighing scale that’s designed to help you set prices that change with the weight of a product. Retail scales like the SWZ are commonly used in grocery stores, as well as bakeries, butcher shops, candy stores and delis. These locations see a particular rise in customers approaching Hanukkah, Christmas, and New Years, though other holidays aren’t exempt from this trend.

Why is the SWZ so perfect for your business during the holidays? Let’s look at our top five reasons.

1. Trade Approved

The SWZ is trade approved, which means that it meets the legal requirements for selling goods by weight. If you use a weighing scale without trade approval, you could face some heavy fines if you’re caught. The reason this is so heavily monitored is because trade approved scales like the SWZ are put through a more rigorous testing process to guarantee that they’re accurate. This way, you know that when customers bring up products, they’re getting exactly what they pay for, no more and no less. This ensures fairness on both sides of the transaction – you’re not accidentally giving away too much product, and your customer isn’t getting cheated.

Now, you may be wondering, if you could settle for a regular trade approved scale, why bother with one that performs price computing? The rest of these reasons won’t leave you hanging!

2. 161 PLU's

The most important benefit of our SWZ is that it will give you accurate and consistent pricing every time thanks to its superior memory bank. The Swift SWZ offers 161 PLU’s, or “price look-ups.” PLU’s allow you to take a frequently purchased item and assign it a number you can use to look it up in the scale’s database. Then, you choose what price you would like that item to be according to its weight. For example, you might decide that a ham is £3 per kilogram. Once this is set, every time a customer brings up a ham for purchase, you can punch in the PLU number, weigh the ham, and the scale will calculate exactly how much the customer should pay.

With the SWZ doing the math for you, there’s no risk of human error or miscalculations. Each customer will get exactly what they pay for, no more and no less. In addition, with an exceptional 161 PLU’s, you won’t have to pick and choose which of your by-weight products to enter in the database – there’s room for them all, so you can trust that each product is in good hands.

3. Easy to Use

Many businesses hire temporary workers over the holidays because they’re so busy. Time to train these new employees may be in short supply. Luckily, the SWZ is simple to operate. After the SWZ is loaded with all the necessary products in the database, we recommend printing a small booklet with all your PLU numbers and their associated products listed for each employee. Memorization may be expected for long-term workers, but temps need a quick and accurate reference guide.

Recalling each PLU is made exceptionally easy with the full numeric keypad and dedicated PLU button. To recall a PLU, simply press the PLU + button, and select Recall on the display. Then, use the keypad to enter in your desired PLU number, and hit Tare to enter. When you place an item on the pan, it will calculate the exact price for the customer to pay. After only five steps per product, each customer is sent on their merry way not only having paid accurate prices but having been checked out quickly and efficiently, which is crucial when you have long checkout lines.

4. Versatile

To get more bang for your buck (or should I say reindeer?), the SWZ is highly versatile. With RS-232 and USB interfaces, the SWZ can be connected to both a printer as well as software like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AdamDU Data Collection Program" title="AdamDU Data Collection Program" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}}.

Our printers can be used to provide accurate receipts to customers, listing the unit price, item weight, and price that they paid for their items. Though the printer is an optional accessory, the SWZ is designed especially to accommodate one, with a dedicated Print button.

The AdamDU Data Collection Program is a tool to keep on top of your business’s analytics. If you want to keep track of your sales, AdamDU software is an effective way to do it, thanks to its ability to capture unit weight, piece count, unit price and total price for each transaction. It can also perform real-time statistical analysis on readings, including minimum, maximum, median, mean, variance and standard deviation calculations. Want to know your sales total when the holiday rush dies down? AdamDU makes that possible.

5. Increases Customer Satisfaction

The goal for any business – besides profit – is happy, satisfied customers who want to return and spend more money. Though the SWZ itself may not draw any crowds, the benefits that it brings to businesses have direct impacts that ultimately lead to increased customer satisfaction.

Trade approval means that customers can rely on your business to be accurate and trustworthy, as well as accountable for your equipment. Its 161 PLUs and simple operation leads to workers that are performing transactions accurately and efficiently, so each customer is rung up without issues.

In addition, the SWZ features three displays on the front and rear of the scale for weight, unit price and price to pay. For pillar models, the second display is raised on top of the pillar and can be turned to face the customer. This is so both worker and customer are kept duly informed. Its ability to connect to printers allows you to provide receipts to customers for their own records, demonstrating confidence in the scale’s results. Not only that but taking advantage of AdamDU helps you analyze your business’s effectiveness, which can lay the basis for changes that improve the company overall. Customers love to see a business constantly striving to do better!   

Treat yourself this holiday season with the Swift SWZ Price Computing Retail Scale! Do you have questions about the SWZ? Contact the Adam team for assistance.

Many scales have a checkweighing function, it’s an extremely helpful tool when you know how to use it. This blog will describe what checkweighing is, the benefits of checkweighing scales, and some common applications for this exceptional feature.

What is Checkweighing?

Checkweighing is an extremely helpful weighing application. It’s used to help guarantee consistency when weighing many of the same item over time. However, consistency doesn’t always have to mean the exact same weight each time, especially when the nature of what you’re weighing makes that impossible. Checkweighing allows you to set an acceptable limit of variation. Instead of having to keep track of the margin of error yourself, you can program high and low weight parameters into your scale with the checkweighing function. Then, the scale will alert you when your sample is heavier than your upper limit, within range, or lighter than your lower limit. For even more versatility, you can decide to only set an upper or a lower limit, if one matters more than the other. To learn how to use a checkweighing scale, see our guide here.

Checkweighing can be found most frequently in bench and floor scales, though even our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis Analytical Balances" title="Solis Analytical Balances" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}} boast the option. In most scales, checkweighing is one function of many, so the system will be more pared down and ideal for occasional use. However, for those who use checkweighing on a day-to-day basis, there are checkweighing scales like our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT Bench Checkweighing Scale" title="Cruiser CKT Bench Checkweighing Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK Floor Checkweighing Scales" title="GFK Floor Checkweighing Scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29739"}} available.

Benefits of Checkweighing Scales

The choice between a regular scale and a dedicated checkweighing scale depends on your specific needs, but here are just two of the many benefits of checkweighing scales.

Convenience

Checkweighing scales are different than scales that offer a checkweighing function because the scale is designed specifically to make checkweighing tasks easier. Other functions such as accumulation or parts counting are usually still available, but they’re less obvious. For example, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="LBX Compact Bench scales" title="LBX Compact Bench scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}} have small LEDs on the side of the display that light up red, green, or yellow if the sample is above, within, or below your preset limits, as well as an audible alarm. This is perfect for short checkweighing stints, but when you’re checkweighing all day, the CKT and GFK’s large, colour-changing display provides extra convenient, at-a-glance results.

The CKT and GFK also offer full numeric keypads, with buttons dedicated to setting your high and low limits. This means that they’re quick and easy to customise, whereas a non-checkweighing scale may have fewer buttons and require a bit more manoeuvring, costing precious time.

Enhanced Productivity

This convenience will have the trickle-down effect of enhancing overall productivity. Especially when the goal is to sort items by their approximate weight, it can be a pain to pay strict attention to each individual result, and it chews up time. A colour-changing display makes this process more intuitive, since your scale pays attention for you. You don’t need to read the numbers or do any mental calculations to know that yellow equals below your limit.

Common Applications for Checkweighing and Checkweighing Scales

Food Production

Whether it’s a professional kitchen or a bakery, consistency is key. When you’re making products in bulk, 1000 pies, for example, you want to make sure that they’re all within acceptable limits. When filling each pie, checkweighing scales are helpful to make sure you’re adding not too much, and not too little. Having to make each pie exactly the same weight is very time consuming, though given the stakes, your limits might be rather narrow. Customers could become upset if their pie is stingy on the filling!

Manufacturing

Checkweighing scales can be helpful tools in any factory or warehouse, such as for shipping and receiving. One way checkweighing can help in all three is by helping keep track of inventory and stock. If, for example, you have a large box or container filled with a number of small products, weighing it every now and then with a checkweighing scale can help you recognise when it’s time to restock without counting manually. Simply set a lower limit and weigh. Once your stock weighs less than your lower limit, you know it’s time to purchase more. Parts counting is helpful in this regard as well.

Similarly, when the item you’re weighing is a barrel full of liquid like oil or gasoline, checkweighing allows you to keep track of when your supply is running low. For this purpose, a platform scale with an {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403 indicator" title="AE 403 indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29701"}}, a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="relay box and a light tower" title="relay box and a light tower" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32772"}} is best. This sounds like a lot, so we’ll go through them. Because barrels can get quite heavy, a platform scale with a larger capacity is likely necessary. The AE 403 is an IP68 rated indicator with a checkweighing function, so in the event of any spills, there’s no risk of harm. The relay box can be connected to the AE 403 and allows the checkweighing limits to trigger a voltage relay, which then drives lights, like the light tower. The light tower, with red, green and yellow indicators is our largest and most obvious option for displaying checkweighing results, perfect for chaotic manufacturing floors.

When it comes to factories, every step needs to go smoothly. Checkweighing scales help that happen, as an item that doesn’t fall within parameters can immediately be removed from the line and prevented from moving on. This helps cut down on errors and improves efficiency.

Agriculture and Farming

Checkweighing scales are excellent for the agriculture and farming industries, as they can be used for both animals as well as those tasty fruits and vegetables.

When it comes to animals and animal husbandry, checkweighing can be helpful for monitoring their growth and overall health over time. For example, let’s say the average weight for a Brahma chicken is around 10.75 lbs. It’s perfectly healthy and safe for them to get up to around 12lbs, or as low as 9lbs, so when you’re monitoring your flock’s health, these will likely be your upper and lower checkweighing limits.

This gives insight as to how you can best take care of them and maintain or improve their health. Heavier chickens may be eating too much, whereas skinny chickens may not be eating enough, or have other underlying health issues. In this case, the best checkweighing scale would be the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK Bench Checkweighing Scale" title="GBK Bench Checkweighing Scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29698"}}, as its base is stainless steel (and so easier to clean) and the indicator is set on a pillar for easy viewing.

Checkweighing is useful in the produce department particularly when packing up fruits and vegetables in their designated containers. Strawberries aren’t all identical in weight, but they’re often packaged that way. When packing a typical clamshell container of strawberries, you may decide that each container must have at least two and a quarter pounds of strawberries, but no more than two and a half pounds. As you’re packing, you can keep a close eye on the colour of the display, so you know whether you can add that last large berry or if it’s better to save it for the next container.

Once you know about the wonders of checkweighing scales, it’s easy to want one for your repertoire. Unsure about which of our checkweighing scales is right for you? Contact us for help.  

When many of us think of pottery, a scene from the movie Ghost is the first thing that comes to mind. While friendly spirits aren’t terribly useful for pottery in real life, scales and balances are useful. Let’s take a look at how weighing devices come into play when crafting pottery.

How to Make Pottery

Pottery – one of the oldest human inventions, with the earliest known vessels dating back to 18,000 BC –can be a challenging hobby for beginners and experienced potters alike. The general process of making pottery is largely the same, regardless of the different techniques for shaping it, including throwing (using a pottery wheel to shape the clay), coiling (forming coils, placing each atop of the next and shaping them until it begins to take the shape of a pot) and pinch pot (simply taking a ball of clay and hand-forming it to the desired shape).

Once you’ve chosen your clay (see below for some options), the next step is to wedge it, which is kneading the clay to eliminate air bubbles. After shaping the piece, you can enhance it with underglazes or other surface treatments and allow the piece to dry before moving onto the kiln, where it will be bisque fired and hardened. Following the addition of underglaze or glaze, the bisque pottery moves back to the kiln for its final firing, when it will be finished.

What is Pottery Made From?

Pottery is primarily made up of clay, which can be dug in its raw form from the ground, or purchased by potters in either its moist form or powdered, then rehydrated. A clay slurry called slip – which is essentially liquified clay with no fixed ratio of water and clay – can be also be used.

There are three different predominant types of pottery clay: earthenware, stoneware and kaolin. Varying compositions and amounts of metal oxides, organic materials and water define each type. Factors in choosing the type of clay include composition, workability, how porous it is, and firing temperature.

Earthenware

The most common type of clay, earthenware’s formulation contains 35 percent quartz, 25 percent kaolin, 25 percent ball clay and 15 percent feldspar. It’s highly plastic, which means it’s easily workable and sticky. When fired, its minerals composition and the type of firing determines its finale colour. Common colours include red, orange, yellow and light gray. Terracotta – Italian for “baked earth” – is a type of earthenware commonly used for making roofing tiles and flowerpots.

Stoneware

The strongest, most durable pottery clay, Stoneware’s name reflects that strength and its stone-like features. It’s comprised of coarse grains, with a formulation of approximately 30 percent feldspar and chamotte (alternatively known as grog, firesand or fireclay), 15 percent quartz and 15 percent ball clay.

Stoneware becomes extremely durable and non-porous after firing, which makes it ideal for dinnerware, kitchenware and coffee mugs. Common colours include grey, dark brown and light brownish-yellow.

Kaolin

Silica-rich kaolin is the purest of the three types of pottery clay. Kaolin changes from a pale gray when moist to light gray or nearly white when fired, leading to it also being referred to as “White Clay.”

Lacking the plasticity of earthenware or stoneware, it’s the least workable. It’s often mixed with other clays to increase its workability. For example, kaolin is mixed with a ball clay (a sedimentary clay of about 20 to 80 percent kaolinite, 10 to 25 percent mica and 6 to 65 percent quartz) to make porcelain. It’s also used in cosmetics and skincare products.

Glazing & Underglazing

Glazing and underglazing are two of the most common ways to add designs, colours and finishes to pottery.

Underglaze is a fluid made up of colourants, clay, water and a small amount of frit (silica and flux). As its name suggests, it’s used prior to glazing, before the pottery is first fired. While commonly used under transparent glazes, underglaze can also be used under light-coloured, light-hued and unsaturated glazes.

Glaze – which can be used on earthenware, stoneware and kaolin – is a glassy coating for pottery used both for decoration and to seal the piece’s porous finish to make it impermeable to liquids. The glaze provides a tougher surface, but can also form glossy or matte surface finishes, as well as change the piece’s colour.

Precision in Pottery Making

Precision is critical to pottery, at each stage from the clay to the finished piece. The most obvious example, of course, would be to ensure consistency when making multiple identical pieces, like mugs. If you weigh the clay that you are going to use to throw a piece, it’s easier and increases the likelihood that the item being thrown will end up the same size. There are many other factors that come into play, but it’s much easier to achieve consistency when you know that the clay you start with is the same.

For weighing clay, a potter wouldn’t need a scale with fine readability (maybe 0.5lb. to 1lb.) because they’re just gauging approximately how much they’ll need for a project. The size of the item being made will determine the scale you would need. For smaller projects like mugs, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="LBX" title="LBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29707"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CB" title="CB" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29736"}} or {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CBX" title="CBX" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29695"}} would be ideal. For larger items, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus" title="CPWplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} is a good choice. A company that makes or sells clay by weight would, of course, need a trade-approved scale like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK-M" title="GBK-M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33579"}}.

We’ve talked about the choice between buying moist clay and powdered clay. Moist clay costs more, so dry is more economical, but it can be challenging for beginners to formulate the correct mix. If you choose to mix your own, a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus" title="CPWplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} can help you achieve the correct ratio of dry clay and water. Once you’ve researched and chosen the method to make your clay, using a scale means that you can repeat the process for better consistent results.

Instead of ready-to-use clay, some potters prefer to mix in other materials to increase or decrease certain properties (for example, as we mentioned earlier, adding ball clays to kaolin to make it easier to work with). When mixing, it’s important to weigh the ingredients to ensure the correct recipe for an effective clay mixture.

To achieve the desired consistency for glaze and underglaze, it’s important to maintain precise ratios for formulation. Glaze recipes are mixed as a percentage that make up 100 percent. (Sometimes more than 100 percent, but the extra percentage is typically colourant and doesn’t affect the recipe.)

For weighing glaze ingredients, choose a scale with a minimum readability of 0.1g (ideally, a 0.01g readability is preferred). A good option would be a portable compact balance like {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Highland" title="Highland" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29720"}} model {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="HCB 302" title="HCB 302" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29966"}} (300g capacity). To make larger batches of glazes at a time, higher capacity scales like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna LTB 6002e" title="Luna LTB 6002e" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30368"}} may be used. Glaze ingredients can sometimes be expensive, so using the correct portions of materials will not only result in consistent glazes but can also save you money by reducing waste. In the end, pottery is partly science so controlling what you can means a better chance for success when the piece is fired.  

Any ceramics studio planning to sell its products would most likely create a website or sell through popular online marketplaces like Etsy and Amazon. When selling online, you’ll need to ship your works of art to customers throughout the world. A shipping scale like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus" title="CPWplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} is ideal to make sure that you’re not being overcharged for shipping and that you know how much your package weighs.

Before you fire up the kiln, do you have any questions about selecting the right scale or balance for making pottery? Click here to ask us!

Whether you work in construction, materials testing, agriculture or logistics, you need an industrial scale that’s durable enough to provide accurate results even in the harshest environments. This blog will help you understand your options, so you can select the best industrial scale to handle anything you might need to weigh.

Understanding Your Weighing Needs

Capacity and Readability

The industrial scale best suited for your purposes will heavily depend on how heavy the items you’re weighing are, as well as how precise your results need to be. Something to keep in mind is that the more weight an industrial scale can handle (capacity), the less fine the results will be (readability).

For example, our highest capacity industrial scale is our IHS 20a Crane Scale, which can handle up to 10,000kg. Its readability is 2kg, meaning it measures in 2kg increments. For comparison’s sake, the Equinox Semi-Micro Balance designed for laboratories has a capacity of 62 grams, with a readability of 0.01mg.

The best way to decide your capacity requirements is to consider the absolute heaviest item you could expect to weigh regularly and aim for an industrial scale that can handle slightly more than that. This prevents the danger of overloads, which can damage your scale.  Unfortunately, the same scale you use to weigh your average cruise ship propeller will not be precise enough when you’re weighing screws during inventory (the average cruise ship propeller is 10,000kg – exactly the capacity of our IHS!). Therefore, you may need a few different scales ranging in capacity, so you can be guaranteed the appropriate precision when necessary.

Your Working Environment

The environment is also important, as the conditions your scale will be subjected to will determine the material and type of scale you may need. For example, if your working environment is frequently dusty or dirty and the items you’re weighing will be too, a washdown or waterproof scale will make your life easier. Grime can build up and affect your weighing results over time, so being able to hose down your scale to clean it quickly and easily is a huge time saver.  

You legally need a trade approved scale if you sell items based on their weight – such as bags of concrete priced by the pound. Trade approval is a legal certification that signifies your weighing results are accurate, so customers can trust that they’re getting the full 90kg of concrete they paid for, rather than 85kg. This also helps your business, since you know that you’re giving exactly 90kg instead of 95kg, for example, preventing a loss of profit.   

Luckily, most variations of weighing scales – bench, floor, etc. – have some washdown or trade approved options. Want both? See the Gladiator Approved.

Types of Industrial Weighing Scales

Some scales are more appropriate than others for certain purposes. Let’s start from the bottom of the capacity range and work our way up, discussing the applications each type of scale is most suitable for.  

Bench Scale

Bench scales are your best bet when you need durability as well as high precision. They’re arguably the most versatile scale, as they’re compact enough to take up very little bench space and often come equipped with a rechargeable battery to make them portable. Adam offers bench scales with capacities ranging as low as 2kg to as high as 200kg, with readabilities between 0.05g and 0.05kg to give you the greatest chance of finding your best fit. Our CDT Dual Counting Scales are even more adaptable, as they can be connected to a higher capacity base, allowing you the precision necessary for small counts with the durability necessary for larger counts.

Our Aqua ABW-S Stainless Steel Bench Scale is a popular choice for industrial applications, thanks to its impressive IP68 rating. The Aqua ABW-S is fully dust and waterproof, allowing it to be washed down when it gets dirty. If you require a bench scale for a specific application, our Cruiser series offers the CKT Bench Checkweighing Scale and CCT Bench Counting Scale, both specially designed to meet your needs. Specialized scales like these are helpful when it comes to repetitive weighing tasks as well as counting products during inventory and stock control.

Floor Scale

Floor scales offer bigger weighing pans for larger and heavier items. They’re typically less portable than bench scales simply because of their size, though many may still boast a rechargeable battery or wheels to help facilitate movement. We stock floor scales with capacities between 35kg and 600kg, with readabilities between 0.01kg and 0.05kg. Each feature a stainless-steel weighing pan for ultimate durability.

Just because they’re bigger doesn’t mean their uses are diminished – floor scales are specialized according to their indicator. For example, the BKT and BCT label printing scales are constructed by combining a stainless steel base with the AE 503 and AE 504 indicators. Meanwhile, the Gladiator range features the IP68 rated AE 403 indicator, now with a trade approved option for applications where a selling price is based on weight.

Platform Scale

We offer a range of heavy duty and robust platform scales, ideal for weighing large and bulky items. They’re large, usually rectangular or square, and take up a significant amount of floor space. Whether it’s boxes, shipping crates, pallets or other oversized objects, a platform scale can handle them with ease. Our options range in capacity from 35kg to 4,500kg.

Our PT Platforms are extremely popular for industrial applications, as they’re rugged and durable as well as affordable. PT Platforms can be purchased on their own, or as a package deal with GK indicators. Accessories like ramps can be purchased for ease of loading and unloading items. However, if hand trucks are your most common method of loading and unloading, ramps are built in to our PTM Drum Platforms.  

Generally, where you place the platform scale is where it will stay, so guarantee that you have a clear space dedicated to weighing. If you find that you only occasionally need a platform scale and can’t justify saving the space for one, our AELP Pallet Beams may be ideal for you. They can be spread to accommodate almost any size package or pallet and then be packed up until next use.

Pallet Truck Scale

When you weigh pallets frequently (such as in shipping and receiving) and want to be as efficient as possible, a pallet truck scale like our PTSplus or PTT is ideal. The PTSplus features an AE 403 indicator for dustier environments, while the PTT utilizes a label printing indicator, to help keep track of how much each pallet weighs.

These scales allow you to weigh and travel simultaneously. Simply load a pallet onto the scale and lift it up to get a weight, then roll it to the pallet’s ultimate destination. Our pallet truck scales have capacities of 2000kg, with readabilities of 0.5kg. These scales are most useful when they’re on a smooth floor. Bumpy or rugged outdoor terrain may cause errors in your results.

Crane Scale

A crane scale, or hanging scale, operates by hooking on to an item or its container and weighing it in the air. Crane scales are perfect when your item is an abnormal shape or size and can’t be weighed properly resting on a regular platform scale – like that cruise ship propeller. It doesn’t necessarily have to suspend from a crane: gantries are suitable options as long as they’re strong enough. 

Another benefit of crane scales is that they only take up room when they’re weighing – otherwise, the space underneath the crane or gantry is free for other use, and the compact crane scale can be stored away until next time.

They’re also extremely safe, since all our crane scales come with a remote control for operation in the air. No need to risk climbing on anything to press the Tare button when you can hit it from a safe distance away! With other types of scales, the orientation of the item you’re weighing matters, though the swivel hook of our crane scales allows loading from the most convenient direction for you.

We offer three crane scales of various capacities, ranging from 50kg to 10,000kg.

Now that you’re properly informed on the different types of industrial scales and their uses, you can choose the right one with confidence. Still unsure? You can contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

Sample preparation is no simple business when it comes to laboratory weighing. This blog will discuss why proper sample preparation is so important, then provide five tips for getting the job done right.

The Importance of Proper Sample Preparation

It’s easy to think that your balance is solely responsible for providing the best, most accurate and precise results possible. While that’s true to an extent, how accurate the balance is also depends on the way your samples are prepared. Let’s say you need to find the cumulative weight of four apples to obtain an average. If one of those four apples is an orange, it’s not the balance’s fault! The balance only makes the best of what it’s given to work with.

Laboratory weighing is much higher stakes than apples and oranges. In the pharmaceutical industry, for example, formulating medicine requires extremely precise results. In cases like these, thorough sample preparation is crucial. Proper samples help maintain traceability, allowing verification at every level of the process. If your results are verifiable, the credibility of your operation is guaranteed. Traceability is one way to comply with GLP regulations.

Tip 1: Understanding the Weighing Equipment

How you prepare your sample really depends on what kind of balance you’re using.

Precision Balances

Precision balances like our Luna or Solis have larger capacities and less fine readabilities. They’re ideal for weighing larger samples that do not require weights measured past the thousandths.    

Analytical and Semi-Micro Balances

Analytical balances such as our Equinox Analytical offer lower capacities with finer readabilities, while our Equinox and Solis Semi-Micro Balances offer very low capacities with extremely fine readabilities. Your sample size must be significantly smaller than if you were working with a precision balance. Due to their high degree of accuracy and precision, the environment comes more heavily into play. Tip 4 will go further into detail.

Moisture Analysers

Our PMB Moisture Analyser requires different sample preparation than regular weighing balances. To measure moisture, the sample must be ground as fine as possible, and spread evenly. For samples that can’t be ground, such as liquids or gooey foods like cheese, it may help to mix the sample with 100% moisture-free sand (after taring the sand, of course) so that the sample doesn’t splatter or boil. Make sure you know your material! The PMB’s capacities range from 50g to 200g. Ironically, the larger the sample size, the more accurate the result will be. To learn more, read our Sample Preparation for Moisture Analysis.

Tip 2: Proper Handling and Storage of Samples

Maintaining quality and integrity of samples is of the utmost importance. How you handle and store your sample depends heavily on the type you’re working with. Many samples have specific temperature requirements. Organic material like DNA or bacteria should be kept either refrigerated or frozen, while powders may tolerate ambient temperatures. The temperature the sample is when you weigh it can have an influence on the results, therefore, you must be consistent between samples. If one DNA sample is frozen when it’s weighed and one is room temperature, especially sensitive balances like our semi-micro may pick up on the difference. Not to mention, if your sample is a significantly different temperature than the weighing chamber, it can create air currents that can influence your results.

During the weighing process, it’s generally a good idea to weigh your sample in a container of some kind, instead of placing it directly on the pan. Not being able to recover all the sample from the pan afterwards is too high of a risk. An appropriate container can be tared and is unlikely to affect results. When transporting the sample, tweezers are recommended to place the item on and off the pan. This prevents cross contamination.   

Tip 3: Sample Homogenisation and Size Reduction

Sample homogenisation is also very important. Going back to the three apples and one orange example, the reason it wouldn’t be an effective weighing session is because the overall sample isn’t homogenous. Your sample should be completely "pure," without any disruptions or outliers. This guarantees that your sample represents the whole, reducing errors. Size reduction may involve taking parts from a whole to make the sample easier to weigh. A watermelon is too big for an analytical balance, but a cube from one isn’t!

Tip 4: Minimising Environmental Influences

The quality of your sample is just as crucial as weighing in the right environment and taking the right precautions. Vibrations, static, draughts, and temperatures in the environment will try their best to make your very sensitive balance go haywire. Draughts, luckily, are mitigated by the addition of draught shields over most analytical and semi-micro balances, as well as many precision balances. Balances may be protected from vibrations with accessories such as our Anti-Vibration Table, and static by our ABI-1 ionizer. Your results should be consistent and reproducible. Using these accessories makes that possible.

Tip 5: Recording and Documenting Sample Information

If you don’t have a record of it, did it really happen? In the laboratory world where data and GLP guidelines are everything, the answer is a resounding no. Manual record keeping can be subject to human error – one small tpyo or sloppy handwriting can have a butterfly effect. The best way to keep thorough records is by using Adam DU software, which automatically performs statistical analysis for multiple scales at once, not only keeping records but spinning them into workable data as well.

Without proper sample preparation, your weighing results won’t give you the information you’re intending to get. Give your balance a hand and follow these five tips to make sure it has the best shot. For more information or questions about which balance is right for you, contact us.

Laboratories have come to rely on scales and balances for a variety of purposes, such as formulating medicines and performing quality control. However, the highly accurate and precise semi-micro, analytical and precision balances we use for laboratory work weren’t always around. What did we use back then? This blog will discuss how humanity’s very first balances evolved into what we know today.

Egypt Invents the Balance

There’s evidence to support that the first balance was used in ancient Egypt, at least as far back as 2600 BC. Unfortunately, no balances from this time have survived. We know what they look like and how they operated from depictions in Egyptian murals, as well as the rudimentary “test weights” that were recovered.

These balances were center beam balances, with two plates attached to an overhead beam, then attached to a central pole. Reference weights, usually stone or another such material, were placed on one plate, and the weighing sample placed on another. When the plates were equal, the general weight of the sample would be known.

It's estimated that utilizing balances was a widespread practice in Ancient Egypt, as the ingenious invention was even integrated into their religious beliefs. Egyptians believed that when you died, your heart was weighed against a feather. Only if your heart was equally as light as the feather may you pass into the afterlife. The intention was to judge the quality of a person’s character and encourage good deeds throughout life. Even today, a beam balance represents truth and is often depicted in courthouses and other judicial locations held by a statue we call “Lady Justice.”   

Mechanical Balances

Moving quickly through thousands of years of history (this isn’t a textbook!) the next big developments in mass measurement were spring and beam mechanical scales. Spring scales were invented in 1770. Instead of using known weights to balance an unknown weight like center beam balances, spring scales utilize gravity and measure the force required to stretch or compress a spring. The result is typically displayed vertically, like a thermometer, though it’s often displayed radially like a clock. The heavier the weight, the longer the spring extends­­, and the space created by the stretch is measured in grams or newtons. This type of scale is still widely available today but isn’t considered accurate or precise enough for laboratory use – however, you may have one in your kitchen!

Beam balances are more widely available and generally considered more accurate. Like the center beam, beam balances operate by comparing known weights with unknown weights. Our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="TBB Triple Beam Balance" title="TBB Triple Beam Balance" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29708"}} is an example. The TBB has three beams, with weights attached to each. One beam measures single grams up to ten, the second measures every 100 grams up to 500, and the third measures every ten grams up to 100. This can vary depending on the scale’s capacity. An item is placed on the pan and the weights are slid, heaviest to lightest, until the pointer is level with a mark on the other side of the balance. The numbers that the weights have slid to are added up, and that’s the weight of your sample. Nowadays, triple beam balances are more suited for science classrooms than professional laboratories, as they’re simple to operate and helpful for hands-on teaching about mass.

Electrical and Digital Scales and Balances

Mechanical scales are called such because they don’t require electricity or batteries to operate, as opposed to our modern electrical and digital scales that are the most widespread today. Digital scales were invented sometime around 1965 and are extremely versatile – really, there’s a digital scale for almost any application, many of which are discussed in other blogs of ours, such as What Are Weighing Scales Used For?

The most common weighing instruments for laboratories are precision, analytical and semi-micro balances. Analytical balances operate by way of force restoration, while precision balances may operate through either force restoration or with the use of load cells. Force restoration determines an unknown mass by balancing the force of the weight with another force created by a system of coils mounted in a magnetic field. Essentially, force restoration measures force the way our beam balances do, without any of the work on your part!

Load cells are transducers that convert force (weight) exerted onto it into measurable electrical output. To put it simply, when a weight is applied to a balance, the load cell located under the weighing pan bends, and the amount of force it takes to bend the load cell is converted to the result you get on the display. This method is similar to a spring scale!

Adam Equipment {{widget type="Magento\Cms\Block\Widget\Page\Link" anchor_text="precision balances" title="precision balances" template="widget/link/link_inline.phtml" page_id="159"}} have capacities ranging from 120g to 22,000g, with readabilities from 0.001g to 0.1g. Our {{widget type="Magento\Cms\Block\Widget\Page\Link" anchor_text="analytical balances" title="analytical balances" template="widget/link/link_inline.phtml" page_id="158"}} have capacities from 80g to 510g, with readabilities from 0.1mg to 0.0001g – significantly more precise and accurate. Finally, our {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox" title="Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}} semi-micro balances have capacities from 62g to 82g, and readabilities from 0.01mg to 0.1mg. 

Laboratories don’t only benefit from exceptional precision and accuracy – lab scales also offer additional applications, such as formulation, parts counting, checkweighing and dynamic weighing. In the times of beam or spring balances, these extra calculations would have to be done manually. Now, you save time, money, and effort when using one of our Equinox, Luna or Solis balances.

Extraordinary scientific research and developments have come about thanks to scales and balances used in laboratories – yes, even before they became as accurate as the ones we use now. Imagine what will come!

For questions on which lab balance is right for you, contact us, we’re here to help.

It’s back-to-school time for much of the world. For science teachers and their students, this means the start of a new year of exploration and hands-on learning about key concepts like mass and weight.  

Why Use Balances in the Classroom? 

When studying the physical sciences – the study of inanimate natural objects, including physics, chemistry and geology – one of the first, most basic things you’d need to know is the object’s mass or weight. (While often used interchangeably, mass and weight aren’t quite the same. The key difference is that mass does not change, while weight is dependent on gravity. So while an astronaut’s mass on Earth would be the same as their mass on the moon, their weight would change since the moon’s gravitational pull is about one-sixth that of Earth’s.) 

In the classroom, students typically learn the basics of weighing, including the different weighing units, how to use a scale or balance and how to record the results. An accurate balance ensures reliable data and promotes the development of skills like analysis and critical thinking, which are important when students learn to draw conclusions from their experiments and support their findings with evidence. 

Getting to the Core of a Good Science Lesson 

We’ve previously provided an Introduction to Education Scales and Balances in our blog. In this post, we’ll take a closer look at one of our most popular compact balances for the classroom. 

Our Core® CQT portable compact balance is a staple school science classrooms. Why is it so popular? 

Simple to use, simple to understand. With just four buttons (On/Off, Unit and dual Tare buttons to accommodate left- or right-hand users), children can quickly learn to operate Core and read its display. Core can also be powered by either AC or, to avoid cords getting tangled, by battery. 

In addition to teaching younger students basic weighing concepts, an included weigh-below hook facilitates lessons on density and specific gravity. For more about density, check out our blog post, How to Calculate Density Using a Balance.  

For free teacher resources – including science lessons using balances designed for Adam Equipment by science educators – visit our education resources page. 

Durability. Let’s face it – when working with kids, mistakes happen. Things can get knocked off a table, banged up or worse. Core was built to stand up to industrial use, so it can handle most anything young students can throw at it. (Hopefully not literally, but Core’s ShockProtect® feature can help guard against shock loading and accidental overloading.) 

Easy to store. Classroom space is often at a premium. To help, the easily portable Core is stackable. 

How Can Core Enhance Science Education? 

Schools most often use compact balances and mechanical scales in science classrooms, while higher education (university-level) may use precision balances and analytical balances. Compact balances like Core lack complicated setup or operation procedures that would take too much time during class or be too complex for students just learning the basics. Whether measuring liquids, solids, or even live organisms, Core provides the reliability needed for effective science lessons. 

Science experiments aren’t limited to a single location. The easily portable Core allows educators and students to take their investigations beyond the classroom – whether it's in the classroom, the schoolyard or even field trips. 

Core weighs in multiple units (g, kg, lb, oz, N, GN, ct, dr and tl.T), which provides some overlap with other classes, such as math, where students can be taught measurement conversions (such as between metric and imperial units, or converting pounds to pounds and ounces. 

For more information about Adam Equipment’s commitment to the education, visit our education industry page, where you’ll learn about which products are best suited to each grade level and find links to helpful resources. 

Need assistance choosing a balance for your science classroom? Call an Adam professional at (203) 790-4774 or email education@adamequipment.com.  

During the harvest season, farmers markets have an array of fresh produce, from crisp peppers to fat pumpkins perfect for pie. Weighing scales are typically used to determine the price of produce at farmers markets to keep each transaction fair. Therefore, having an accurate and reliable weighing scale is crucial. This blog will examine the top five ways the EC trade-approved AZextra Price-Computing Retail Scale benefits farmers markets and helps them thrive.

1.   Accurate Weighing and Pricing for Fresh Produce

Legally, when you price an item according to its weight, you must use a trade-approved scale. There are many kinds of trade-approved scales suitable for different purposes. The AZextra is a highly accurate EC trade-approved weighing scale specifically designed with price computing capabilities, perfect for a farmers market.

With AZextra, there’s no need for manual price calculations, the process is automatic! Place the customer’s produce on the pan and enter the PLU number that you’ve assigned to the specific product. The proper price will display almost instantly. Reduce the risk of errors that result from manually performing the math yourself with AZextra.

2.   PLUs Promote Efficiency and Save Time

Imagine that it’s peak harvest season and your farmers market is filled with customers eagerly filling their baskets with fresh produce. In a case like this, you want your check-out process to be as quick and efficient as possible. AZextra’s 103 PLUs help streamline each transaction so you’re on to the next person in line in no time.

PLU stands for Price Look-Up, and they’re essentially a scale’s memory bank. You can store the unit price per specific unit of weight of your best-selling products by assigning them a PLU number. Let’s say a customer comes up to the scale to purchase five juicy red apples. All you need to do is type in the PLU number that you’ve assigned to apples, which will be between 1 and 103. That number will recall that apples are $1.29 per pound, so when you place all five apples on the scale, it will automatically be able to calculate an exact total for the customer to pay.

With the AZextra, you’ll be able to handle more customers in less time, with less stress.

3.   Ensures Transparent Transactions

Building a relationship with customers is extremely important if you want to form a loyal clientele and keep them returning to your farmers market year after year. One way to keep them coming back is by being as transparent and honest as possible. With three displays on both the front and rear of the scale, the AZextra allows both you and the customer to see the unit price, weight, and price to pay. Should any mistakes or discrepancies occur, two people are aware of the issue and can work on a solution.

4.   Easily Portable

Most farmers markets take place in the great outdoors, and electricity may not always be readily available. AZextra is a portable retail scale, with a rechargeable battery that offers hours of service before a recharge. If necessary, the AZextra can travel with you, whether it’s to a whole new location or just across the market. Flexibility is highly convenient when the farmers market is mobile, or electricity is scarce. The show must go on!

5.   Connects to Printers and PCs

Our AZextra Price Computing Retail Scale can easily connect to a printer or PC. Printers like the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AIP Impact Printer" title="AIP Impact Printer" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/32749"}} allow you to print receipts that you can provide a customer. You can also print a copy to keep for your own records. To do this, you would need to set up your preferred parameters on the included software. For example, with the ATP formatting option, you can choose to include several types of information. This includes the date, user ID, scale ID, time, PLU number, net weight, tare weight, gross weight, unit price and total. Wow! Then, hit Print. Record keeping has never been easier!

Want to make some changes to your business model but don’t know where to start? Connecting the AZextra to programs such as {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Adam DU" title="Adam DU" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33029"}} via the RS-232 interface helps you really dig into the numbers. Adam DU can collect data and place it in graphs, as well as perform mathematical statistical analysis. The AZextra and Adam DU duo can’t be beat. You’ll be able to compare data across time, determining your best and worst-selling products, your busiest time of day, or even month. Any decisions you make will be backed by data. This means you’ll know you’re making the right moves to secure a profit for your farmers market.

Utilizing the AZextra Price Computing Retail Scale will benefit your farmers market tremendously, so make the swift decision to get a quote today. If you have any questions or would like more information, contact us and we’ll be happy to help!

When it comes to research, few things are as important as accuracy, including accuracy in data reporting, accuracy in methodology and certainly accuracy in weighing and other measurements. Reliable, reproducible weighing results are critical for scientists. In this blog, we’ll take a look at the critical role the accuracy of lab balances plays in scientific research.

What is Accuracy and Why is it Important?

First, let’s define accuracy as it applies to weighing scales and balances. In our glossary, we define it as the “ability to display a value that matches the ideal value for a known weight.” Put more simply, it’s how close the measured value is to the actual value.

Though they’re related, accuracy and precision are sometimes confused, despite being quite different. Your analytical balance, for example, can be precise to a degree of 0.0001g, but if the reading isn’t accurate (perhaps the balance needs to be calibrated) then the precision won’t matter.

If the weighing result contains even minor errors, the validity of an entire experiment can be called into question at best, or completely invalidated at worst. Experiments are performed by multiple scientists and if errors creep in, that can impact the reproducibility of the results, as well as resulting in loss of time and money (reagents can be expensive).

How Do You Know Your Balance is Accurate?

To be sure your balance is accurate, you need to perform a calibration and verification. The process involves comparing weighing results from your device with the weights of a calibration weight to see how closely they match.

There are two kinds of calibration (external calibration, which uses calibration weights purchased separately, and internal calibration, which features calibration weights built into the weighing device for calibration at the touch of a button) and Adam Equipment offers balances with both options, as well as calibration weights for users to perform an external calibration.

     (1) Purchase calibration weights with known, traceable values. Your weights should cover the range of measurements that your balance is designed to handle.

     (2) Make sure your balance is clean, free of debris and level.

     (3) Zero out your balance, then weigh a standard calibration weight several time and record the results.

     (4) Determine the average reading by adding your results and dividing by the number of readings.

     (5) Compare the average to the standard weight. The closer your average is to the standard reading, the more accurate your balance.

     (6) To determine your balance’s percentage of accuracy, use the formula Accuracy (%) = (Measured Value / Standard Value) * 100. For example, if the average reading from your balance for a standard weight of 100 grams is 99 grams, the accuracy would be Accuracy (%) = (99 / 100) * 100 = 99%

     (7) Compare your balance’s accuracy to industry standards for your application.

     (8) If the accuracy isn’t acceptable for your needs, the balance may need to be calibrated or adjusted. Consult your user manual or the balance’s manufacturer for guidance.

     (9) Repeat the process at regular intervals. Repeat more often if your device is subject to heavy use or environmental factors that may affect its accuracy.

Accuracy Vs. Standard Deviation

While accuracy and standard deviation are two distinct concepts, they’re very much tied together. While accuracy is defined as how close a balance’s weighing result is to the actual value, standard deviation provides the range of measurements when weighing the mean (actual) value.

A low standard deviation means that the measurements are very close to the mean value, providing higher precision. A high standard deviation indicates a greater variability in the weighing results, which can result in lower precision.

In our blog Why Balance Testing is Important, we discuss how to calculate your balance’s standard deviation.

How are Lab Balances Used in Research?

A wide variety of scientific disciplines – including chemistry, biology, physics, and pharmaceuticals – rely on lab balances during a wide range of tasks and applications:

     - Sample preparation, such as weighing reagents, compounds and solutions

     - Analytical techniques like titrations and chromatography require precise weighing results to determine sample concentrations or purity

     - Formulation & Quality Control for pharmaceutical research, ensuring accurate dosing and compliance with regulatory standards

     - Environmental studies, including weigh water and soil samples to determine ecosystem health and monitor pollutants (see our blog on "How Laboratory Balances are Used in Environmental Sciences")

Barriers to Weighing Accuracy in Labs

What kinds of issues can impact the accuracy of weighing results in labs? Calibration, for one, as we discussed above. Regular calibration with certified calibration weights helps to ensure the accuracy of the results.

Semi-micro and analytical balances are extremely sensitive to conditions like vibrations, temperature, humidity and air currents. Many {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Solis" title="Solis" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29726"}}, {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Equinox" title="Equinox" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29741"}} and {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna" title="Luna" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} models are equipped with a draft shield to prevent air currents from affecting readings.

Adam also offers the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AVT anti-vibration table" title="AVT anti-vibration table" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/35494"}} for semi-micro and analytical balances which provides a solid, stable surface for decreasing interference from such seemingly-slight vibrations such as people walking on the floor nearby or a building’s HVAC system.

To help ensure continued accuracy of weighing results, read our blog post, "Why Balance Testing is Important."

Questions about accuracy or need assistance in choosing the right lab balance? Reach out to us with your questions and we’ll be happy to help!

Whether it’s boxes being loaded onto a delivery truck, suitcases being squeezed into the cargo hold of a passenger plane or shipping containers being stacked carefully on a vessel, weight is a critical factor. The weight of cargo in any form of transportation has significant impacts on the safety, efficiency and sustainability of each trip. The best way to achieve a safe and sustainable truck load is properly balancing the cargo, which is achievable with the use of weighing scales.

What is a Balanced Load?

You can achieve a safe, balanced truck load by organising cargo so that the weight is distributed evenly throughout the vehicle. No one side or area should be heavier than another. Make sure to include the weight of the vehicle itself, in addition to the weight of any passengers while organising. This way, you can determine the proper centre of gravity (where most of the vehicle’s weight is stored) and concentrate the heaviest items there.

Common Mistakes Leading to Unbalanced Loads

Three mistakes can cause an unbalanced load. The first is having a load that exceeds the weight capacity of the vehicle in general, no matter how evenly distributed. The second is having a load that may be under the weight capacity, but the heaviest items are arranged in a way that disrupts the centre of gravity. For example, the centre of gravity on the typical truck is towards the middle. The heaviest items should be loaded into the middle of the truck, with lighter items surrounding it.

The third mistake is properly arranging the cargo, so it’s distributed evenly and is well balanced, but failing to secure the load. Should the cargo slide, such as if a cargo ship hits a large wave during a storm, operators may not be able to fix it in time and it could have dangerous consequences.

Why Does Load Balance Matter?

There are a multitude of potential consequences that could occur with an unbalanced load. Have you ever seen someone try to get on a canoe, lean over too far and end up in the water? Without optimised cargo placement, quick turns or stops can result in a tipped over truck and a sinking ship. Best case scenario, you’ll just end up spending a lot of money to repair or replace your vehicle as well as replacing the cargo. Worst case scenario, bystanders and operators suffer injuries.

Those are more obvious and immediate consequences of unbalanced loads. There are also some that become increasingly serious over time, such as the environmental impact.

Increased Fuel Consumption and Elevated Emissions

The heavier the load, the harder the engine of the vehicle must work to compensate and propel itself forward. You’ll find yourself stopping to refuel more frequently as it burns faster. Burned fuel contributes carbon dioxide (CO2) into the air, via exhaust. CO2, along with a variety of other pollutants, is classified as a greenhouse gas. Greenhouse gases keep heat from escaping our atmosphere, warming the planet and causing many serious issues.

According to the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the transportation sector was responsible for 28% of total U.S. Greenhouse Gas Emissions in 2021, beating out the agriculture, commercial & residential, industry and electric power economic sectors. Within the transportation sector, more than 90% of the greenhouse gas emissions are a result of burned gasoline and diesel fuel.

Increased Waste

Unbalanced trucks or ships are more likely to crash, sink, or become damaged. Damaged cargo written off as trash often ends up in landfills. On the bright side, when a truck crashes, there is the potential to gather and correctly dispose of or recycle the damaged goods because they’re relatively easy to access. In the case of an unbalanced shipping vessel, the cargo may end up at the bottom of the ocean.

According to the World Shipping Council, an average of 1,566 containers are lost at sea each year. This may seem minimal but adds up over time, with approximately 15,660 lost over the last ten years. Unsecured containers often fall into the ocean due to rough waters. Depending on how deep the water is, recovery is expensive or even impossible. Most companies prefer to absorb the loss or write it off, resulting in thousands of sunken shipping containers littering our oceans and impacting ecosystems.  

When it comes to damaged vehicles carrying oil or chemicals, toxins that remain after cleanup leach into the water system and soil. This causes a hazard to plants, animals and people. Safe loading prevents this from happening!

Infrastructure and Vehicle Damage

Has your town ever repaved a particularly damaged road, and it’s broken and bumpy again within the year? When unbalanced trucks and cars drive over these roads, they contribute to wear and tear more than balanced trucks. This is because unbalanced loads stress certain areas of the truck, applying more pressure to the road, wearing it down unevenly. As a result, your town repaves those roads more often. The repair process then adds more CO2 to the atmosphere, creating a cycle of environmental impact!

This issue has gotten so prevalent that many U.S. states, like Arizona, Michigan, Connecticut and Washingon, have placed weight limits for trucks travelling in and out. Weigh stations have been installed on main roads entering these states to guarantee that trucks are below the limit, which may vary depending on the number of axles.

Not only do the roads experience an increased rate of wear and tear, but the truck itself does as well.  You’ll find that unevenly packed trucks will require brake, tire and wheel replacements more often. Just as the road is experiencing more pressure, so is your main piece of equipment!

Safe truck loads mean less stops for fuel, reducing CO2 emissions, limited waste enters our landfills, and our roads stay smooth for longer.

The Role of Weighing Scales in Arranging Safe Truck Loads

Weight distribution is extremely important, so weighing scales play a key role in balancing truck loads by supplying highly accurate results. Why does this matter?

Consider a situation where someone asks you to transport what you believe to be a 15-kilogram box from one end of a warehouse to the other. You reasonably expect to be able to carry that weight yourself without any assistance or preparation. Well, it turns out that this 15-kilogram box is 30 kilograms, and carrying it is much more difficult than you expected. Accurate weight measurements allow you to properly prepare and take precautions. In this situation, you could have brought a hand truck to transport the box instead of carrying it yourself.

Accurate weight measurements therefore help prevent capacity overload. You would be fully aware of the weight of each item being boarded and can pack the vehicle accordingly. It also helps to balance the load, as you’ll know which packages are the heaviest. You can then place them in the most optimised location on the vehicle.

Which Scales are Used for the Job?

Corporations and businesses regularly oversee pallet shipments. In this case a pallet truck scale such as the PTSplus or our AELP Pallet Beams are suitable. For extremely large or unusually sized shipments like a container, you need two forms of weighing. First, the shipping containers themselves need to be balanced inside, so you should pack each item according to weight. Once you finish loading the items, weigh the whole container so you know the total. This is done with a crane or hanging scale like the IHS, which can handle up to 10,000 kilograms. After you know this weight, you can place the container on the vessel in the right location.

You may have noticed that whenever you ship a parcel, the clerk weighs it on a shipping scale. This is often a floor or platform scale such as the CPWplus series or the PT Platform. For smaller packages, the clerk may have a bench scale on hand such as the Latitude LBX. The price you pay to ship correlates with the weight of the parcel. The heavier the parcel is, the more money you’ll spend. This is because heavier items need more accommodation. A large parcel may even take the place of multiple smaller items so as not to overload or unbalance the delivery vehicle. This will allow those loading to make the most of the space available, reducing the number of trips necessary and making your supply chain more efficient.

Safe truck loads won’t solve global warming, but by using weighing scales to accurately load and balance goods, you can help make the transportation industry more sustainable. If you have any questions about which scale is right for you, contact us for help.

It’s easy to assume that as long as a scale offers the capacity and readability to suit your needs, that’s all you need. But what if you’re using your scale to calculate a price based on an item’s weight? That means you’ll need a trade-approved scale. 

What is a Trade-Approved Scale? 

A trade-approved scale – which can also be referred to as approved scales, legal-for-trade scales, price computing scales or even simply as stamped – is required by law whenever pricing is set by weight, whether in a retail setting like a grocery store or farmers market, or in an agricultural setting where harvested crops are being sold by the grower. 

The use of a trade-approved scale protects both the buyer and the seller by ensuring that each party receives the correct amount of goods or the agreed upon price for those goods. 

They typically feature displays on the front and rear of the machine (some include a display on a pillar for easier viewing), allowing both the operator and the customer to see the weight, price per unit and total price. Another common feature is PLU (Product Look Up) memories, allowing the operator to quickly recall prices-per-unit for preprogrammed items. 

What Types of Goods Do I Need a Trade-Approved Scale For? 

Trade-approved scales are used to weigh an extensive variety of products, including food, drinks (including alcohol), produce, meat and seafood, liquid fuels and bottled or packaged goods that specify weight, livestock feed, precious metals and stones, and landscaping material.  

They can also be used in the pharmaceuticals industry, when medication or chemical compounds are sold by weight. 

This list is not meant to be exhaustive, but to illustrate some of the types of products that are often sold by weight. 

What are the Different Types of Approvals? 

The organization overseeing trade approvals depends on the country, so be sure when purchasing a retail scale that the approval is recognized in the locale where you’ll be using the scale. 

Examples include the National Type Evaluation Program (NTEP) in the U.S., Measurement Canada in Canada, European Conformity (CE) in parts of Europe, the Organisation International de Métrologie Légale (OIML) in parts of Europe and Latin America, the National Measurement Institute (NMI) in Australia and the National Regulator for Compulsory Specifications (NRCS) in South Africa. 

For more information on the various trade approvals, check out the Metrology Approvals section on our Regulations & Compliance page or our blog, A Quick Guide to Trade Approved Scales and Balances.  

Where Would I Use a Trade-Approved Scale? 

As we’ve discussed, trade-approved scales have a place wherever money is being exchanged for goods based on weight. This would include retail locations (including supermarkets, delis, frozen yogurt shops and jewelry stores) and commercial use (such as food packaging facilities and farms). 

Retail use 

Setting prices by weight is obviously the primary function of an approved scale when it comes to retail use. 

{{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Swift price computing retail scales" title="Swift price computing retail scales" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29737"}}– the newest retail scale in Adam’s product mix – offers dual capacities ranging from 3kg to 40kg and readabilities from1g to 0.02kg. With more than 160 PLUs, Swift allows users to recall pricing at the touch of a button.  

Topup Truck, a mobile zero waste shop in London, employs a Swift to measure out refills of 150 household essentials to reduce the use of disposable plastic containers. 

Commercial use 

For commercial use, approved scales can still be used for setting pricing by weight, such as checkweighing goods in a factory before they’re packaged to ensure each box or bag contains the correct weight of goods. 

Approved checkweighing scales and indicators – including the approved{{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Cruiser CKT M bench checkweighing scale" title="Cruiser CKT M bench checkweighing scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29709"}}, the approved {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Gladiator" title="Gladiator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33575"}} range of waterproof scales, the approved {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="AE 403 M" title="AE 403 M" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30263"}} indicator, the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GBK M bench scale" title="GBK M bench scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29706"}} , the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GFK M floor scale" title="GFK M floor scale" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29699"}} and certain models of the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="PT Platform" title="PT Platform" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29746"}} with the {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="GKaM Indicator" title="GKaM Indicator" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30059"}} – can help businesses save money by reducing waste and overages. Perfect for repetitive weighing tasks, CKT M provides a color-changing backlit display to indicate if the sample is under, over or within the preset limit. 

Many checkweighing scales (including those mentioned above) provide a color-changing backlit display to indicate if the sample is under, over or within the preset limit. 

In industrial facilities – particularly in food production – checkweighing is done under conditions that can get messy. Approved washdown scales and indicators like the IP68-rated Gladiator and AE 403 are easy to clean and perfect for wet or dusty environments. 

For more information about approved scales and the retail industry, check out our Retail Industry page. Need help finding the right trade-approved scale for your business? Consult with our staff of trained professionals by clicking here. 

Superstrength is a sought-after superpower, and some make it a reality with a lot of work and dedication. Those who weight train become successful by measuring their food intake, keeping track of their body weight, and, of course, lifting a lot of heavy stuff. With the help of two weightlifting coaches, this blog will discuss several types of weight training, the benefits, and how our compact and floor scales raise the bar.

Coaches Ryan Kalkowski and Clare Michalak work to create personalized training programs for clients at Resilient Training Lab, a private facility in New Haven, CT. Kalkowski has 17 years of experience lifting weights himself, with 12 years of experience as a coach. Michalak has 4.5 years of personal lifting experience with 3 years as a coach and is also a PN1-certified nutrition coach. Both Kalkowski and Michalak use their extensive knowledge to help their clients reach their targets.

What are the Types of Weight Training?

There are several types of weight training that cater to different goals and preferences. The main three that we’ll be discussing in this blog are weightlifting, powerlifting and lifting weights.

Weightlifting and Powerlifting

Weightlifting, often incorrectly used as an umbrella term for any gym activity using weights, is its own distinct sport, with specific rules and regulations. It involves two Olympic lifts, the snatch and the clean and jerk. Each competitor gets three tries for each lift, with the objective of completing a single rep of the heaviest weight possible. The heaviest weight successfully lifted for the snatch will be totaled with the heaviest weight successfully lifted for the clean and jerk. The resulting number will be used to determine the winner of each weight class. Powerlifting is extremely similar, except powerlifters compete in the deadlift, squat and bench instead of the snatch and clean and jerk.

Michalak, as both a weightlifting and powerlifting coach, calls the “camaraderie, physical challenge, and structure to the training exciting.”

Lifting Weights

This type of weight training involves using weights to increase your strength and enjoy the resulting health and lifestyle benefits. While lifting weights isn’t necessarily considered a sport, those who lift might find that they’re frequently up against a competitor anyway – themselves. Kalkowski teaches his clients that though the overall goal may be feeling better rather than medals or prizes, they should still care about their progress. How much weight you can lift over time ultimately becomes a testament to the quality (and quantity) of your life later down the line.

What are the Benefits of Weight Training?

Improving your overall health is a wonderful and worthwhile benefit of weight training, but there are more, too! Some lesser-known benefits include having an easier time with daily activities, being able to participate in your favorite hobbies longer, and an increased sense of discipline.

Improved Health

The CDC recommends engaging in muscle-strengthening activities at least 2 days per week, on top of 75 to 150 minutes of vigorous or moderate aerobic exercise. Weight training helps you maintain your muscle mass and strength, which provides protection for your bones and joints. Healthy bones and joints enable you to do the recommended minutes of aerobic exercise (rather cyclical, right?), altogether resulting in improved moods, reduced pain, lower risk of heart disease, osteoporosis and more. Having significantly decreased the risk of many common health issues, weight training has the greatest benefit of reducing the risk of death.

Ease of Daily Activities

Let’s face it, a lot of daily activities involve lifting heavy stuff, whether it be lifting your child, a gallon of water, groceries or even your ridiculously heavy purse. Weight training makes these weights more bearable. Kalkowski said, “The stronger we get and the more we can lift, the lighter these daily encounters become relative to what we are capable of." Michalak adds that with that newfound strength comes empowerment and confidence, enabling you to effectively help yourself and others when necessary.

Maintaining Participation in Hobbies

Though your favorite hobbies, whether they be running, golfing, gardening or cycling may not directly involve much lifting, weight training can keep you enjoying these activities for longer. Take gardening, for example. Yes, weight training will make it easier to lift those large bags or pots of soil, but it will also provide the strength that your back needs to withstand extended periods of time hunching over, planting seeds or pulling weeds.

Increased Discipline

Michalak cites weight training as what made her her a more disciplined person, “able to set goals and keep habits with the tools I’ve gained from trying to improve my barbell lifts.” There is, she asserts, “an equation to success.” Since weight training requires a dedicated schedule and routine to get the best results, your self-control improves, assisting in other aspects of your life.

How Can Scales Benefit Those Who Weight Train?

Now, we’ve been talking about lifting weights, but what about the tools that measure weight? Scales and balances have their place in weight training as well, including measuring food and bodyweight.

Weighing Food

Those who lift often have goals that they, or their coaches, set for themselves. For example, they want to lose some weight and/or build some muscle, set a personal record or even just lift a bit more than they did the day before. Unfortunately, though we all wish we could eat whatever we want without consequence, the food that we put in our bodies does influence how prepared we are to tackle these challenges.

The right amount of vitamins, minerals, protein, carbs, sugar and fat combine to create the fuel that keeps our bodies chugging along. How much is the right amount? Well, it depends on what you’re working towards, but using a compact scale such as the CBX or Dune to weigh your food is one way to keep track. Compact scales are ideal for weighing food and ingredients because they’re more consistent and provide fewer errors than alternative methods such as measuring cups. From hefty T-Bones to cocoa powder, compact scales will provide accurate results each time.

Both Michalak and Kalkowski keep a close eye on the serving sizes of their food, which is usually measured in weight. For example, if a serving size of oatmeal is 40 grams, then all the nutritional facts on the rest of the label are based on the amount of sodium, cholesterol, and calories in that one serving, not the whole container. This is also true for meat, however, meat loses weight after it’s cooked, so that’s important to take into consideration.

Kalkowski says, “a food scale was effective in helping me identify areas of my intake where I was over/under-consuming because the measured serving size was different from what I would typically consume.”

The general process for weighing your food is as follows:

      (1) Zero out your scale.

      (2) Read the nutritional label on your desired food to see what the suggested serving size is. This may be in grams or ounces, so make sure to adjust the weighing unit on your scale.

     (3) If you’re using a bowl or other container to hold the food, use the Tare function to subtract the weight of the empty bowl.

     (4) Weigh the food, gradually adding more or removing some until you reach the serving weight.

     (5) Should you wish to add more ingredients, you can continue to use the Tare function to remove the weight of previous additions. This way, you only need to wash one bowl!

As a nutrition coach, Michalak inputs all her weight measurements into a macronutrient tracking app, which allows her an in-depth record of what she’s eating to fuel her body.

Weighing Yourself

Many weight trainees have bodyweight goals for themselves. Regular lifters may be aiming to reach a certain weight for health or aesthetic purposes, but for weightlifters and powerlifters, their weight may influence their chances of winning a competition. Both weightlifters and powerlifters compete in bodyweight categories, or weight classes, which keeps everything fair. Weight classes include people in a specific weight range, so before competitions, participants are weighed and placed in the correct category.

Generally, you want to be in the weight class that will give you the best chance of winning or lifting the most. For example, if one of the weight classes ranges from 246 to 319lbs and you weigh 250lbs, you may have slightly less of a chance of winning against someone who weighs 317lbs. In this case, you might decide to lose four pounds and drop a weight class, which could give you an advantage. You could also choose to gain some weight so you’re on a more equal footing.

Whichever you decide – to gain weight, lose weight or stay the same – it takes consistency and effort. Tracking your progress is made much easier with weighing scales. Our CPWplus M Series is frequently used for athletes, with a range of capacities from 75lbs to 440lbs and readabilities from 0.02lb to 0.1lb – high capacity with high accuracy to match.

Both Kalkowski and Michalak agree that strength training is for everyone and doesn’t have to be a chore. Old, young, big or small, the time is always right to start earning your super strength. Of course, consult your doctor to make sure that weight training is the right choice for you, and always weight train in a safe and secure environment.

If you have any questions about which scale or balance can help your weight training journey, contact us and we’ll be happy to help.

Example at the Adam's Farm Stand 

Now we will look at adding a PLU and recalling it.

Process to Enter a New PLU

1) Before weighing start by entering in the unit price value. Use the numeric keypad to type in the price you want to charge for the associated PLU. 

2) Next Press the [PLU+] key then use the 1 key (also the up arrow key in this function) to select “store” and press the tare key to confirm the selection. The display will now show [PoS 0] on the price to pay section on the bottom left screen. 

3) Now you can enter any number from (00 up to 161). This will save the unit price you entered under this selected number or PLU. Now you can start weighing and it will caluclate the price per pound.

4) if you wanted to change a previous PLU simply repeat the process and it will save over the current value. 

Recalling a stored PLU value

1) To recall any of the stored PLU valued from 00 to 161 press the [PLU+] key. The display will now show store or recall. Use the 1 key (also the up arrow key in this function) to select recall and then press the tare key to confirm the selection.

2) Once selected the display will show [PoS 0] on the price-to-pay screen. Enter a number from 00 to 161 that has a store value and press tare.

3) Once the number is selected you will be able to weigh with that value. Repeat the process to select different PLU numbers.

Visit Metoree at https://us.metoree.com/

To learn more about Adam products, contact us or check out our Metoree page at https://us.metoree.com/companies/143310/.

**If using a container tare the container using the tare button before weighing**

1) When in normal weighing and before weighing. Press the low limit key (show picture)

The lo symbol will appear. It will show the current low limit. If there is not one you can set it with the numeric keypad. Once you have entered in your low limit press the T (Tare key) with the arrow for enter. (note if you are entering in whole numbers you will have to add zeros to reach the weighing unit limits in use) For Example 2.00 oz 

2) After entering the low limit you can set the high limit by pressing the high limit key. The HI It will show the current high limit. If there is not one you can set it with the numeric keypad. (Show image with Hi limit circled) 

3) Begin Checkweighing.

Anything below the low limit on the CKT will show a yellow display. Anything within the low and high limit will show a green display. And lastly, anything over the high limit will be a red display and a loud audible alarm will sound to alert the user.

If you need to disable checkweighing. Repeat these step but enter zero in for both limits. When the current limits are shown, press[CE]to clear the settings, then press [Tare] to store the zero values
 

You may have noticed something quite different about Adam lately. After months of crafting and developing a new and improved experience for you, we’ve officially launched our new global website! This blog will discuss some of the many features that you’ll be able to enjoy as you peruse our products and provide a walk down memory lane of some of our previous websites dating all the way back to the year 2000.

Product Finder

Do you have some product requirements in mind, but you’re not sure which of our scales or balances is the perfect fit? With our expanded Product Finder feature, the search is simple. Enter your most desired traits, such as a capacity of 32kg and an IP68 rating, and you’ll be able to see a full list of products with those characteristics. In this case, the Aqua Stainless Steel’s {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="ABW 32S" title="ABW 32S" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/30229"}} model!

Individualized Industry Pages

Our products are utilized in a multitude of different industries, and we’ve chosen to deep dive into our top on our new website. When you hover over your target industry on our industries dropdown, you’ll see a list of applicable scales, balances and accessories for that industry. Simply click on a product category to see a description on how those products make a difference in that industry.

Product Support

Now, you can go to the Support section in our menu and type any product into ‘Find support for your Adam Scale, Balance or Accessory.’ Click {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="here" title="here" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29744"}} to see the product support page for our Luna Analytical Balances. Not only is there a simple step-by-step to setting up the product, but the page also contains everything you may need related to the product – software downloads, user manuals, parts information and so much more! We dedicate ourselves to continuous improvement, so these pages, along with most others, will regularly be updated as necessary.

More Detailed Product Pages

In addition, you’ll find that our product pages have much more information now. Besides the basics, we’ve added enhanced content that will help you gain a more thorough understanding of each product. This includes photos of the product in action as well as their stand-out features and helpful videos demonstrating basic use. You’ll have everything you need to make your final decision.

Improved Resources

Our comprehensive Resources and Blog page is a goldmine of knowledge and information. Select Blogs under Categories to access our fantastic selection of articles (like the one you’re reading right now!). They range from addressing frequently asked questions, highlighting both common and unique applications for scales and balances, all the way to guides on best practices when using your product.

Furthermore, we have whole sections dedicated to Technical Support Guides, Education Resources, Application Notes & Case Studies, Press Releases, Events, and Videos. You will never be flying blind when you’re on our website.

Product Compare

Another feature that you may find useful when deciding between products is our product compare. You can select up to 4 products, either wider ranges such as the Solis or Equinox, or specific models, such as the EAB 225I and the EAB 314e. Simply add items to the comparison tool, then you'll be able to see a direct, side-by-side comparison of the product's capacity, readability, applications and more. Then, if you want to save the comparison for future reference, you can click the Print This Page button and save it as a PDF. 

We are excited to provide a more intuitive and versatile operating experience on our website. Please feel free to email us at marketing@adamequipment.com with any questions you may have as we all adjust to this welcome change. 

This is What 50 Looks Like

Adam, founded in 1972, recently celebrated its 50^th anniversary, but our first website didn’t come around until the year 2000, only 23 years ago. These images of our home pages from 2000-2023 represent how far we’ve come in such a brief time.  

2000 – 2006

2007 – 2012

2013 – 2016

A few cosmetic changes go a long way! Fun fact, our first blog, How to Calibrate a Pipette with a Balance, was released in December of 2016. 

2017

2018 – 2022

2023

And of course, this year! What a transformation.

We're looking forward to growing and developing more in the years to come! 

When: April 17 - 19, 2023

Where: Sheraton Phoenix Downtown & Phoenix Convention Center, Phoenix, AZ

Our Booth: #1027

Site: www.isa23.isapartners.org

When: 16 - 19 May, 2023

Where: NAMPO Park, Bothaville, South Africa

Our Stand: #16, in Neptune Boots Hall

Site: https://www.grainsa.co.za/

The fastest land animal on the planet is the cheetah, but even a cheetah must stop to get weighed. At ZA Cheetah Conservation in Bela Bela, Limpopo, South Africa, the cheetahs stop on one of Adam Equipment’s{{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="CPWplus" title="CPWplus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/33070"}} models for their weigh-ins.

Ute Vierling, ZA Cheetah Conservation’s director, described the importance of weighing the facility’s animals as part of their overall health. “Weighing the animals, in particular, the cheetahs,” said Vierling, “is super important as it can tell us if there are any underlying medical conditions prior to any visible signs being observed.” Their weights – which also affect dosing of any anaesthetics or medication – are often recorded monthly to provide a continuing overview of each animal’s health. Those with special care needs are weighed more often. Baby scales are used for smaller animals and babies to monitor their growth.

Maintaining the health of its cheetahs goes far beyond the care of the individual animals: in 2016, the global cheetah population was estimated at approximately 7,100 animals, which makes them the most endangered big cat in Africa. As Vierling said, “understanding their needs, behaviour and instincts plays a key role in saving animals from extinction.”

To help maintain its animal population, ZA Cheetah Conservation currently uses a CPWplus 150L to weigh their animals. In addition to cheetahs, the conservation is also home to a variety of leopards, lions, Siberian tigers, wolves, Bat-eared foxes and other rescue animals.

The CPWplus 150L scale – with a display hold feature to freeze the displayed weight – offers a capacity of 150kg with a readability of 0.05kg. The 900 x 600mm pan accommodates larger animals like those at the conservation. The internal rechargeable battery allows the facility’s staff to bring the scale to the animals, rather than having to sedate the animal and bring it to the scale in a veterinary office or other location.

The conservation has a history with Adam products, including at its vet clinic in Bloemfontein before moving to its current location in Bela Bela. Vierling praised the CPWplus as “very accurate, easy to use and carry around to the enclosures and very reliable.”

Vierling also talked about the variety of ways scales are used at the facility. In addition to weighing the facility’s cheetahs, leopards, wolves and smaller cats (including caracals and servals), “we also weigh the food and supplements on a daily basis to make sure every animal gets the right amount.” v

The facility also uses the scales to weigh their animals’ food – including zebra and antelope carcasses – to verify that it’s received the proper amount of meat from vendors, based on the price per kilogram.

While care of its animals is of paramount importance at ZA Cheetah Conservation, the organization’s mission, said Vierling, is “to raise awareness of the vulnerability of South African species and other endangered species through educational experiences, as well as ethically breeding cheetahs in captivity.” Using DNA samples taken from their Cheetahs, the conservation works with other ethical and responsible projects to maintain genetic diversity and ensure the survival of the species.

Long-term, the organization’s goal is to release some of its animals into a protected, yet self-sustaining natural habitat where animals may live free while still being monitored by researchers and medical experts.

ZA Cheetah Conservation offers a wide range of volunteer, internship and research programs, which together have attracted more than 1,000 people from 33 countries to become part of the Cheetah Experience Global Volunteer Family and contribute to conservation in South Africa.

“If you love watching the art of nature and the beauty of science come together, you’re definitely going to want to stick around” – Jonathan Henrikson

Love it or hate it, social media has become a goldmine – or in this case, a crystal mine – of information, inspiration, and innovation. Somehow, TikTok creator Jonathan Henrikson (@Minerals_Rock) has managed to find a unique way to combine all three with his content. This blog will discuss Henrikson’s crystal bismuth business, his creative process, as well as how scales like our compact balances have an impact.

An avid rock and mineral lover, Illinois native Henrikson has been posting videos detailing the process of creating bismuth crystals to a rapidly growing audience for over a year now. Thanks to his own determination as well as his helpful and engaged viewers, Henrikson has been able to develop and improve his technique, and even add a fun spin – music. 

What is Bismuth?

Bismuth is a particularly heavy, brittle metal that is slightly (harmlessly) radioactive and has a low melting point. It’s one of the active ingredients in pharmaceutical medicines such as bismuth subsalicylate, better known as Pepto Bismol, and certain pigmented cosmetics. However, bismuth is not just a remedy for an upset stomach, it also makes for a charming decoration.

While naturally silver, bismuth turns vivid rainbow colors when oxidized with heat and allowed to cool. Under the right conditions, this metal forms fascinating geometric patterns, or “crystals,” that typically resemble a series of stacking staircases. All bismuth crystals are man-made and one-of-a-kind, so how does Henrikson do it?

The Creative Process

Because bismuth has such a low melting point, it can be easily liquified by heating it in a pot over a regular kitchen stove at 520 degrees Fahrenheit. Within the pot, science is working its magic. Essentially, by heating the bismuth to a liquid and allowing it to cool for the right amount of time, the bismuth undergoes a molecular process that allows it to form its beautiful colors and patterns.

At the beginning of his crystal-growing journey, Henrikson would heat the bismuth only on the bottom and then allow it to cool in an insulated bucket. Once he felt it was ready, Henrikson would pour out the excess liquid into a separate pot to reuse later. The bottom of the original pot would be covered in a layer of crystals, which, due to bismuth’s brittle nature, could be easily broken off into separate small, beautiful chunks.

After “hundreds of hours” of practice and learning how to adjust for unexpected challenges such as weather interference, Henrikson has improved his technique and knowledge. Now, he adds a heated coil to the top of the pot, which helps keep a consistent temperature throughout and prevents the bismuth from accumulating and forming a layer at the bottom.  

“With my method, the metal cools in the middle first, which seeds the metal to crystallize from that point, and I pull the crystal out at whatever point in the growing process I want to,” Henrikson explains.

With a pair of tongs, Henrikson gently reaches into the pot and extracts the crystal that’s formed in the center – with much larger and more intricate results than when he first began learning.

Music to His Ears

Henrikson has over 1 million followers on TikTok, many of whom provide helpful suggestions on techniques to try, such as tossing in a magnet – bismuth is repulsed by magnets, AKA diamagnetic - adding in other metals for the crystals to attach to, and even running an electric current through the metal. Each of these techniques makes unique crystals, but one approach stuck the best: playing music.  

Henrikson started off strong by playing Beyonce’s songs during the heating and cooling process, letting the vibrations and sound waves influence the structure of the crystals.

Henrikson explains, “The sound waves essentially just are traveling through the molten metal as it is cooling and crystallizing … instead of the molecules coming together naturally in their own way they are hit with the sound waves and moved around a bit before settling down.”

Suddenly, there were thousands of song and artist requests from followers, from Queen to the Bea­­­­tles to Taylor Swift. Each musical artist produces unique crystalline structures.

Where Do Scales Come into the Process?

In order to make bismuth crystals, Henrikson starts out by purchasing bismuth ingots. Businesses that sell ingots of bismuth do so by selling boxes of a particular number of pounds, made possible by utilizing a high-capacity floor or bench scale, both for packing and shipping.

Companies that price their bismuth based on weight are legally required to use a trade-approved scale to weigh and price the ingots. This helps guarantee that each customer is getting what they paid for, no more and no less.

On Henrikson’s part, he uses a scale to weigh his creations to show off how “surprisingly heavy” each crystal is, as bismuth is “slightly heavier than lead.” This also helps to set his viewer’s expectations on the approximate weight and size they would be receiving should they decide to purchase a particular crystal on Henrikson’s Etsy shop MineralsRockTikTok.

Though the weight of the crystal isn’t displayed on his Etsy shop, it does have an influence on the prices of his crystals, as well as the size and the “quality of the structure, including the overall appeal of the piece.” Shipping costs are also determined by the weight of each piece, “as per standard shipping practice.” For all of these purposes, a Highland portable precision balance or a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29695"}} CBX compact balance is perfect. 

We would like to thank Jonathan Henrikson for providing us with an interview, for the images used in this blog, and for inspiring a deep dive into the wonderful ways scales and balances can be used throughout the world!

“Spilling the tea” is a popular saying these days – unfortunately, “weighing the tea” never caught on. Still, the method of making and packaging tea leaves is just as interesting as any gossip. This blog will discuss what tea is and how scales are used in the tea production and packaging process.

What is Tea?

Tea is a term for different types of dried and crushed leaves, with or without extra flavoring added. Tea is categorized by how the leaves are prepared as well as what leaves are used. The most common plant used for tea is the camellia sinensis, AKA the tea plant. Camellia sinensis is used to create black, white, oolong, yellow and pu-erh teas. For each type of tea, the leaves are prepared differently. For example, black teas undergo an oxidation process after picking, whereas green teas aren’t oxidized at all. Tea can also be made with other herbs, plants and flowers such as chamomile, mint, rose hip and dandelion, or a few mixed together.

You may not choose a particular tea for its taste, but rather for its health benefits. Chamomile is popularly used as a calming agent, and mint tea can be used for an upset stomach. To make these teas more enjoyable to ingest, other flavors are frequently added in, like orange zest, lemon or cinnamon.

Tea is typically pre-packed into single-serving porous sachets for convenience, though some prefer loose-leaf teas so they can change the strength of their drink as desired. The tea is infused into hot liquid - usually water, though sometimes milk. Add some honey, or leave it plain, to get a delicious and calming beverage.

How exactly do we get from the bush to the teacup? Where do weighing scales come into the picture?

How are Scales Used in the Tea Production Process?

The production of tea is a multi-step process that changes in an extraordinarily wide variety of ways based on the type you’re making. However, all share three steps: they’re harvested, withered and dried. Scales and balances are used in each.

Harvesting

When harvesting tea leaves, keeping track of the total weight is important. First, you’d be able to compare data over time. For example, if the total weight of your harvest is 25% less than last year, you’d be able to identify this discrepancy quickly so you can discover why and adjust in the future. There are many factors that could contribute to a smaller harvest, such as weather conditions or a change in fertilizer, but comparing year to year can help.

Another reason to use a weighing scale during harvest is if the tea farm doesn’t process the leaves themselves. Weighing their total harvest allows for proper and fair payment for their work when they send it to the production facility.

A few different scales are ideal for this application. For large quantities, a hanging scale like the SHS allows for the leaves to be bundled up in a bag or sack and hooked onto the scale for an accurate weight, as long as the container is tared out first. The PT Platform is also useful for selling in bulk on the ground, with its durable construction. Combine the PT with a weighing indicator offering functions suited to your needs, such as checkweighing or parts counting. Our PT platforms, along with our GK indicators, have trade approved models available for selling tea leaves by weight.

A moisture balance, also known as a moisture analyser, is also beneficial for this stage. A moisture analyser like our PMB determines how much moisture is in a particular sample. Leaves that are high in moisture content weigh more. When purchasing leaves from a tea farm supplier, you could end up paying more money for less quantity. Obviously, the goal is to get the best price, so determining the moisture content of the tea leaves will help decide which supplier to use.

Withering and Drying

Withering is the first stage after harvest, where the leaves are softened and the excess water in the leaves is expelled. Once they’re at the proper moisture level, the leaves can be curled and twisted, which makes the tea more desirable from a color and aroma standpoint and helps it along in the chemical process.

Drying is one of the last stages and can be completed on a spectrum of intensities depending on the desired flavor profile. The tea can be roasted, baked or dried naturally by the sun, among other methods. This keeps them from going bad before consumers can get their hands on them in a store because they’ll have a long shelf life.

These two processes are grouped together because they also benefit from the use of a moisture analyser like the PMB. Because the tea leaves need to have a certain percentage of moisture in them to move on to the next step, they must be monitored frequently. A moisture analyzer will allow you to test the leaves at different times during the withering and drying process until the sample has reached the desired moisture level, after which the batch can move on to the next step. Supervising the moisture content of the tea also helps to prevent the growth of mold and other contaminants.

How are Scales Used in the Tea Packaging Process?

Once the tea is ready, it’s time for it to be packaged. Scales come in handy here, too.

Let’s start with the creation of tea bags. The average amount of tea in a bag weighs between 1.5 – 3 grams, but the catch is that not all types of tea weigh the same. Depending on the size of the leaves, how much moisture is left in them, whether they’re left whole or broken into pieces, 1.5 grams looks a lot different when it’s oolong tea vs. white tea. Therefore, weighing instruments such as the Luna Precision Balance will help to determine what the standard tea bag is for each type of tea created. This makes the quality control process much smoother, as it helps maintain standards and save money. Giving away 0.5 grams of extra tea in each bag adds up!

You may have noticed when shopping for tea that many of the boxes display the net weight front and center. The net weight is the weight of the contents inside, excluding the weight of the box itself. This would be determined by placing an empty tea box on a scale, taring it out, and adding in the teabags until the desired weight has been acquired. This also comes into play with loose-leaf tea, as production companies want to ensure that they’re not over or under filling the packages.

Net weight can be displayed rounded to the next whole number or to the first decimal, achievable with a checkweighing scale such as the Cruiser CKT, which allows you to set high and low limits and alerts you when the product is above or below. Net weight is a surprisingly important factor to a consumer, as it allows them to compare to other brands and decide which tea gives them more bang for their buck.

How Are Scales Used at Home?

For some, tea bags are a convenience that they enjoy, as you don’t have to measure out the tea yourself, but others prefer the process of steeping their own loose-leaf tea. In that case, you’ll want to guarantee you get the perfect cup every time by weighing your leaves. This will help you create your own recipe for use in the future. A simple compact scale such as the Core or CBX is perfect for this purpose.

No matter how it’s made, it’s no secret that the right combo can lead you down the road of relaxation – just don’t spill the tea.

If you’ve made your decision, you can head here to fill out a quote request. Still wondering which scale is right for you? Contact us for help.

Effective from January 2023, Adam’s new warranties will apply to all new purchases from that point. Extending many products to a five-year warranty will, says CEO Richard Storey, “put the Adam brand ahead of just about any other scale or balance manufacturer you can think of.”

Richard says: “Our previous warranty structure, whilst in line with much of the weighing industry, didn’t reflect the confidence we have in the quality and durability of Adam products.

“So we did some research. We’ve spoken to customers, some who have had an Adam scale or balance for 10, 15 years or more and it’s still going strong.

“We know Adam products will outlast the average scale or balance – so we don’t think they should have an average scale or balance warranty.

“Warranty gives you peace of mind, peace of mind that we will stand by the investment you make and that the quality and durability of our products’ performance allows you to weigh better for longer.”

To take advantage of the new, longer warranty periods, buyers only need to register their product on Adam’s website upon purchase. Should they experience any issues with parts or workmanship, the buyer would contact either their local Adam office or the authorised reseller who they bought the product from by telephone or email to start the streamlined claim process.

“We’ve been in this industry for 50 years and our customers know that the Adam brand means quality,” said Richard. “We’re excited that our new warranties promise new customers that they can trust Adam for their weighing needs – with more than double the peace of mind compared to our old warranty periods in many cases.”

Adam Equipment, which celebrated its 50th birthday in 2022, is making the new warranty periods available worldwide, via its offices in the UK, Germany, USA, South Africa, Australia and China.

To learn more about Adam Equipment, visit www.adamequipment.asia. For details on the new warranty program, buyers can visit www.adamequipment.co.uk/warranty-sea or contact Adam Equipment sales@adamequipment.co.uk.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972 in Milton Keynes. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in the UK and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.

Media Contact:

Dave Smith

Adam Equipment

d.smith@adamequipment.com

Whether it be in the form of gold jewellery, bars, coins or ingots, gold has represented wealth and prosperity for hundreds of years. Lately, however, investing in gold has become exceptionally popular. If you’re interested in taking advantage of the recent gold rush, this blog will discuss why people invest in gold, when to expect investments to ramp up, how gold is measured, and why you need a trade-approved scale.

Why is Gold Investment Becoming Popular?

One reason is that the value of gold reacts inversely to the value of the pound. This means that when the value of a pound falls during times of inflation, the price of gold increases significantly, becoming a dependable financial backup for those who have already invested. It also essentially locks out those who can’t afford to invest until the price goes back down. This exclusivity keeps the price high for a longer period.

During times of deflation, when the value of a pound rises, the price of gold decreases. In this case, more people can afford to invest in gold. However, though the price of gold may decrease, it will likely not decrease as much as other items might, which means that the purchasing power of gold would ultimately increase. This gives the investor incredible protection against deflation.

Another reason people are investing in gold is to diversify their investment portfolio. For example, let’s say you’ve only invested in stocks. Suddenly, the stock market crashes, and you lose all your money. Whoops! However, if you invested in both stocks and gold, then you have gold to fall back on when the stock market crashes. Having a variety of different investments provides protection when one fails. This practice is known as diversification.

When Does the Gold Market Typically Increase?

Gold is becoming popular because of its security. Investors don’t tend to stock up on gold when the economy is healthy. As many believe that we’re heading into a recession within the next few months, the price of gold is predicted to rise, therefore it’s best to invest now when the price is still low. Likewise, this cycle will repeat as the economy improves and declines in the future.

There are multiple different ways to earn money with gold. One way is becoming a gold dealer. This includes stocking up by purchasing gold bars when the price is low through other local dealers or online, depending on whether you would like to inspect the gold before making the deal. Once you have enough gold stock, you can then begin reselling the gold yourself when the price is higher, making a healthy profit.

Another way is selling scrap gold or jewellery at a pawn shop or other gold buyer. To make good money doing this, you need to learn how to identify quality gold that others may have discarded or looked over. The gold buyer will then examine the jewellery and offer you a price for the trade. The better quality of the gold, the higher the price. However, you will make significantly less money selling scrap and jewellery than if you’re able to stock up on gold bars and coins.

How is the Value of Gold Measured?

Gold’s value is based on its weight and purity. The weight of gold can be measured in troy ounces, which is the most common and precise, as well as grams and carats. Gold will commonly be sold in terms of these weighing measurements as well. The purity of gold is measured in karats, with twenty-four karat gold being 100% pure. Because purity and weight both affect the price of gold, it’s important to know both to determine the true value. Gold bars will be sold by weight, but before you sell gold jewellery to a buyer, consider learning more about the gold measuring process to guarantee that they are valuing your jewelry properly.

Why Do You Need a Trade Approved Scale?

If you intend to sell gold by weight, you’ll need a trade approved scale. Trade approved scales are required by law to be used when the price of an item is determined by its weight. Trade approval is an extra certification that verifies the scale’s accuracy and gives both the seller and the buyer peace of mind. To learn about the different types of trade approval and which one applies to you, check out our blog A Quick Guide to Trade Approved Scales and Balances.

The Highland HCBaM is EC Type approved and popularly used for jewellery and gold weighing, as it features the required weighing units as well as the precision necessary for smaller quantities. The HCBaM offers optional rechargeable batteries, so you can take it wherever you need to be. For extra durability and protection, the HCBaM boasts patented ShockProtect technology, so you don’t have to worry about damage if your balance is overloaded or banged around.

If your gold is in the form of jewellery, balances like the HCB are a reliable way to weigh bulk gold chains or calculate value when purchasing scrap metal. Head to our website for more information on how Adam scales fit in the jewellery industry.

If you’re ready to buy a trade-approved scale, click here to access our quote request form. Have any questions? Contact us for more information.

It’s official! As of the 1st of January, 2023, we’ve upgraded our warranties on all new purchases of nearly all our scales and balances to as many as five years. We’re proud to prove to you the trust that we have in the quality and durability of our products. We know that once you’ve got your hands on one of our scales or balances, you’ll have the same confidence that we do. Let’s go into more detail.

Which Products Have Upgraded Warranties?

Many of our products have more than doubled their original warranties, which means that in many cases our customers get “double the peace of mind,” says CEO Richard Storey.

The chart below lays out the new Adam manufacturer’s warranties. Adam Equipment offers up to three more years of warranty protection than previously, covering our scales against manufacturing defects.

How Are You Eligible for the New Warranties?

Eligibility for our new, longer warranty periods is easy – all you need to do as a buyer is register your product on our website upon purchase. Then, you’ll be able to work without worry, knowing that we’re here for you through thick and thin. In the unlikely event that you have a problem or issue with parts or workmanship, you would be able to contact your local Adam office, or the authorised reseller whom you bought the product from by telephone or email to begin the claim process.

Why Are We So Confident?

Our company puts great effort into making our products more than ever before. We are always looking at ways to evolve and improve our scales and balances to be more robust, more accurate and more reliable. Our hard work has not gone unnoticed. Here are a few reasons why we’re so confident, from the keyboards of our very own customers:

-- John S. employs a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Latitude" title="Latitude" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29651"}} LBX-6 Compact Bench Scale, the warranties of which have increased to three years for new buyers. Strika reports that Adam balances are “very reliable, well made by a company that understands scales and balances and can support you after the sale if necessary.”

-- Carl S. of SIMPLYS boasts that his {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Luna" title="Luna" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29743"}} LBB 8001e - with a new warranty of five years - is “spot on every time.”

-- Brijesh S. of Premier Candle Corp. states that his weighing scale features “sturdy housing for long-lasting use” and is “easy to calibrate.”

-- Elena P. of GDC, Inc. owns a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="Nimbus" title="Nimbus" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29663"}} NBL 120001E – also with a new warranty of five years – which is “reliable, even in a production environment” and is “accurate when verified with certified weights,” even after nine months, no adjustments necessary.

-- Self-employed Alan P., owner of a Nimbus NBL 124e, describes our technical support as “excellent.”

-- Ceri W. of Wallcolmonoy Ltd utilises a {{widget type="Magento\Catalog\Block\Product\Widget\Link" anchor_text="BKT" title="BKT" template="product/widget/link/link_inline.phtml" id_path="product/29734"}} 32 – with an increased warranty of 3 years – and states that Adam’s “Cost/value for money is second to none.”

There you have it. We have confidence in our products because our customers give us the cause to be confident. Put your trust in our products and we won’t let you down.

Do you have more questions? Check out our warranty page or contact us for help!

Putting together your lab is more than just selecting a balance. Where you place your scale and the accessories you choose are equally important to achieving accurate weighing results. If you’ve ever seen a semi-micro or analytical balance on a regular bench in a lab when the air conditioning turns on, you know this firsthand.

Your balance should be placed on a solid surface in a room with a stable temperature, avoiding a location with direct sunlight and any vibrations, air currents or static electricity. Why? These types of disturbances can affect the balance or the sample (if they’re volatile), which will in turn affect the results.

Your analytical balance likely came with a draft shield, so you’re protected against air currents. Let’s look at how you can mitigate the other potential issues.

Anti-Vibration Tables

So do you really need an anti-vibration table for your analytical balance? The short answer is: most likely. Analytical balances are extremely sensitive devices and can be affected by many environmental factors, including vibrations and air currents.

You may not notice the floor you’re standing upon vibrating, but your balance does. Instead of a zero reading when there’s nothing on the pan, you may see constantly changing readings that won’t settle from a vibration you can’t even feel. They can come from a variety of sources, including the buildings heating and air conditioning system, nearby railroad tracks or even passing cars (yes, your balance is that sensitive!).

Calibration Weights

Proper calibration – verifying an instrument's readings by comparing them against a known standard – is critical to ensure the traceability, reliability and accuracy of your weighing results. If your balance requires external calibration, consider purchasing calibration weights.

The standard you need depends upon your location: in the United States, you’ll probably be using an ASTM set; outside the U.S., OIML weights. If you’re working both within the United States and internationally, consider investing in both types.

When purchasing a new balance, it’s a good idea to purchase a calibration certificate, so you’re assured of proper calibration from the start.

Ionizers

Most people don’t think about static electricity all that often, except maybe for when they’ve walked across a carpet in their socks, then touch something metal and feel that telltale “zap!” as it’s discharged.

While it seems harmless, much like a gentle breeze can affect your balance readings, static electricity can also wreak havoc by causing drift.

Drift is a gradual change in the weighing results despite the load remaining constant. If your sample weighs exactly 1g, your balance obviously shouldn’t change its reading up to 1.002g, then drop to 0.001g before returning to 1.000g.

So how do we protect against static electricity? You can use an ionizer, like Adam’s portable ABI-1. An ionizer corrects the imbalance between the positive and negative charges on an object by charging the surrounding air molecules positively and negatively. The charged molecules on the object are either attracted to the air molecules or pushed away from the object by them, depending on whether their charge is positive or negative.

To use Adam’s ionizer, simply turn it on and place it near the balance. You would hold the sample or the sample container near the ionizer before placing it on the balance’s pan.

Need help selecting a balance or accessories for your lab? Our staff is here to help!

An Introduction to the Swift

The SWZ Swift Price Computing Retail Scale is one of our most popular weighing scales and it combines a high-quality, durable build with plenty of built-in features to help ensure weighing and pricing tasks remain accurate, fast and simple.

The Swift features an impressive 100 PLU’s so that customers can recall their most used items – a feature that is especially useful for stores that sell many different products and different prices. There is also a fully rechargeable battery for weighing in areas without direct access to power.

On the outside, a smooth, wipeable weighing pan and surface means that any spillages can easily be cleaned up to help ensure a hygienic weighing experience.

To use the Swift, simply add an item to the scale, and then, based on the weight of the item and your cost per kilo, cost per 100g or cost per pound, the scale will display the price for the item to both user (at the front of the scale) and customer. Users also have the option of connecting their Swift to a computer or printer via the RS-232 interface or optional USB interface.

Introducing Topup Truck

Award-winning company Topup Truck converted a Smiths Cabac electric milk float into a mobile zero waste shop, complete with 150 household essentials. This has been done with the aim of reducing household plastic waste and to create a positive experience for the North London community. It also aims to make waste free living more accessible by bringing the shop to the customer to make transporting goods home easier – an issue that can be difficult for many Londoners who do not own a car.

Topup Truck can be booked via the website to come to an area near you, or customers can keep track of where it’s already due to visit. Once you know to find it, users simply bring their own containers, jars or bottles and fill up on a wide range of essentials, including toothpaste, sweets, flour, rice and more.

Products are then accurately weighed out and priced using the SWZ Swift Price Computing Retail Scale, which Topup Truck described as “absolutely meeting our needs” when dealing with everyday use.

What Topup Truck Thought of the SWZ Swift

Easy to use

In a customer-facing business, it’s crucial that your weighing scale remains easy to use for both staff and customers, and the Swift is exactly that. Ella from Topup Truck praised the scale for its “ease of operation that makes the scale very simple for staff and customers to use.” An uncomplicated user interface enables users of all skill levels to get the most from their Swift, while front and rear displays for price, overall weight and total cost mean that staff and customers can see every part of a transaction.

Durable Design

There was also praise for the build quality of the Swift, with Ella championing the durable design as one of the most important aspects of the scale. The Swift is made from a tough ABS plastic housing with a stainless steel weighing pan, making for a robust scale that can deal with rigorous use and can easily be wiped down and cleaned when needed.

High Accuracy

In the retail and commercial industry, it’s crucial that your weighing scale delivers accurate weighing data to ensure that your customers are getting exactly what they pay for. The Swift was described by Topup as being highly accurate: even after intensive use and transportation when it could be counted on the deliver dependable weighing and pricing data.

Want to find out about the SWZ Swift? Contact us for more information.

Density is usually expressed in grams per cubic centimeters (g / m³).

You will need the following materials:

• Weighing Balance or Scale (1 place or better preferably)
• Graduated Beaker or Cylinder
• Thermometer
• Clamp to affix the thermometer to the beaker
• Object whose density needs to be measured
• Writing implements (digital or analog)
• Water or other known liquid (room temperature)
• Calculator (or more paper to do the manual calculations)
• For floating object’s density: glass plunger of known mass, volume and density
• Suspension method
• Table of densities for the water or liquid used

This method relies on the sample being suspended. If your balance offers an underhook, use that hook to suspend the sample. If not, you will have to set up a suspension method on top of the balance.

1. Make sure the scale or balance is calibrated and shows zero.
2. If the balance has multiple units, set the unit to grams. If the balance does not offer grams, you must convert the result in grams.
3. Set up your suspension method, on or under the balance.
4. Add your liquid to the beaker. Your liquid must have a stable temperature.
5. Record the liquid’s temperature. Its density will depend on it. You can find density tables for all sorts of liquids online. If you are unable to access the internet,  print out a table with your liquid’s densities by temperatures beforehand.
6. Tare the mass of the suspension kit. If you cannot tare, record the equipment’s mass to subtract it later.
7. Suspend the object in the air. Make sure the balance is giving stable readings and only record the results when the object is motionless.
8. Weigh the object in the air and record the mass in grams. This is M^air in our equation.
9. Suspend the object in the liquid and record the mass once stable. Make sure there are no air bubbles and that the sample is fully submerged. This is M^liq in our equation.
10. You can now calculate the density of the sample. Divide the liquid’s density by its mass in the air divided by its mass in the air minus its mass in the liquid.

PMB Moisture Analyzers use a single 400 watt halogen bulb to heat the sample in 1 °C selectable increments. They include three heating modes:

Ramp-up: The temperature will rise to a specific degree over a set period of time. For example, 125ºC in 10 minutes.

Single: A single temperature. The moisture analyzer will heat to a specific temperature, and stays there for the duration of the test, no matter how long it is.

Step: Heats to one temperature for a set time then to another temperature for another period of time. There are a maximum of 3 settings in the PMB. So you could set it to 100ºC for 3 minutes, 125ºC for 2 minutes and to 150 ºC for 6 minutes.

Samples often need to be processed before testing. Here are some tools you might need:
• Disposable sample pans
• Glass fiber filters
• Spatula
• Pipettes
• Knives
• Forceps
• Mortar and pestle
• Grinder
• Scissors
• Copper wire
• Wire netting
• Hatchet
• Saw
• Hammer
• Aluminum foil
• Paper clips
• Gripper
• Teflon roller
• Calibration weights
• Thermometer

To download the PDF, click this image

Adam Equipment Donates CPWplus Scales to Shepreth Wildlife Park

When the old scale at Shepreth Wildlife Park stopped working, Alice Vassalo, a Carnivore Keeper, contacted Adam Equipment to get a replacement: “I wrote to Adam Equipment in a time of need, as our beloved scales at Shepreth Wildlife Park had given up the ghost, and we were desperate to find a replacement so that we could continue to monitor our animal health by weighing them at least monthly”.

While Shepreth Wildlife Park started out with local animals such as badgers and foxes, they quickly started helping unlicensed exotic animals, and nowadays, they also participate in national and international breeding programs for endangered species. That means they take care of a wide variety of animals of many different sizes and shapes, from tortoises to tigers. They needed a versatile scale capable of weighing within a wide range while retaining enough precision and accuracy to properly care for the smallest and biggest animals.

Alice told us that, “the CPW Plus 200L has come in very handy so far and has helped us do some training that was not possible before on animals whom we haven’t been able to weigh! A big thank you to the lovely team over there. We look forward to sending you photos and videos of our progress!”

“We are so excited to keep up some valuable weight training with our animals with the help of our brand-new scales! Weight fluctuations can be signs of poor health, perhaps indicating an issue that we wouldn’t have been able to discover otherwise. Continued monitoring allows us to ensure our animals have the best of care. Thank you, Adam Equipment!”

– Vivien Chan, Mammal Keeper at Shepreth Wildlife Park

The CPWplus 200 L offers a large 900x600mm platform that can accommodate even large animals, and a capacity of 200kg. Its readability of 0.05kg works well enough to weigh smaller animals such as badgers or hedgehogs as well. The scale features a handle and wheels for easy transportation; it’s often taken to the various habitats where the animals live. It’s easier on the animals, as they can be weighed in a familiar environment and are not stressed by the move.

Animals have to be trained to step on the scale and stay long enough to be measured accurately (no scales in the wild, so they’re understandably skittish). Alice told us that maned wolves and Bennett’s wallabies were scared to step on the scale at first, and had to be coaxed. Luckily, CPWplus scales feature a hold function to keep the weight frozen on the display, which allows keepers to take care of the animals without worrying about losing the weight. Selectable digital filtering takes animal movement into account to get precise results every time, whether keepers weigh a placid badger or a nervous wolf. The rubber mat helps prevent slips and makes the animals more comfortable.

For more information on CPWplus, visit https://adamequipment.co.uk/cpwplus-weighing-scales.

Iguana on CPWPlus

Conserve, Educate and Enjoy

Shepreth Wildlife Park first started as the private WillersMill Wild Animal Sanctuary in 1979. It was a sanctuary for local fauna, but quickly grew to encompass exotic animals. From the Hedgehog Hospital to their numerous conservation efforts (both in the UK and abroad), Shepreth Wildlife Park is committed to global conservation and has been raising funds and awareness for a variety of on-site projects since 2002.

In 2011, the park management founded Shepreth Wildlife Conservation Charity (SWCC) with a view to raise even more money for worldwide projects. They’re a small zoo with a big heart and ambitions to match. They try to release the animals they help into the wild whenever possible. Sometimes, animals can’t be released because they would not survive without human intervention, so Shepreth Wildlife Park keeps them in the sanctuary and takes care of them, whether they’re a lizard or an owl.

“The donation from Adam Equipment has meant a lot to us as a small zoo,” explains Yve Morrin, Curator of West Section at Shepreth Wildlife Park. “Like many others, we have been hit hard by the Covid 19 crisis and lockdown. Our income depends on visitors, so the current financial situation has put a strain on our team. By donating these scales, Adam Equipment has allowed us to spend our limited resources on urgently needed purchases including food for the animals and veterinary medicines. We can’t thank them enough for their help!”

For more information on Shepreth Wildlife Park and their mission, visit https://sheprethwildlifepark.co.uk.

"The team there, particularly Fran, were absolutely stars and very kindly sent us a brand-new large scale so that we could get weights on our larger species, too!"

– Alice Vassalo, Carnivore Keeper at Shepreth Wildlife Park

Porcupine on CPWPlus

Connect the RS-232 cable to the back of the printer and on the back of the scale, balance or indicator.

This should start the automatic settings. The printer will print the following:

How to Set Up the AIP’s Parameters on a Computer

1. Unplug the AIP printer.
2. Connect the AIP printer to your PC using the USB cable.
3. Start the Easy Setup software. You will see the following screen:
   
   
4. You should see the following message: “Read… OK. Printer is connected”
5. Go through the settings and set them however you like.
6. Once you’re done setting the parameters, click “Set to Printer” to save your changes. If you don’t, the printer will revert back to default settings.
7. Close the Program.
8. Unplug the AIP printer from your PC.

Download the full PDF by clicking this image

Keilitz, who co-owns the two Xanadu salons with his wife Danise, needed a software solution that would capture data not only for inventory management but also hair color formulation. He wanted something that would increase the accuracy and efficiency of portioning different dye colors for mixing (“What if I weighed it?” he wondered.) and eliminate transcription errors in keeping track of customers’ color formulations.

In addition to the salon, Keilitz works as an IT executive and saw an opportunity to combine his experience in both arenas. “I love writing code and I missed it,” Keilitz said. “It’s something that I don’t usually get a chance to do and it was a way to get more deeply involved in the business with my wife.”

He wrote his own software, ColorBuddy, and paired it with Adam Equipment’s Highland portable precision balance.

Since ColorBuddy’s release in January 2014, the automated system has run seven days a week and has captured more than 150,000 color formulas and metrics on associated client, service, stylist and color usage. Keilitz initially purchased one HCB 3001 for use during software development, then bought three more when he rolled out ColorBuddy so each Xanadu location would have two balances in their color bars.

The ColorBuddy Process

In usage, ColorBuddy provides a straightforward process for the stylist, who first selects a customer in the database to find their personal color formulation history.

A personalized formula with multiple color or dye products results in a truer color match. While mass market dyes from a box are meant to deliver the exact color pictured on the box to everyone, they can’t account for variables like temperature, tones, hair types and degree of color resistance.

The stylist then scans the barcode on each box of color or dye, then dispenses each product into a bowl on the Highland balance to determine the weight.

The next step is to click a button in the software to select the type of service (i.e., touch-up, highlights, roots-to-ends, etc.).

After adding the specific color formula to the customer’s history file, ColorBuddy updates the salon’s inventory (typically, hundreds of boxes of color) by removing the amount of each product used for the formulation.

The system allows for real-time accounting of color usage and inventory, as well as automated product ordering and restocking. ColorBuddy can generate reports like Formula History, Daily Color Usage Costs, Color Used (by Stylist, by Service, by Day) and Inventory Details. Thanks to ColorBuddy’s metrics, Keilitz can even determine what type of hair styling uses the most product.

The Highlights of Using Highland

Highland offers a variety of weighing applications relevant to the ColorBuddy system: in addition to general weighing tasks, percentage weighing would be beneficial in staying true to the correct proportion of ingredients in the color formula.

After researching a variety of options, Keilitz selected Highland for two key reasons: it offered both a USB interface to work with the all-in-one desktop computers at the two salons, and its API was based on a standard that Keilitz knew well from his 22+ years in IT, so he knew he could integrate it into ColorBuddy’s program design. The HCB 3001 also provided a readability of 0.1g, which easily met his needs.

The balance’s sturdy ABS housing, which was designed to stand up to demanding lab use, performs equally-well when working with hair dye chemicals.

To ensure consistent measurements, Highland comes equipped with HandiCal® for internal calibration without the need for external weights. In a busy salon, the staff would be hard pressed to find the time to calibrate their balances with external weights.

Looking toward the future, Keilitz plans to remain using Highland in both salons. “I’ve tried other, cheaper scales, but they just didn’t have the accuracy we needed. These are used by 35 stylists a day and probably get more use than they would in a lab.”

<a title="The Highland Balance is " dying"="" to="" improve="" the="" hair="" color="" process="" -="" pdf"="" href="https://adamequipment.co.uk/media/AE-Docs/Casestudies/casestudy-colorbuddy.pdf" target="_blank" rel="noopener">For more information on Highland precision balances, click here.

Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide since 1972.

Setting up the Density Kit

1. Make sure your balance is off.
2. Carefully remove the top pan from the balance.
3. Place the replacement pan included in your density kit on the bottom pan.
4. Place the beaker stand onto the replacement pan.
5. Put the density pan stand on the beaker stand.
6. Put the beaker on the stand.
7. Once the beaker is stable, affix the thermometer clamp to the beaker.
8. Put the thermometer on the clamp. Make sure it’s not going to fall or move.
9. Place the density pan (for solid samples) or the glass plunger (for floating samples in liquid) through the hole on top of the density pan stand.
10. Fill the beaker with water. Make sure the water is room temperature and avoid bubbles by pouring slowly.
11. Measure the temperature of the water, and make sure it remains constant.
12. Record the water’s temperature.
13. Start the balance.
14. Make sure the balance shows zero before you place the sample.

Note: If you’re using the hook below the balance, you can simply place the sample on a density pan or a wire so that the sample is suspended by the hook. You still need to make sure you have a stable surface to place the beaker of water and its accessories if you’re determining liquid density.

How to use the Density Function on Lab Balances

1. Navigate through the menu to find the density mode using the arrows.
2. Once you’re in Density Mode, you can choose solid or liquid density.
3. If you choose Solid Density, enter the solid density value in (g/cm3). If you choose Liquid Density, enter the liquid density value in (g/cm3), then select the liquid you’re using, and enter the temperature of the liquid.
4. Tap START.
5. The balance will display the results. You can press “Restart” to measure another sample, or “Esc” to exit the density mode.

Step 1 Go to https://adamdu.com/ Step 2 Click on “Activate Now”.
Step 3 Enter your license key and the balance you will use with AdamDU. Step 4 Hit “Submit” once you entered the data correctly.
Step 5 A pop-up will ask you to open adamdu.msi. Click “Save File”.
Step 6 The file will be in your Downloads. Click on it to open it.
Step 7 Click on “OK”.
Step 8 Run the file. Note: Your computer might ask you if you’re sure you want to do this or say the file might not be safe. Confirm you want to run the file. Step 9 The Setup Wizard will pop up. Click “Next” to continue installing AdamDU.
Step 10 The installer will prompt you to choose a location. You can choose your own, or keep the default location. Once you’re satisfied with the location, press “Next”.
Step 11 The Installer is ready to install AdamDU. Click on Install to proceed.
Step 12 Once the installation is finished, click “Finish” to end the installation process:
Step 13 There should be an AdamDU shortcut on your desktop. Double click on it to run it. If not, go to the location you picked and run the program.
Step 14 There will be a license check. If you already purchased AdamDU, the license number will be filled out and you can click “Activate Adam DU Now”.
Step 15 A license agreement will pop up. Please read the license agreement. Accept the license agreement to use AdamDU by checking the box that says “I ACCEPT the License Agreement”. Step 16 You will be brought to this screen:

Congratulations, you have successfully installed AdamDU!

Single

If the single option is picked, the PMB will heat the sample at the temperature inputted as fast as possible.

1. The display will show “Single” and “123 C”. The left digit will be flashing.
2. Use the [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys to move or go back to a digit, and the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit’s value.
   
   Note: The temperature range is 050 C to 160 C.
   
   
3. Press [Setup/Enter] to confirm the temperature.

Ramp

The ramp option allows users to select a temperature and how long it should take for the PMB to heat the sample to that temperature.

1. The display will show “Ramp” and “123 C”. The left digit will be flashing.
2. Use the [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys to move or go back to a digit, and the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit’s value.
3. Press [Setup/Enter] to confirm the temperature.
4. “Ramp Time” will be displayed.
5. Use the [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys to move or go back to a digit, and the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit’s value.
6. The user can select a time up to 99:59.

Step

The step option allows users to set up 3 time intervals, each with a different temperature. This setting is useful for delicate samples that are difficult to dry without burning.

1. The display will show “Step 1” and “123 C”. The left digit will be flashing.
2. Use the [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys to move or go back to a digit, and the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit’s value.
3. Press [Setup/Enter] to confirm the temperature.
4. The display will show “Time 1”. The left digit will be flashing.
5. Use the [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys to move or go back to a digit, and the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit’s value.
6. Press [Setup/Enter] to confirm the temperature. The time for step 1 must be at least 3 minutes.
7. Repeat these steps for step 2 and step 3.

Note: If you only need 2 steps, you can set the time of step 3 to “00.00”.

Download our full PDF by clicking the image above

Challenges

Bat-eared foxes on CPWPlus

Despite the name, Cheetah Outreach houses not only cheetahs, but also several small carnivores, including serval, caracal, black-backed jackal, bat-eared fox and meerkat as well as Anatolian shepherd ambassador dogs. They also raise 4 young cubs, who must be weighed weekly, since their food intake is based on percentage body weight. “Their metabolic pathways are very sensitive to change and offering an incorrect quantity of food for their age and weight could lead to serious bone deformities and other developmental issues”, explains Liesl, a curator at Cheetah Outreach. In order to ensure the animal’s health, Cheetah Outreach implements a very strict protocol, and they needed a scale that was both versatile and precise. Liesl adds: “All the animals at Cheetah Outreach, from the smallest meerkat to the largest cheetah are weighed weekly or monthly, depending on the need. These measurements are recorded in our husbandry manuals and used to adjust food intake and caloric offerings to all individual animals.”

How the CPWplus Helped

Caracal on CPWPlus

Liesl tells us that “the scale has become an integral part of our husbandry protocol. Maintaining an optimal body weight and condition in exotic animals is paramount to their health and welfare in captivity”. The CPWplus has a generous platform size and a high capacity, which is useful since, as Liesl tells us: “an adult cheetah of 60+ kilograms needs a considerable space to fit on completely”. The handles and wheels make the scale easy to transport since it does not have to be carried. The extension cord allows the scale to operate in the animal’s enclosure without the handler being present: “some animals are more likely to step on the scale if the handler is on the other side of a gate or fence. This feature makes this possible”. The enclosures try to mimic the animal’s natural environment, and as such it can be difficult to find an even surface, so the handlers often use the adjustable wheel brackets to steady the scale.

“Honestly, I cannot even imagine how we ever used to get along without this scale.”
- Liesl, curator at Cheetah Outreach

Education, Conservation and Protection

Cheetah Outreach Trust is a non-profit conservation organisation dedicated to the protection of the free-ranging cheetah and the stability of cheetahs held in captivity as an assurance population. The work of the Cheetah Outreach Trust is focused in four key areas: environmental education, reduction of wildlifehuman conflict through applied and effective in situ (field-based) strategies, advocacy for the elimination of illegal trade using the South African DNA studbook (hosted by Cheetah Outreach) as a monitoring tool for legitimacy of animals traded and research. For more information on Cheetah Outreach, visit www.cheetah.co.za.

Cheetah Outreach is an education and community-based programme designed to raise awareness of the plight of the cheetah and to campaign for its survival. Founded in 1997 by Annie Beckhelling, the facility sits on about 4 hectares of land on Paardevlei in Somerset West.

If there is a problem in calibration, an error message will be shown. The following errors are possible:

“Error Stab” If the weight is unstable.

“Error Low” If the weight is too small.

“Error High” If the weight is too large.

Correct the error, and calibrate the PMB again.

1. Turn on the PMB.
2. Once the PMB is on, make sure it is in normal weighing mode.
3. Place a sample pan on the pan support.
4. Place the temperature probe on the sample pan within the weighing chamber.
5. Close the weighing chamber.
6. Press the [Setup/Enter] key to enter the menu.
7. If you set a passcode, enter the passcode. If not, you will be in the menu.
8. Use the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] keys to cycle through the menus. The calibration menu should be the fourth option.
9. When you see “CALIBRATE” on the display, press [Setup/Enter] to enter the menu.
10. You can now scroll through the menu’s sub-section. The “CAL TEMP” option is after “CAL MASS”. If not, use the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] keys to cycle though the subsections until it is displayed.
11. When “CAL TEMP” is displayed, press [Setup/Enter].
12. The display will show “00:00” and start a timer for 10 minutes. It will beep every minute to remind you calibration is in progress.
13. Observe and record the temperature in the chamber. It should be around room temperature.
14. Once the temperature stays constant, press [Setup/Enter] to enter the temperature value you just observed. To enter the numeric value, use the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit. The [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys allow you to advance or move back to the previous digit.
15. Once you have the correct value, press [Setup/Enter] to accept your entry.
16. The heaters will turn on and heat the weighing chamber until it reaches around 150ºC, which will take around 30 minutes. A timer will show the elapsed time.

Note: If the temperature is stable before the full 30 minutes are elapsed, you can simply press [Setup/Enter] to stop the timer, and enter the temperature as described above.

17. Once the heating is finished, the PMB will beep. Read the temperature of the chamber.
18. Press [Setup/Enter] to enter the temperature value you just observed. To enter the numeric value, use the [Dspl/↑] and [Test/↓] to increase or decrease the digit. The [Print/←] and [PST/→] keys allow you to advance or move back to the previous digit.
19. Once you have the correct value, press [Setup/Enter] to accept your entry.
20. The PMB will return to normal weighing mode.
21. Let the PMB cool before you use it again.

If the calibration is not completed correctly, the calibration process will be stopped, and the display will show “TEMP CAL FAIL”. The PMB will return to normal operations, and the temperature will not be calibrated. You have 30 minutes to enter the temperature before the test stops.

The temperature values used during calibration will be accepted only if they are within acceptable limits of the values stored during the dealer calibration.

Connecting the PC and the Indicator

First connect the scale to a PC with the RS-232 cable, open the PLU software and select the appropriate communications port.

Setting

The Setting menu should be set to Counting (the default) for use with the AE 504.

When in Counting mode, select Lim to add high (Hi) and low (Lo) limits for checkweighing.

Entering a Single PLU

Select Add to create a new PLU. Click in each blank field to select it, then enter the applicable data. The highest number in the field Sr. No. (serial number) indicates how many PLUs are stored in memory and cannot be edited.

Editable fields are PLU No., Unit weight, Goods ID, Goods Name and Specification. Specification is a text field that can be used for notations about the product. For example, if your product is a screw, the specification might be to specify that the screw is a Phillips head. The specification field does not export to the label.

After entering the data, click the Download button to add the PLU to the indicator.

Entering Multiple PLUs

To enter multiple PLUs from a spreadsheet, the spreadsheet’s columns should follow the order of the fields in the PLU Download software (i.e., Column A should be data for the PLU No., Column B should be the unit weight, etc.). The Sr. No. data is generated by the PLU software and should not be included in your spreadsheet.

The spreadsheet must be an Excel file (the file extension will be .xlsx or .xls) or .csv file.

Click the Import button to select the location of the file containing your PLU data.

After opening the file, click Download to add the PLU data to the indicator.

Backing Up Your PLUs

To save the PLUs stored in the PLU download program, click the Export button, enter a file name and click Save.

Languages

To choose your preferred language, click the Language button to select from English, Spanish, Italian, French and German.

The label editor software included with the Adam Equipment AE 503 and AE 504 indicators allows users to take full advantage of the indicators’ built-in printers. The following guide presents an overview of the software’s capabilities and how to print labels using our AE weighing scale indicators.

Quick access toolbar

New label: click the icon of the dog-eared paper to create a blank label.

Open existing label: opens and existing label design.

Save: allows the user to save the current label design.

Customize the quick access toolbar: allows the user to add more options to the quick access toolbar (the default setting is icons for new label, open existing label and save).

Attribute toolbar

The 'Attribute' window allows the user to adjust values for selected elements on the label. When no element on the label is selected, the user can adjust 'Printer' values.

Clipboard tool

Copy: copy the selected element on the label.

Paste: paste a copied element on the label.

Select all: selects all elements on the label to manipulate together, such as copying-and-pasting, deleting or alignment.

Delete: deletes the selected element on the label. Elements can also be deleted by right-clicking on them and selecting 'Delete' from the pop-up menu.

Insert toolbar

After placing them on the label, the items under the Insert Toolbar can be moved along the X axis (horizontal) and Y axis (vertical) in the Attribute box under Parameters, in addition to selecting them with the mouse and dragging them.

Text: allows user to enter data into pre-defined text fields, such as weights, dates, time, quantities, price, etc., by selecting the down arrow next to the word Text.

In the Attribute window, highlight the value Text and right click on the Text value for a pop-up menu that allows the user to define the contents of the text field. To adjust other Parameters in the Attribute window, select the Values to change location of the text box, font size, zoom along the X or Y axis (which stretches the text to make it taller or wider) or rotation (in 90-degree increments). This font cannot be changed.

Barcode: allows user to create a bar code that will encode pre-determined information, such as weights, quantities or price. The Attributes window also allows the user to move the barcode, adjust the height or thickness, make the barcode readable or rotate it.

In the Attribute window, highlight the value Text and right click on the Text value for a pop-up menu that allows the user to define the contents of the bar code.

QR code:inserts a QR code. Right click on the Text value for a pop-up menu that allows the user to define the contents of the QR code. The Attributes window also allows the user to move the QR code, adjust the height or thickness, rotate the code, change the QR code to different types of barcodes or define the level of error correction.

Bar: inserts a line that can be modified (width or height) or moved using the Attribute window.

Picture: inserts a placeholder icon for an image or logo. The actual image is then selected using the File parameter in the Attribute window. The image type must be a Bitmap (.bmp). The picture can be moved by the X and Y values within the Attribute window or dragged with the mouse.

Text picture: allows user to enter any desired text without predefined values and change the font. Click Text Picture, then click in the label to place it. In the Attribute window, highlight the value Text Picture and type the desired text. Selecting the values allows the user to move the box, change the font, adjust the font weight, italicize the text, stretch the text to make it wider or taller, or rotate the text in 90-degree increments.

Box: inserts a box that can be modified (width, height or thickness) using the Attribute window.

Eraser: creates a white box that can be modified (width or height). Anything located behind the box remains hidden.

Reverse: creates a black box that can be modified (width or height). Used in tandem with one of the Text functions, text located behind the box will be reversed (i.e., white text against a black background).

alignment toolbar

Alignment modifies how different elements relate to each other. For example, if a QR code and product name are placed next to each other and both are selected, clicking Top will align the product name along the top of the QR code, while Middle will center it and Bottom will align it with the bottom edge of the QR code.

Operate toolbar

Download: Users can select the communications port or baud rate to connect the indicator and PC.

Print: allows user to print the label.

Variable edit: allows the user to access and modify several default values.

For example, if the user will only have occasional use for a SKU name on the label but would prefer to have a dedicated space for it for those times, they can use default generic placeholder text (such as a company name) that will always be used unless an actual SKU name is entered.

Language toolbar

Labels can be created in English, Spanish, French, Italian or German. Please note that the language should be selected first because changing language in the middle of label creation will clear unsaved data.

Mode toolbar

Users can select between Template (which inserts standardized information the user can modify) or Normal (which starts with a blank label).

Custom label templates can be purchased through Adam Equipment, call your local office or use our online contact form.

Mounting your CPWplus indicator on a stand allows you to keep the display consistently at eye level. In this guide, we’ll show you how to attach the CPWplus indicator to the pillar.

Parts required for assembly:

• Screwdriver (not included)
• 4 x small Phillip-head screws
• 2 x mid-sized screws (black)
• 1 x large screw
• 2 x green stoppers
• 4 x large thumb screws
• 2 x stainless steel pillar cap screws (silver)
• Pillar
• Pillar end-cap (black)

Step 1 Remove the top pan from the CPWplus, and flip the scale over. Position the scale so that the cable connection faces you.
Step 2 Take the black metal pillar support, and place it against the bottom of the scale. Make sure the beveled screw holes are facing out.
Step 3 Screw the black metal support on the scale’s platform with the 2 small screws provided. Then, screw the remaining small screws into the black metal support holes to the side of the base.
Step 4 Remove the metal bracket from the indicator by taking off the 2 large thumbscrews. The following step is to feed the cable through the pillar itself.
Step 5 Remove the black endcap off the left side of the indicator by unscrewing the 4 Philips head screws.
Step 6 Directly inside the now open indicator, you will see a small white rectangular “Molex” cable connecting to the PC-Board. There are 2 hook tabs that keep the cable in place. You need to hold the hooks towards each other before pulling them in order to get the Molex out.
Step 7 After you pull the Molex out, and the cable is detached, you need to take the black end cap off the top of the pillar before putting the cable through. To do so, remove the 2 screws holding the cap to the pillar. Take off the cap, then pull the cable through.
Step 8 Keep feeding the cable until the white Molex connector is attainable through the top of the pillar. Pull the Molex out of the pillar.
Step 9 Pull the cable through the black cap through the round cutout.
Step 10 Put the cap back on, and screw it in again.
Step 11 Flip the CPWplus back to an upright position and put the pillar against the metal support. IMPORTANT: Make sure that the cable is fed clearly through the center of the pillar. The base of the pillar should not be resting on the cable, as it would throw the pillar off balance.
Step 12 Slowly and carefully tilt the scale on its side to gain access to the beveled screw holes on the black metal support.
Step 13 Take the long screw and screw it into the single hole closest to the round edge.
Step 14 Screw in the remaining mid-sized screw in the remaining beveled holes in the black metal support.
Step 15 Place the scale upright and reconnect the indicator to the white Molex connector. Tabs on the Molex ensure the connector fits properly.
Step 16 Pull the wire through the cutout of the indicator.
Step 17 Attach the left black cover to the indicator and replace the 4 small Philips head screws.
Step 18 Make sure to place the wire in the cutout, or you could damage the wire with the bracket when you screw it back on.
Step 19 Screw the bracket onto the pillar with the thumb screw.
Step 20 Attach the metal bracket on the indicator to the top of the pillar using the 2 thumb screws.
Step 21 Put the pan back on the scale. IMPORTANT: When placing the stainless steel pan back on top of the base, make sure the notched side of the pan is facing the pillar.

Important: The weight selected to calibrate the CPWplus must be at least 10% of the scale’s capacity, and no more than 20%.

During calibration, you must use whole numbers with no decimal points. For example, if you have to use a calibration weight that must be at least 1.5kg, you must use a calibration weight that is 2kg or above.

Step 1 Turn the scale on.
Step 2 Once the CPWplus is in normal weighing conditions, press the [TARE] button for 4 seconds.
Step 3 The display will show “CAL”, along with the unit that was selected last. You can change the unit by pressing the [Unit] key if necessary.
Step 4 Press the [Print/Hold] key. The display will show “L XX”. XX stands for the weight, which the user must input.
Step 5 The [Tare/Zero] key is used to change the flashing digit. Once you’ve entered the correct digit, use the [Print/Hold] key to move to the next digit.
Step 6 Once you’ve entered the calibration weight, press the [Unit] key to confirm the weight. The digits will stop flashing. If the weight you’re using is less than 10% of the scale’s capacity, the scale will display “CALEr”. You must use the correct weight. If the weight you’re using is more than 20% of the scale’s capacity, the scale will display “CALEr”. You must use the correct weight.
Step 7 Place the calibration weight that corresponds to the numbers you entered. So if you entered “2kg”, place a mass equal to 2kg on the scale.
Step 8 Press the [Unit] key to return to weighing mode.
Step 9 Remove the calibration weight.
Step 10 Weigh it to verify that the scale was calibrated correctly. Repeat the process if there was a calibration error.

Platform scales are large industrial platforms used for weighing pallets, containers and other heavy goods. Calibrating platform scales can be tricky without prior experience, and operators need to be comfortable connecting indicators, navigating interfaces and choosing appropriate calibration weights for your scale’s weight capacity. This guide will provide a simple and straightforward way to ensure your platform scales are calibrated correctly every time!

What is weighing scale calibration and why is it important?

Scale calibration is a procedure that ensures that a weighing scale or balance delivers correct, accurate weighing results to the degree specified on the scale. The accuracy of weighing scales can diminish over time through regular use, dust build-up or age; a process often referred to as ‘drift’. For this reason, it is important that scales and balances are regularly maintained.

Trade approved scales certified for selling goods by weight by weighing authorities such as EC, NRCS or NTEP need to be regularly calibrated and checked to ensure they fall in line with legal requirements.

What do I need to calibrate a platform scale?

Platform scales weigh in much higher capacities than standard weighing scales, and therefore require specially designed block calibration weights for accurate external calibration. In the UK and Europe, OIML approved block calibration weights are graded in regards to their tolerance/ level of precision, ranging from M1 to F Class weights. In the USA, ASTM and NIST also have a similar calibration weight grading procedure.

Certain types of scales and balances come complete with internal calibration and do not require calibration weights. However, it is still possible to calibrate platform scales with internal calibration using external calibration weights if necessary.

Calibrating Adam’s PT Platform scales with AE403 indicators

Adam platform scales typically follow the same calibration process as standard platform scales, however the indicator interface and accessing calibration modes will differ depending on the type of scale indicator that is used. Here we have included a full description of the calibration process when using Adam’s PT platform scale with Adam AE403 indicators:

Step 1 Place the platform base on a flat floor surface, making sure there is plenty of space around the scale base for safe operation.
Step 2 Remove anything that has been placed on top of the platform.
Step 3 Connect a weighing scale indicator to the platform base using an RS-232 connection cable.
Step 4 Power on the indicator and wait it to configure.
Step 5 Before configuration is complete, press Tare when the display is showing the countdown for the digits.
Step 6 To enter the password, use the directional buttons ⭡ or ⭣ to scroll through numbers 1-9. Use the ⭢ directional key to move to the next digit.
Step 7 Enter the correct password [1000] and press [Tare].
Step 8 After pressing [Tare] ↵, ‘noload’ should appear on the display.
Step 9 Use the directional button ⭡ to switch to ‘load1’.
Step 10 Set the desired weight limit of the test object to be placed on the scale using the ⭡ or ⭣ directional buttons and the ⭢ directional key to move to the next digit.
Step 11 Once you have selected the desired weight limit of the test object, press the [Tare] ↵ key to confirm.
Step 12 The display will show 'load'. Load the desired weight onto the platform.
Step 13 Once the weight is on the platform press the [Tare] key to confirm.
Step 14 Once confirmed, the indicator will enter the configuration process. When the process is complete the indicator will show the desired weight currently on the platform.

How to put the AE 403 indicator on a stand

Putting your 403 indicator on a stand ensures it’s still portable (unlike when it’s fixed to a wall) and consistently at eye level. In this guide, we’ll show you how to attach the indicator to the stand.

Included with the indicator stand:
	a) Metal collar b) Adaptive collar c) Allen key d) 4 screws e) 4 washers f) 1 bolt g) 1 tightening knob (spare part)
Included with the indicator:
	I - Mounting bracket II  - 2 turning knobs III - 2 screws

Step 1 Unbox the indicator and all the parts. Make sure all the small pieces are accounted for. Grab a flathead screwdriver (not included).
Step 2 Take the mounting bracket of the indicator.
Step 3 Take the metal collar. You want to fix the collar to the bracket
Step 4 Align the metal collar with the holes at the center of the indicator’s metal mounting bracket. The metal collar should be under the bracket like so. The metal collar has a hole to the side, which should align to the back of the indicator. The hole should also be closer to the metal bracket.
Step 5 Align the washer pieces with the holes. Place the screws in each of the holes, and tighten by hand to make sure they don’t fall out.
Step 6 Using the Allen key, tighten the screws to make sure the ring is well fixed.
Step 7 After the ring is screwed to the indicator, align the holes on the side of the indicator and the side of the metal bracket. There are 2 screw holes on the side of the indicator. The screw should be inserted into the hole in the middle of the side of the indicator.
Step 8 Screw the indicator to the metal bracket with a screwdriver.
Step 9 Take the black knob, and tighten to the hole above by hand.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure on the other side.
Step 11 Take the metal adaptive collar.
Step 12 Push it in the indicator’s metal collar.
Step 13 Once it’s firmly attached, you can slide the indicator on the stand. Slide the metal adaptive collar in the black tube.
Step 14 You’re almost done! On the back of the metal collar, there is a hole. Place a bolt in the hole, and tighten it. This will attach the indicator to the stand.

How to attach the AE503/504/GK/GC indicator to an indicator stand

1. Unscrew the bracket holder at the bottom of the grey mount.
2. Slide the adaptive bracket in.
3. Screw the bracket holder back on.
4. Slide the indicator to the bracket. Make sure it’s securely fixed. You should hear a pop when it’s attached.

To learn more about Adam indicators and the products they are compatible with, please see our designated weighing indicators section or contact us directly for more information.

If you don’t know the sample weight

A counting scale “counts” by weighing the samples and dividing the total weight by the individual weight. If you already know the piece weight, you can just input it into the scale and start counting. Here’s how you find out the weight if you don’t have it:

1. Place a container on the weighing pan
2. Tare the container using the tare button

Tare the container

1. Place the sample weight in the tared container. You can place a single sample, or a number of them if you know the exact quantity.
2. Once the sample is weighed, use the numeric keypad to enter the number of pieces you weighed.

Enter the number of pieces you weighed

1. Once the number of pieces is entered, press the SMPL key. This will save the number of pieces you entered, and the scale will calculate the weight of individual pieces if necessary.

Press the SMPL key to save the number of pieces you weighed

1. The 3 displays are labeled. You have the weight, which is the total weight on the scale (minus anything you tared). The unit weight is the individual weight of each piece. The piece count is the number of pieces on the scale.
2. You can now place the pieces on the scale, and it will count them, and give you the total weight. The unit weight might change as the scale refines the exact weight of the sample.

If you already know the unit weight, here’s what you should do instead of steps 3-5:

1. Enter the weight with the numeric keypad.
2. Once you have entered the weight, press the key “U.Wt”. This will save the weight you entered as the unit weight, and this number will be used to count the rest of the pieces.

Press the U.Wt key to save your weight as a unit weight

1. Follow steps 6 and 7 above.

1. Place the container or the first ingredient on the weighing pan.
2. Once the reading is displayed and the balance is stable, press the yellow tare button, which resets the scale to zero.
3. Repeat as many times as you need to.
4. When you remove all of the items from the pan, the balance will give you a negative figure, which would be the total weight of all the items that you have measured.

CKT displaying weight


Taring the weight


CKT is now displaying 0

Warning! Taring the scale does not mean the weight doesn’t count for the scale’s capacity. So if you tare 200g and the balance has a capacity of 1000g, you have 800g left before overloading the balance.

On mechanical scales, taring is a little different. Note: not all mechanical scales give you the option to tare weight. If they do, you will see a weight on a tare bar that slides left or right. It will look different from the sliding indicators used to measure things.

1. Place the container or the first ingredient on the weighing pan.
2. Slide the indicators across until you get a reading that is stable and accurate.
3. Slide the tare bar to the right to increase the tare weight, and to the left to reduce it. Do so until the scale shows zero.
4. Place the sample on the scale, and slide the indicators across until you get a stable reading.

Whether you use a digital or mechanical weighing device, once you’re done taring and measuring, be sure to reset the scale to zero. If you tare 200g, and take off the weight, the scale will display “-200g”, and will measure accordingly. So if you don’t zero the scale and place an item weighing 300g on the weighing pan, the scale will display “100g” because 300-200=100.

Our guide on how to understand units of measurement for weighing. This guide will cover traditional measurement units such as grams and kilograms to more complex, technical measurements such as ATRO or Troy Ounces.

Designed for food service, catering, food preparation, and classroom weighing needs, Astro compact portioning scales offer easy operation and a full serving of features.

With capacities ranging from 2000g to 8000g, the Astro is ideal for measuring food portions or quantities of ingredients for recipes. Solid, one-piece construction and stainless steel housing are easy to clean and can withstand demanding food processing tasks. A durable grade 304 stainless steel pan accommodates ingredients or a weighing container. Astro is simple to operate, with only two buttons that provide ready access to the weighing units and allow the unit to be tared quickly. The weight is displayed in decimals, enabling quick calculations for large recipes and batch cooking.

Results are shown in green on the Astro’s large LCD. If too much weight is placed on the scale, the green figures change to red, alerting the user. Overload protection helps prevent damage to internal components. The Astro can be used in almost any location, as it is powered by an AC adapter or two triple A batteries.

Astro delivers performance, durability and value for food-related weighing tasks. From small kitchens to large restaurant chains, from mid-sized catering companies to fast-food franchises, the Astro caters to your food weighing needs.

Adam’s Nimbus balances deliver Sky-High Performance with Down-to-Earth Value. Nimbus offers analytical and precision models with a compact footprint and intuitive user interface.

With four analytical models and eleven precision top loaders, Nimbus delivers results from one tenth of a milligram to one tenth of a gram, with capacities up to twenty-two kilograms.

To reduce errors from air movement, Nimbus analytical balances are equipped with a glass-enclosed weighing chamber that can be disassembled for cleaning.  Models with 0.001g readability come with a removable round glass shield.

The solid metal housing provides a stable base for outstanding precision weighing in labs or variable field environments.

USB and RS-232 interfaces connect to computers and printers, streamlining data collection and analysis. All data conforms to Good Laboratory Practices.

The backlit display is easy to read and features a unique capacity tracker that indicates used and available capacity while you work.

Nimbus balances can display results in several different weighing units depending on your needs.  You can disable unwanted weighing units to avoid weight reading errors.

Measuring the density of liquids or solids is simple with built-in software that guides you through the calculation process.

For precision weighing Nimbus is designed to weather the storm in demanding laboratories. Experience the Nimbus by Adam Equipment.

Adam Equipment’s CPWplus bench scales provide exceptional value, easy operation and numerous features for use in industrial, shipping and receiving, office, field or laboratory applications.

The solid metal housing on the CPWplus provides a stable base for outstanding precision weighing.

At the heart of the scale lies the indicator, housed in sturdy aluminum casing and featuring a four-button keypad. The indicator contains a backlit digital display with large, easy-to-read digits. A standard wall mounting bracket is included with the indicator.

A hold function freezes the displayed weight, allowing ample time for the user to record results.

For easy and fast connection to a printer or computer, the CPWplus features an RS two thirty two port.

Powered with an AC adapter or batteries, the portable  CPWplus can be taken out in the field in its convenient, protective, carrying case.

The CPWplus bench scale is durable enough to tackle the demands of industrial applications anywhere. Simple operation, rugged construction and an easy-to-clean stainless steel pan make it an outstanding value.

Versatile and practical, Adam Equipment’s MDW digital scales are ideal for fitness centers, gyms, doctors’ offices and hospitals.

The MDW offers an affordable weighing solution for medical professionals and health practitioners throughout the world. Beyond the scale’s sleek exterior, you’ll find rugged construction and heavy-duty functionality. Built-in wheels expedite the scale’s smooth transport between exam rooms or offices. Powered by an AC adapter or battery, the MDW offers convenient operation in any setting. A non-slip platform on the MDW ensures secure footing for users when stepping on and off the scale.

MDW’s four-button keypad is simple to operate and allows speedy weight determination and quick taring. A hold function freezes the weight on the display, allowing plenty of time to record readings. The keypad is sealed, so fingerprints can be quickly wiped off, helping keep the scale clean and sanitary. The display is amply sized and provides large red digits that are easily visible. A height bar facilitates simultaneous height measurement during weighing. The MDW 300L features the ability to calculate body mass index. An RS-232 interface on the MDW 300L simplifies transmission of results to computers or printers.

TBB Balances from Adam Equipment are right choice for science teachers and quick mechanical weighing.

All of Adam triple beam balances feature a solid metal housing durable for any classroom activities as well as a stainless steel platform.

They come with rulers in cm and inches for quick measurements whilst weighing.

There are three sliding weights which are notched to make sure the weight stays where it’s needed.

An adjustable zero knob allows fine tuning of the zero range and a weigh below hook is included for below balance weighing.

Adam Triple Beam Balances are available in different configurations:

• The basic TBB 610S model weighs up to 610g
• The TBB 2610S includes weights to take the balance to 2610g capacity and tripod legs to allow for easier specific gravity calculations
• The TBB 2610T includes the features of the TBB 2610S but adds a tare bar enabling users to tare out up to 225grams.

Adam Equipment triple beam balances offer the right balance of speed, performance and value for your everyday weighing tasks.

Calibrating your Adam Equipment Triple Beam balance is simple and quick to do:

1. Use a weight with a known mass to verify if your triple beam balance needs calibration.
2. Place the mass on the pan and adjust the sliding weights to determine if the balance is out of calibration.

If your balance needs to be calibrated:

1. First, remove the screw on the side, underneath the pan. This holds the pan in place.
2. Next, unscrew the weighing pan to access the weights inside.
3. If the weight is too high, remove weight from the inside of the balance. If it is too low, add weight to the inside. You can use anything that has a mass to make up the weight. This might take a little trial and error to get the right amount.
4. After the weight is correct, reassemble the balance.

Latitude compact bench scales deliver speed, performance and exceptional value for industrial weighing, counting and checkweighing applications.

Results are displayed in under one and a half(1 ½) seconds, speeding up readings and processing time for production, warehouse, or field use. 

Four Latitude models offer capacities from three(3) kilograms to thirty(30) kilograms and readabilities from zero point five(0.5) grams to five(5) grams.

To simplify checkweighing, Latitude’s three(3) coloured LEDs show if the weight is over, under or within set limits. An audible alarm can be set to alert the user either if the item is with in the limit or outside of the limits.

Parts counting with the Latitude is fast and efficient using preset sample sizes. Simply weigh the sample and add parts to get a total count.

The hold function retains the last weight on the display so users can easily record results.

Percentage weighing allows you to determine the weight of an item as a percentage of the reference weight.

Latitude offers several power options. The Latitude runs on a rechargeable battery that offers two-hundred forty(240) hours of operation. It also can be powered by the included adapter.

For greater portability, Latitude can be operated or charged with any USB power source, such as a portable battery pack or a car USB port.

The sleek, compact design of Latitude includes a contoured weighing pan and adjustable feet. Coloured keys allow fast recognition of the most frequently used functions.

Cruiser CKT bench checkweighing scales deliver powerful performance and exceptional value for industrial applications. CKT models offer capacities from 4 kilograms to 48 kilograms and readabilities from 0.05 grams to 2 grams. The easy-to-clean, heavy-duty stainless steel platform features contours to help keep items on the pan.

The keypad is sealed, so dirt or spills can be wiped up quickly. Colour-coded keys allow fast recognition of the most frequently used buttons. Quickly enter known sample weights on the full numeric keypad. Checkweighing with the Cruiser CKT can accelerate the packaging process, reducing waste and decreasing overages. To simplify checkweighing tasks, the CKT’s backlit display changes colour, showing if the weight is over, under, or within the set limit. Cruiser CKT offers load cell protection, helping prevent damage to internal components due to overloads.

Store checkweighing limits to improve efficiency in production or warehouse applications. The preset tare function speeds up repetitive weighing tasks, while memory accumulation lets you total the results. It’s easy to verify the number of pieces or amount of product in a package before shipping. An RS-232 connection is standard on the Cruiser CKT, while an optional USB interface is available. To ensure optimum weighing results, the level indicator and non-slip adjustable feet ensure proper scale setup.

Cruiser CKT is powered by AC adapter or rechargeable battery, making it ideal for production, warehouse, or field use. The Cruiser series includes CKT checkweighing scales and CCT counting scales.

We’ve expanded our Highland precision balance range to include NTEP-approved models.

Highland approved balances contain practical features that simplify legal-for-trade measurement in commercial applications where products are sold by weight. They meet requirements for retail use in the jewelry and pharmaceutical industries, and also in the rapidly expanding medical and recreational botanical markets.

Approved Highland models are available with capacities up to five thousand grams. Data communication is easy with the included RS-232 and USB interfaces. This means you can quickly transmit your results to printers or computers.

Powered by AC adapter or rechargeable battery, the Highland approved balance can be operated even if electricity is unavailable.

An internal ShockProtect feature helps prevent damage to the balance from accidental overloads.

Adam Equipment’s dual-range Raven scale provides efficient retail weighing and price computing in a variety of settings.

The Raven features a sleek, lightweight design and capacities up to thirty-thousand grams or sixty-six pounds.

With sturdy ABS plastic housing and removable stainless steel pan, the Raven can be quickly cleaned between sales.

Back-lit LCDs on the front and rear of the scale show weight, unit price and total price. These results are simultaneously visible by the operator and the customer, allowing price and quantity verification.

The easy-to-use keypad is sealed to keep out dirt and spills. To provide fast configuration and operation, the Raven offers 40 PLU memories.

In accordance with OIML standards, memory keys on OIML-approved models are disabled for weighing.

The Raven is powered by rechargeable battery or AC adapter, so it can be operated at outdoor stands or in farmers’ markets.

Adjustable non-slip feet can be locked to help stabilize the unit on counter-tops.

Raven scales feature EU Type Examination certification and are approved by NTEP and OIML for use in trade.

Experience soaring efficiency and productivity with the Raven.

Solis semi-micro, analytical and precision balances are an outstanding choice for complex lab weighing tasks. With a high-resolution graphic display and intuitive features, Solis is ideal for research and quality assurance labs; science education; precision counting; and manufacturing applications.

Available in a wide selection of models, Solis offers capacities up to 8200 grams and readabilities of 2, 3, 4 and 5 decimal places.

Dual range semi-micro models boast capacities of 120 grams and 220 grams with readabilities of 0.01 milligram in the fine range. Solis offers the unique combination of high capacity and analytical readability.

Data is readily visible on the amply sized graphic display. Multilingual capability facilitates use in various regions. Quickly check for overloads on the capacity tracker located prominently on the left side of the display. The Solis keypad features easy-to-read buttons and helpful navigation arrows.

Solis includes seven built-in applications to simplify everyday lab work. Three body types accommodate objects of different sizes and ingredients in varying capacities.

With Solis, formulation is simple. After entering the function, use pre-configured settings or manually add items for a recipe. With the manual setting, the balance keeps track of the total weight and value of each item. Solis can store up to 99 recipes.

Achieve high levels of counting accuracy when tracking and recording inventory. Select predefined sample sizes or manually enter the value of a single piece. Solis gives the total count, total weight, and the average weight of one piece.

Semi-micro, analytical and milligram models have draft shields with sliding glass doors. This boosts accuracy by eliminating the effects of breezes and reducing static electrical interference with the balance.

An RS-232 interface is included for speedy connection to computers and printers. Printouts provided by the balance include date and time, essential for traceability and data tracking within Good Laboratory Practice guidelines.

External calibration allows verification and adjustment with weights. Certain models feature internal calibration. To help prevent theft, Solis also features a slot that accommodates an optional Kensington-type lock and cable.

This printable education experiment contains a detailed teachers' guide and answer sheet, student reading sheet and question sheet for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This lesson is appropriate for grades 7-12. Parts of the lesson may be appropriate for grades 5-6.

Subjects

Science as inquiry, mathematical measurement, and data analysis.

Purpose(s)

1. 1. To explain how to perform density determination
2. 2. To explain Archimedes’ Principle and the measurement of mass and volume of irregularly shaped samples.
3. 3. To expose students to common measuring instruments used in the lab.

Please note: Since this lesson plan was written the ACBplus 3000 has been superseded by the Highland HCB 3001.

Activity Overview

This lesson is designed to easily and quickly integrate into existing curriculum. It comes complete with a high-interest reading passage, standards correlations, vocabulary lists, plus extensions and assessment tools with answer keys. This TOPICtutor is appropriate for remedial, review, reinforcement, or extension purposes.

TOPIC Tutor 1 Density Determination and Archimedes Ah-Ha Moment (PDF)

This printable education experiment contains both a detailed teachers' guide, and a student section with question and answer sheets for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This experiment is designed for ages 13-18. It can be adapted for physical science or introductory chemistry classes.

Subjects

1. Science as inquiry.
2. Physical science.
3. Data analysis, probability and discrete mathematics.
4. Energy diagrams for reactions.
5. State functions.

Purpose(s)

1. To show how the enthalpy of a reaction changes when the reaction’s is modified.
2. To apply the Law of Conservation of energy to a series of related reactions.
3. To use an energy diagram to explain Hess's Law.
4. To interpret Hess's Law.

Activity Overview

Chemical reactions can be classified into major categories of reactions: synthesis, decomposition, single replacement, double replacement, and combustion. This lab illustrates different types of reactions. Students will write a balanced equation for each reaction and predict the identity of the products. After writing a balanced chemical equation for the reaction, they will respond to additional questions.

MASSIVE REACTIONS (PDF)

This printable education experiment contains a detailed teachers' guide, student information and question sheets, and answer sheets for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This experiment is designed for ages 15-18. It can be adapted for physical science or introductory chemistry classes, but it is most appropriate for advanced classes.

Subjects

1. Applying the Law of Conservation of Energy to Hess's Law.
2. Enthalpy of a reaction (∆H) and thermochemical equations.
3. Calculating the energy change for a reaction when the energy change cannot be measured directly.
4. Energy diagrams for reactions.
5. State functions.

Purpose(s)

1. To show how the enthalpy of a reaction changes when the reaction’s is modified.
2. To apply the Law of Conservation of energy to a series of related reactions.
3. To use an energy diagram to explain Hess's Law.
4. To interpret Hess's Law.

Activity Overview

The heat of formation of magnesium oxide is not easily measured in the laboratory. In order to obtain the enthalpy for forming magnesium oxide, two related reactions will be conducted in the lab. Summing the equations leads to the net overall equation, 2Mg + O2 -> 2MgO. Hess's Law states that if a series of equations can be summed to give the net equation for a reaction, then the energy change associated with each equation can also be summed to give the net energy change for the overall reaction.

This lesson is designed to be easily and quickly integrated into existing curriculum. It comes complete with a two-page student hand-out, standards correlations, vocabulary lists, plus extensions and assessment tools with answer keys. This experiment is appropriate for remedial, review, reinforcement or extension purposes.

KEEP YOUR EYES ON THE JOULES - A Hess-Law Experiment (PDF)

This printable education experiment contains a detailed teachers' guide, and three-page student worksheet for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This experiment is designed for ages 12-14. It can be adapted for physical science orintroductory chemistry classes.

Subject

Rocks and Minerals; Weathering, Soil and Erosion; Science as Inquiry; and Data Analysis.

Purpose(s)

1. 1. To gain experience in collecting mass readings and averaging a set of data.
2. 2. To graph data and find the slope of the graph.
3. 3. To understand the relationship between mass and volume. (density = mass/volume).
4. 4. To compare the density of different sand samples

SOIL CHEMISTRY - Dealing with Data Can Get Rough! (PDF)

This printable education experiment contains a detailed teachers' guide, 2-page student information sheet, and single-page student question worksheet for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This experiment is designed for ages 14-18. It can be adapted for ages 11-13.

Subject

Gases and the Kinetic-Molecular Theory, science as inquiry and data analysis.

Purpose(s)

1. 1. To demonstrate the use of the Ideal Gas Law, Daltons’ Law of Partial Pressures, and the Kinetic Theory of Gases.
2. 2. To determine the molar mass and formula of a gas from the measured properties of gases.
3. 3. To have students analyze data that has been collected using laboratory equipment (balances).

HAVE A BLAST FINDING MOLAR MASS - An Ideal Gas Experiment (PDF)

Age Level

This experiment is designed for ages 14-18. It can be adapted for ages 10-13.

Subject

Chemical reactions, chemistry, science as inquiry and data analysis.

Purpose(s)

1. 1. To demonstrate the Law of Conservation of Matter.
2. 2. To dispel common misconceptions about combustion reactions.
3. 3. To have students analyze data that has been collected using laboratory equipment (balances).

THE BURNING QUESTION - A Conservation of Matter Experiment (PDF)

This printable education experiment contains a detailed teachers' guide and single-page student worksheet for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This activity in its existing format is appropriate for ages 10-18.

Subject

Physical science, life science/biology.

Purpose(s)

1. 1.To demonstrate the osmosis process
2. 2. To demonstrate changes in properties of matter.
3. 3. To expose students to common measuring instruments used in the lab.

EGG OBSERVATIONS - An Osmosis Eggsperiment (PDF)

This printable education experiment contains a detailed teachers' guide and single-page student worksheet for printing and distributing in the classroom.

Age Level

This activity in its existing format is appropriate for ages 14-18. It can be adapted for ages 10-13.

Subject

Physical science, chemistry.

Purpose(s)

1. To illustrate the distinction between intensive and extensive properties.
2. To expose students to common measuring instruments used in the lab.

THATSA PASTA! - A Delicious Density Experiment (PDF)

She wanted an affordable balance that came with a warranty and was easy to use. Most importantly, she needed a balance that was durable enough to withstand demanding student use. After careful research, she decided on Adam Equipment’s Highland portable precision balances.

Five years ago, chemistry teacher Lisa Tozzi was on a mission. She needed to find precision balances for her chemistry classrooms, and not just any balance would do. Tozzi serves as chemistry department chair at Westwood High School in Mesa, Arizona, a suburb of Phoenix.

Download full PDF by clicking the image above

Finding a Solution

She wanted an affordable balance that came with a warranty and was easy to use. Most importantly, she needed a balance that was durable enough to withstand demanding student use. After careful research, she decided on Adam Equipment’s Highland portable precision balances.

Tozzi mentioned that their school bought a few Highlands initially to see if they’d work out for their school experiments. After that, the school went ahead and purchased additional balances, bringing their total up to 18.

Sparking Their Interest

Students start using the Highland balances on the very first day in Tozzi’s class, which consists primarily of juniors. Activities include examining the law of conservation of mass; density assessments; isotope lab experiments; stoichiometry; investigating molarity; and determining empirical formulas.

Schools often have limited storage space, and the design of the Highland allows the balances to be stacked conveniently and safely in storage. This was an important consideration for Tozzi, who had to think about where she was going to put 18 balances.

“[The Highland] was just what we needed. They’re easy to store, they’re readily accessible, and they take up far less space than other balances.”

– Lisa Tozzi, chemistry department chair at Westwood High School in Mesa, Arizona

The Highland offers plenty of user-friendly features that make it an excellent choice for classrooms. Simple for students to operate, the Highland contains color-coded keys that allow fast, easy identification of the most frequently used buttons.

Highland Makes the Grade

“I like how clearly marked [Highland] balances are. I can easily tell students how to tare the balance just by referring to the yellow button. Once they learn how to operate the Highland, students can quickly begin to perform the assigned experiments”

– Lisa Tozzi, chemistry department chair at Westwood High School in Mesa, Arizona

For many of the students, this is their first experience with an electronic balance, since science and biology classes generally use triple-beam balances in their lessons. Students enjoy working with the Highlands, Tozzi said. On occasion, they’ve been known to expand their research a bit beyond the assigned tasks, she added.

Tozzi said she is very pleased with her Highland balances, and has recommended them to other department chairs in the district.

To learn more about the Highland please visit https://www.adamequipment.com/highland-portable-precision-balances.

Click the image above to download full PDF

Blastoff is a busy company that operates throughout the UK. They serve a wide variety of businesses and locations, and have many different jobs to accomplish, such as cleaning, paint stripping, or coating floors.

They needed a single quality product to handle various weighing tasks and changing conditions for many of their services; a versatile scale. But the scale they needed also had to be sturdy enough to clean off all the epoxy resins to ensure the keys remain usable and the display visible.

Blastoff takes pride in its work and uses quality materials to create the perfect surface. That means the business has high costs for expensive resins and paints, so they sought a way to reduce waste, which led to tighter cost control.

Challenges

Blastoff is a busy company that operates throughout the UK. They serve a wide variety of businesses and locations, and have many different jobs to accomplish, such as cleaning, paint stripping, or coating floors.

They needed a single quality product to handle various weighing tasks and changing conditions for many of their services; a versatile scale. But the scale they needed also had to be sturdy enough to clean off all the epoxy resins to ensure the keys remain usable and the display visible.

They also needed a scale that is easy to use, since they were replacing old scales and had to make sure learning to use the CBK 32 wouldn’t take too long.

How the CBK 32 Helped

The scale is versatile, yet easy to use, which is ideal for Blastoff, since they have to accomplish many different tasks for various people, businesses and locations. The CBK also can also handle the heavy usage that comes with a busy company.

The stainless steel pan can be quickly removed and cleaned, a necessity when weighing epoxy resins. It also provides a large surface for weighing and counting. Overload protection prevents accidentally breaking the scale, while the sealed keypad is protected against dirt and spills. The color-coded keys speed up weighing, and the large display is highly visible, which is ideal for Blastoff, who works in variable conditions.

Data communication is enabled via the included RS-232 port, making inventory recording easy. CBK scales also have an auto zero tracking feature, perfect for repetitive weighing tasks. The rechargeable battery means the scale can be carried and used at any location, so the weighing can be done at the job site.

Pride in Quality

Blastoff’s website is filled with photos and articles about their work. They take pride in their expertise and are glad to showcase their services. They have a blog featuring various jobs they completed, and their website has different sections outlining the many services they provide. Blastoff works everywhere throughout the UK, from warehouses to industrial sites, from homes to garages. The company heard about Adam Equipment online, and decided to replace their old scales with the CBK 32 to reduce waste. Blastoff uses epoxy resin flooring because it’s hardworking, seamless, easy to clean, chemical and slip resistant, and it is ideal for walkways and forklift truck routes through factories.

For more information on the CBK, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/cbk-bench-checkweighing-scales.

The Adam AZextra is affordable and easy to use, which is perfect for the small, family-owned sweets shop, and can handle the volume of orders that come in every day. Its simple design and colour coded keys ensure a fast operation for more satisfied customers.

Download full PDF by clicking image above

Challenges

Roobertin Herkku is a family owned shop, they needed a product that was easy to use because they could not spend a lot of time training. The product had to be affordable since they did not have the funds of a large corporation to back them up. Despite this, the scale also had to be versatile enough to weigh an ever widening selection of candy and chocolate, and to switch between prices without holding up the line. It was important to get a scale with trade approval, as that would lend added legitimacy to the their business.

How the AZextra Helped

The scale is affordable and easy to use, which is perfect for the small, family-owned sweets shop, and can handle the volume of orders that come in every day. Its simple design and colour coded keys ensure a fast operation for more satisfied customers.

The AZextra is legal for trade, ensuring that Roobertin Herkku continues to foster the trust between them and their customers. It also makes changing unit prices easy and fast, thanks to PLUs that can store up to 103 products, a great asset for a candy shop such as Roobertin Herkku, which boasts of a very extensive selection of products.

"The price was good, the design simple enough and it is easy to use. We use it to weigh about 50 bags of candy every day"

– Roobertin Herkku

Time, date, weight, unit price and total cost transmit easily to printers, allowing the store to keep records, track orders, and perform purchasing and inventory tasks. The preset tare function speeds up transactions where the same bags are used to weigh different candy, as does the zero tracking.

Small Business, Big Heart

When Martti and Marja decided to reopen the shop, they weren’t sure it would be profitable. But thanks to a great entrepreneurial spirit, amazing selection, the AZextra and family love infused in the business, the colourful location has attracted a lot of attention on various blogs, local guides and even from the show Travel Man thanks to great reviews and enthusiasm from both owners and customers.

Learn more about Roobertin Herkku on their website, and follow them on social media to see beautiful pictures of their products. For more information on Roobertin Herkku, visit www.roobertinherkku.fi.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment is a family business as well, and is thrilled to have provided the ideal weighing solution to the trendy shop. For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewelry markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia, Germany and China to provide product support and speedy delivery. www.adamequipment.com Since 1972, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. For more information on AZextra, visit (on our UK site) www.adamequipment.co.uk/azextra.

About Roobertin Herkku

Roobertin Herkku is a family-owned candy shop based in the Punavuori-district of Helsinki, Finland. It was originally opened by Helinä in 1963. They use the AZextra scale to weigh about 50 bags of candy every day.

Winemaking is a multi-faceted process with variables in each step. Grape pressing is one of the more important tasks. How and when it’s done can affect the flavor of the finished product, and also can play a key role in producing a higher yield. Winery managers know that efficiency during grape pressing helps increase production and ultimately boosts profitability.

Download full PDF by clicking the image above

From Vine to Wine: The Crushing Saga of a Grape

After the initial crushing, pressing and de-sludging are complete, the remaining residue of skin and seeds is called the “grape marc” or “grape pomace.” Vintners have discovered that sometimes enough moisture remains in the grape marc to warrant another pressing, resulting in additional useable liquid from that particular batch. To determine if it’s worth the effort, they can verify the moisture content in a sample of the grape marc.

A Toast to Efficiency

Adam Equipment’s PMB moisture analyzer provides a rapid alternative to the time-consuming task of oven testing. The PMB speeds up the drying process and eliminates the possibility of burning a sample and getting false results.

The PMB features a single circular 400-watt energy-efficient halogen bulb, which heats the specimen in 1 °C selectable increments. A large, circular heating chamber is designed to heat samples evenly. Three heating options provide the flexibility to customize temperatures and test methods. The standard setting heats to one temperature in one step. For the ramp setting, the user chooses a temperature and sets the amount of time for the heat to reach that temperature. The step setting lets the user program up to three temperatures and times at each temperature.

For wine production control, the process is simple. Evenly spread approximately 20g of the grape marc on the aluminum sample pan and run the sample at 100 °C on the single heat setting. Temperature in the weighing chamber is monitored by a sensor. As the temperature approaches the final value, the heating bulb cycles on and off to maintain the designated temperature. Drying takes between 30-120 minutes, depending on the amount of residual moisture in the grape marc.

The initial temperature increase happens quickly, taking about a minute to reach 90 percent of the final temperature, and then another 30 seconds to reach the final figure. This method keeps the temperature from rising above the set point, eliminating possible damage to the sample. To monitor progress, PMB provides current results at set intervals.

Varietal Versions of the PMB

Adam offers three models — PMB 53 features a capacity of 50g and readability of 0.01% / 0.001g; PMB 163 features a capacity of 160g and readability of 0.01% / 0.001g; and PMB 202 features a capacity of 200g and readability of 0.05% / 0.01g.

Connecting with other devices is simple, as the PMB offers both a USB port and RS-232 interface. Users can log or print information, communicate with computers or transmit test programs and results. There is no need for additional software to take readings, giving users freedom to collect data in any location. Internal memory stores up to 99 test results. Save extra results to a flash drive or computer to quickly verify and compare readings. PMB retains and stores set-up information, saving the time and effort of having to re-enter the information in the next analysis.

An ergonomic design features handles on both sides for ready access, and a pan lifter is provided for placing and changing samples. The intuitively designed keypad features color-coded keys that highlight important functions.

Don’t Let Profits Wither on the Vine

Winemakers worldwide have developed a crush on the easy-to-operate PMB moisture analyzer. The PMB is a valuable tool that can help vintners improve product consistency and increase yield, resulting in production efficiency and higher overall profits.

To learn more about the PMB, visit www.adamequipment.com/pmb.

Durable and versatile, concrete provides a rock-solid foundation

Concrete is a composite material. That means it comprises several ingredients, including fine and coarse aggregates, water, cement and air. There are a myriad variables in every batch of concrete. Aggregates usually make up the bulk of the volume in concrete. Fine aggregate is sand; coarse aggregate is gravel or crushed stone. It’s the combination and types of the fine and coarse aggregates that determine the density of the concrete. And while water is an essential ingredient, too much can cause quality problems.

The ideal concrete mix contains just enough water to hydrate the cement, which binds the ingredients. Without adequate hydration, the concrete can be difficult or impossible to pour.

As the concrete hardens, the water evaporates, leaving voids or spaces in the concrete. The size and number of voids are directly related to the amount of water used to hydrate the cement. A greater number of voids (and the larger they are) can lead to a lower quality of concrete, possibly with defects that could compromise structural integrity.

Test concrete with the Nimbus to verify quality

Construction standards are state-regulated and materials must meet or exceed them. Workers are able to verify a material’s quality by performing a variety of tests for density, compressive strength, flexural strength, tensile strength, elasticity, permeability, thermal expansion, drying shrinkage and heat capacity. Adam Equipment’s Nimbus precision balance provides an easy and accurate way to determine the specific gravity of cured samples.

To perform specific gravity testing using the Nimbus, the balance is placed on a tabletop with a cutout or on a stand designed specifically for this test. A basket is attached to a wire that hangs from the balance’s weigh-below hook and suspended over a container of water beneath the balance.

After placing the sample material on top of the balance, the weight is recorded automatically by the balance. Next, the sample is placed in the basket and lowered into the container of water. The balance records the weight of the submerged sample, and using both measurements, intuitive soft ware calculates the sample’s specific gravity.

Manufacturer recommends Nimbus for materials testing in construction projects

One company that sings the praises of the Nimbus for testing concrete is Humboldt Manufacturing. Located in Schiller Park, Ill., Humboldt manufactures and distributes equipment for materials testing. Many of Humboldt’s customers are in the road construction industry, including contractors, consultants, transportation department employees, and lab workers.

Humboldt produces its own line of testing equipment, but offers products from other manufacturers such as Adam Equipment to provide a wider selection to customers, according to Humboldt’s Director of Marketing Robin Bailey. In many cases, Humboldt recommends the Nimbus for testing concrete. There are several reasons for that, Bailey said. Durability and price are the big advantages with the Nimbus, since users oft en work with dirty, heavy substances and want a product that is able to withstand rigorous use.

“When you’re dealing with concrete blocks, obviously things are going to get scratched and dented. People realize they’re just going to get messy. The nice thing about Adam’s scales is that they hold up. That’s a big deal.”

– Robin Bailey, Marketing Director, Humboldt Manufacturing

Ideal for measuring samples, Nimbus provides speedy results when assessing multiple quantities in a short time. To accommodate bulky or heavy samples, Nimbus precision balances with 0.001g readability have a removable draft shield to help minimize the effects of indoor air movement or outdoor breezes during field testing. This ensures the Nimbus will reliably deliver precise, consistent measurements in any setting.

Adam Equipment’s Nimbus precision balance is designed with features that are ideal for performing specific gravity testing on concrete or other construction materials. The Nimbus boasts overload protection to safeguard the balance against damage from excessive weight. All-metal construction and large, stainless steel pan make the Nimbus suitable for use in the field where dirt and grime are commonplace, as well as in the test lab.

For more information on Nimbus precision balances, visit www.adamequipment.com/nimbus-precision-balances.

PRS checked around and did its homework, finally arriving at the decision to purchase the Dune. According to Marc Quigley, PRS spokesman, the balance provided the right combination of value and quality for its needs.

“We were looking for a rugged, simple, and affordable device that could take some punishment in our production system, the Dune seemed like the smart choice.”

– Marc Quigley, PRS spokesman

Click the image above to download our full PDF

Music to your ears — value and versatility

The Dune offers features that many other scales don’t have for a far lower price, said Tom Storey, Adam Equipment vice president.

“Its lightweight design and portability were key factors in their choice,”

– Tom Storey, Adam Equipment vice president

The Dune can be either battery-powered or plugged into an outlet with its included AC adapter. This means it can work anywhere in the factory, which made the Dune attractive to PRS. Not only that, it’s simple to operate and takes up very little space on the bench. The Dune offers a large, back-lit display that’s clear and very easy to read, which is ideal for PRS.

“It’s perfect for our needs, and our workers really like the simplicity and speed of operation. The fact that it’s easy to use is great. It makes our workers more productive, which means we can focus on the quality of the finish. That’s something we’re known for with our guitars”

– Marc Quigley, PRS spokesman

Tuned in to quality and precision

Founded by Paul Reed Smith in September 1985, PRS prides itself in producing guitars that are well-known in the industry, guitars that are not only musical instruments but also collectable works of art. Some of the more notable artists who have played PRS guitars include Jimmy Buffett , Al DiMeola, Carlos Santana, John Fogerty, Axl Rose (Guns and Roses), Stephen Stills, Daryl Hall (Hall and Oates), Emily Saliers (Indigo Girls), Joe Walsh (The Eagles), Melissa Etheridge, Michael Bolton, Richie Sambora (Bon Jovi), Ricky Skaggs and Ted Nugent.

Finishing guitars: the grand finale

Back at PRS, a worker called a “pastewood grain filler” sets up the Dune in preparation for measuring the custom mixed pigment that tints the finishes for its guitars. The scale comes into play during the first stages of the finish process, where the finish is applied to add color, beauty, and function to the guitars’ open grain woods. Once the work is completed in the woodshop, pigment is applied to a neutral filler that is tinted to specifications and carefully applied to each guitar by hand.

“We use the scale to accurately measure pigments for our grain filling process. The Dune’s accuracy is important, because that’s what helps us ensure the consistency in our colors.”

– Marc Quigley, PRS spokesman

Brown and black mixes are the most popular tints because they subtly enhance the natural grain and beauty of the wood, Quigley added. The pigment needs to be very precisely measured to obtain just the right color. That’s where the Dune shines. Its accuracy is unrivaled for its low cost and you just can’t find a better balance for the price.

Ringing endorsements like those coming from PRS are familiar music to Adam’s ears. Adam Equipment has been producing a variety of scales and balances since 1972, and this application is just one of many success stories bandied about through the years. The company has worked in tandem with other manufacturers and distributors, providing scales and balances to suit any need that arises and to accommodate every possible application imaginable.

Learn more about PRS guitars at www.prsguitars.com.

Visit www.adamequipment.com/dune-compact-balances to learn more about the Dune compact balance.

Dowload a PDF Copy by Clicking the Image Above

These aren’t ordinary baby bears. They are very lucky bears, rescued from a bleak future at a bear bile farm. These farms harvest bear bile for use in traditional medicine to cure ailments ranging from headaches to hemorrhoids, and sore eyes to liver problems.

Adult bears are slowly dying from bile extraction procedures. Cubs that are too immature to produce adequate quantities of bile are slaughtered for their whole gall bladders and paws. The process of bile extraction is crude and painful, oft en resulting in dangerous leakage of bile into the body and a slow, agonizing death from peritonitis.

Preliminary veterinary checks

Called moon bears because of the moon-like markings on their chests, the Asiatic black bears are highly sought-aft er for their bile and are dwindling in number as a result. Across Asia, thousands of bears live a life of torture on bear farms. They are confined in cages for as long as 30 years, causing physical and mental suffering.

“The bears are subjected to cruel, inhumane methods to remove the bile from their gall bladders. Our Moon Bear Rescue Centers strive to end bear farming and the bile trade.”

– Jill Robinson, Animals Asia’s founder and CEO

CPWplus measures growth

Once the bears arrive at the sanctuary, they are logged in and given an initial check-up by veterinarians to establish any severe medical conditions. They are taken to quarantine, where they are given water and food, which consists of fruit and browse (tender shoots, twigs and leaves of trees and shrubs).

The next day, the vet team performs a more in-depth examination, weighing the animals, documenting injuries and ailments, prescribing medications and scheduling the necessary surgeries. Vets also repair or remove teeth that are broken from years of bar-biting, or deliberately cut back by farmers. Their eyes are checked, and their blood is analyzed. If the bears are injured or need to undergo surgery, they are monitored in recovery cages.

When the bears are ready, they are moved into a bear house with a grassy enclosure, Robinson said. They are grouped based on age, temperament and available space and are gradually integrated with other bears, learning to be bears again. Once the bears become accustomed to their new surroundings, they enjoy swimming, wrestling, climbing and playing.

Their daily diet includes fruit, vegetables, nuts, honey, dog food and a variety of browse. The cubs are weighed frequently, as much as daily when they are very small, Robinson said.

“This ensures proper growth and the daily adjustment of milk formula. When they get a little older, they are weighed three times a week, and eventually reduced to once weekly or monthly. When the bears are full-grown, they are weighed quarterly to monitor their general health. The size of the scale is ideal, as it is small enough to move around easily. It’s also helpful that the CPWplus accurately reports small changes in weight, crucial when a cub is tiny.”

– Jill Robinson, Animals Asia’s founder and CEO

According to Tom Storey, Adam Equipment marketing director, this particular model of the scale is ideal because it can handle a maximum weight of 35 kg, adequate for a growing bear cub. Not only that, it has features designed to help workers deal with weighing wiggling cubs while trying to get an accurate weight.

“The CPWplus provides dynamic weighing, along with a hold function. This can be set to lock in the weight on the screen.”

– Tom Storey, Adam Equipment Marketing Director

Generally, the cubs cooperate at weighing time as long as the treats keep coming, Officer said with a chuckle.

To find more information about CPWplus scales, visit www.adamequipment.co.uk/cpwplus-weighing-scales.

Offering superb precision, Equinox is our most advanced line of balances. The Equinox series features semi-micro, analytical, and precision models with capacities up to 8200 grams.

The balances provides readabilities of 0.01 milligram, 1 milligram, and 0.1 gram. Combining high capacity and analytical readability, Equinox models with capacities of 410 and 510 grams have readability of 0.1 milligram.

A color touchscreen display provides intuitive operation with icon driven menus and readily accessible applications and functions. The 5-inch screen is generously sized, offering 800x480 pixel resolution for excellent visibility. Customize the display by choosing 1 of 5 color presets to change the appearance of the buttons. You can select black or white for thebackground of your display.

Three body types accommodate ingredients in varying capacities and objects of different sizes.

We designed Equinox with a 3000 item database so you can store and recall items, sample weights, and checkweighing limits.

Equinox features 9 built-in applications to simplify everyday lab work.

• Using the formulation and recipe function, recall a stored formulation from the database or manually add items and track the ingredients of each item.
• With the parts counting mode achieve high levels of accuracy when tracking and recording inventory.
• Equinox guides you through the steps to perform counting tasks. Choose the sample size, enter a unit weight, or select parts from the database.
• The checkweighing function helps verify that samples are within a set weight range. Simply set high and low limits or recall saved parameters from the database.

Equinox provides an RS-232 interface and a USB port accommodates a memory card to save results.

You can print out calibration data for trace-ability. Printouts provided by the balance include date and time, essential for trace-ability and data tracking within Good Laboratory Practice guidelines.

Equinox balances with 3, 4 or 5 place settings are equipped with a glass draft shield. This boosts accuracy by eliminating drafts and educing static electricity that could interfere with the balance.

Your balance is an important investment. That's why the Equinox incorporates security features for added protection. Password control prevents unauthorized access to the balance, ensuring settings remain unchanged. Equinox contains a slot that accommodates an optional Kensington-type lock and cable to help prevent theft.

Cruiser CCT bench counting scales deliver powerful performance for industrial counting and check counting for your industrial applications. CCT models offer capacities from 4 kilograms to 48 kilograms and readabilitiies of 0.05 grams to 2 grams.

Sturdy construction means Cruiser scales can withstand the demands of factories and manufacturing facilities. All CCT models have a heavy-duty grade 3-0-4 stainless steel platform with contours to help items stay on the pan.

Colour-coded keys allow fast recognition of the most frequently used buttons. Quickly enter known sample weights on the full numeric keypad.

Cruiser CCT is ideal for inventory and stock control tasks or check counting during packaging processes. It’s easy to verify the number of pieces in a package or in a lot before shipping.

Store and recall up to one-hundred-ninety-nine P-L-Us or piece weights to improve efficiency in production or warehouse applications.

Cruiser counting scales have three separate displays to simultaneously show piece weight, total weight and piece count.

RS-232 connection is standard on all Cruiser CCT counting models. Optional USB interface is available.

To ensure optimum weighing results, the level indicator and non-slip adjustable feet ensure proper scale setup.

Load cell protection helps prevent damage to internal components due to overloading. The Cruiser series includes CKT checkweighing scales and CCT counting scales.

Download our Full PDF By Clicking the Link Above

Shelton teaches at Newfound Regional High School in Bristol, N.H., where his students were making solutions for a chemistry lab activity. Class was over, the bell rang, and the students began to clean up their equipment. An energetic student with a massive backpack popped into the room, eager to show his friends a game on his phone. As he spun around, his backpack swiped across one of the tables, sending everything on the table flying into the air. Unfortunately, that included a lab balance.

The law of gravity

It appears that Isaac Newton was right: what goes up must come down. Test tubes, racks and the balance succumbed to gravity, crashing to the ground three feet below. The balance skidded several feet and lost its pan after bouncing on the floor.

Survival of the fittest

Shelton worriedly assessed the damage, thinking the balance was a goner. And the laws of physics were in agreement: this particular combination of energy, matter and gravity should have resulted in a broken balance. But Lady Luck stepped in, and Shelton reported that the balance survived the fall with no dents, cracks or other ill effects whatsoever.

“It was the only thing that didn’t break,” he said. “It’s really a remarkable device. The calibration is perfect, and the balance holds the value with no drifting. It’s like nothing ever happened to it.”

– Roger Shelton, chemistry teacher Newfound Regional High School Bristol, New Hampshire

Core makes the grade with durability and practicality

As luck would have it, the balance happened to be an Adam Equipment Core portable compact balance, one of two purchased by the school for Shelton’s chemistry classroom. Constructed of durable ABS housing, the balance is designed to tolerate demanding classroom use, which apparently includes being knocked off a table onto the floor.

The Core also is outfitted with a special patented feature called ShockProtect® that safeguards the load cell, so the balance is able to withstand accidental encounters with wayward backpacks.

“That balance was worth every penny that we paid for it. We will never consider purchasing any other balance than an Adam Equipment balance. Keep ’em coming.”

– Shelton

Compact and easy to use, the Core portable compact balance is unrivaled for value and features by any other comparable balance.

Every teacher knows that space can be tight in classrooms, and the Core provides an excellent solution for that issue. Neatly and efficiently stack several Core portable compact balances to maximise equipment storage areas. And you won’t have to worry about damage to the weighing mechanism, thanks to the balance’s unique housing design and sturdy construction.

Whether it’s in a college or at a high school, many science classes include lessons that teach students how to figure out the density and specific gravity of objects. To perform these determinations, a hook is included with the Core for weighing below the balance.

School budgets are always tight, and teachers know that it’s prudent to protect the school’s property. Balances are a valuable investment for classrooms, and keeping them safe is important. To help deter theft , the Core is outfitted with a security slot that is compatible with an optional Kensington-type lock and cable.

For easy operation anywhere in the classroom, the Core can be powered by battery or an AC adapter, which is included with the balance.

For more information on Core precision balances, visit www.adamequipment.com/core-portable-compact-balances.

With capacities that can accommodate ten-thousand pounds or forty-five hundred kilograms, PT platform scales provide a durable weighing solution for industrial, manufacturing, commercial and mining applications.

Rugged construction and low-profile design simplify loading and unloading pallets, crates and large containers. Perfectly sized for a pallet, the PT can be situated in a recessed pit. Optional ramps provide easy access and are tailor-made to fit the exact size of each platform.

PT platform offers features to help increase stability and ensure safety. For improved traction, the large steel base contains a diamond-plate textured surface. Four sturdy levelling feet are adjustable to compensate for uneven weighing surfaces. The PT is supported by a reinforced frame beneath the platform, allowing the scale to accommodate substantial loads.

The PT comes with a ten-foot-long shielded cable and is compatible with a variety of indicators, including Adam Equipment’s GK or AE 402 indicators. The AE402 indicator is constructed of stainless steel and is sealed for use in dusty or wet environments. The GK indicator offers a full keypad for entering preset tares or samples for parts counting.

Approved PT platform scales are ideal for use in legal for trade applications. Models are available with NTEP, NRCS and EC-typed approvals for the United States, Europe and South Africa.

Strong and reliable, PT platform scales capably perform heavy-duty weighing and counting tasks in demanding settings worldwide.

Adam Equipment’s PTS pallet truck scales are a safe and quick solution for weighing loaded pallets in shipping and receiving settings or warehouses.

A heavy-duty steel pallet fork makes large loads simple to manage, move and weigh.

Using a powerful hydraulic pump, the PTS lifts pallets up to seven and a half inches or 192 millimeters off the ground. With a capacity of 4,400 pounds or 2,000 kilograms, the PTS can measure accurately to one pound or 0.5 kilograms.

Operation is simple, as the indicator features large keys and an easy-to-read backlit display with oversized digits. The sealed PTS indicator is totally protected from dust that can be found in industrial environments.

The PTS features non-marring wheels and a zero turn radius, for easy maneuvering.

An RS-232 interface facilitates connection with computers, data loggers and printers.

The internal rechargeable battery allows the PTS to be operated in locations without electricity.

To safely measure heavy pallets, the PTS scale from Adam Equipment delivers fast and precise readings, saving time and money.

Transcription

Video Assembly Guide

Anti-Vibration Table

Welcome to Adam Equipment’s step-by-step video guide for assembling the AVT anti-vibration table.

Assembling the Inner Frame

1. Open the packing box and remove the three layers of foam packing.
Lower Layer
Middle Layer
Top Layer

2. Remove the left inner side rail from the top packing layer. Remove the granite supporting rail from the middle packing layer. Remove the right inner side rail from the bottom packing layer.

3. Remove the accessories from their bag. This should include a hex key, fourteen M8 x40 (em eight by forty) screws and four rubber grommets.

4. Attach the two inner side rails to the granite support frame at the four corners using four screws. For both of the rails, the side that contains the bottom screw hole should face the same direction.

5. Attach the bottom supporting rail to the inner side rails using two screws.

6. Fit the four rubber grommets onto the screws located at the top of the support rails for the granite.

7. Use the knobs under the rails to lower the grommet adjustment bolts. Align the four rubber grommet support bolts so the rubber grommets rest on the rail.

8. Use the hex key to open the wooden box containing the granite slab, and remove the lid.

9. Place the granite slab on the top of the four rubber grommets, making certain it is centered.

Assembling the Outer Frame

1. Remove the table top from the middle packing layer. Remove the right outer rail from the lower packing, and the left outer rail from the top packing.

2. Place the table on the floor. The Adam logo on the table should face the rear. Attach the outer side rails to the table top with four screws. Attach the side rails with the three screw holes facing forward, so they will align correctly with the front of the table.

3. Remove the front supporting rail from the bottom packing layer. Take four screws and attach the rail to the front upper edge, using the two remaining screw holes on each of the side rails.

4. Remove the remaining rail from the top packing layer. Use two screws to attach the rail to the lower rear frame.

5. Lift and then lower the outer table frame onto the inner table. Check to make sure the space between the granite and the table top is equal on all four sides.

6. Use the granite adjustment knob at the bottom of the inner frame to align the granite with the table top. The granite should be level and between two and five millimeters higher than the table top to ensure the most accurate measurement.

Congratulations on assembling your Anti-Vibration Table!

“We’re proud to work alongside our partners in the local community to support Sodexo’s WasteLESS week,” said Tony DeLuca, general manager, Sodexo. “Even now, post event and WasteLESS week, it’s critical that we continue to support and encourage minimizing food waste in any and all ways that we can.”

During the one-week event, students scraped their unwanted food remains into a large container in the dining hall which sat atop Adam Equipment’s GFK 330a, a floor checkweighing scale. GFK features a large 15.7” by 19.7” stainless steel platform, allowing Sodexo foodservice workers to place a container on the platform for convenient weighing of up to 330 lbs. of food. The scale remained on during the entire event, allowing students to see in real-time the increase in weight with each plate.

By the end of the week, the dining hall collected more than 1,700 lbs of food waste, which will be composted.

“I think WasteLESS week was very beneficial for us students because we were able to see how much food really goes to waste,” noted Hailey Ortiz, first-year student at Southern. “This teaches us to be more mindful and reduce the amount of food that would go to waste so that there is less harm to the environment and less food insecurity for others.”

“Food waste is a serious problem worldwide and Adam is happy to play a role in helping to reduce it and spread awareness at the local level,” said Brian Thomas, Adam Equipment’s U.S. marketing manager.

Prior to the Weigh the Waste event, Sodexo at SCSU had previously worked with Adam Equipment’s weighing equipment. Through Sodexo’s partnership with Leanpath, Adam’s CPWplus platform scale is used to weigh leftover food on the line that is then distributed to the community through the Food Recovery Network. During the 2021 – 2022 academic year, Sodexo and Southern’s Office of Sustainability saved over 8,456 lbs of food from the landfill and donated it to local non-profits.

Sodexo North America is focused on preventing all forms of waste through changes in processes, consumer education, and collaboration with external partners. Sodexo aims to follow the principles of the circular economy to ensure all waste has a beneficial use and by promoting reuse, recycling, and composting to eliminate avoidable waste going to landfills.

About Sodexo North America

Sodexo North America is part of a global, Fortune 500 company with a presence in 55 countries. Sodexo provides quality, multichannel and flexible food experiences, but also designs attractive and inclusive workplaces and shared spaces, manages and maintains infrastructure in a safe and environmentally friendly way, offers personalized support for patients or students and even creates programs fostering employee engagement. The company employs 90,066 people at thousands of sites in all 50 U.S. states, Canada, Puerto Rico and Guam, and indirectly supports tens of thousands of additional jobs through its annual purchases of $20B in goods and services from small to large businesses. Sodexo North America is committed to focusing on tangible everyday gestures and actions through its integrated services to create a better every day for everyone and build a better life for all.

About Southern Connecticut State University

Southern Connecticut State University provides exemplary graduate and undergraduate education in the liberal arts and professional disciplines. As an intentionally diverse and comprehensive university, Southern is committed to academic excellence, access, social justice, and service for the public good.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.

“The Covid-19 pandemic has made everyone much more conscious of the importance of hygiene and cleanliness,” said Tom Storey, president of Adam Equipment’s U.S. operations. “Washdown scales like Aqua Stainless Steel are perfect for applications like food production and foodservice, where scales require frequent, thorough cleaning.”

Like the original Aqua range, Aqua ABW-S has been designed for ease of use and efficiency in demanding environments like industrial factories and food processing plants. After a simple washdown, Aqua ABW-S – which is National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)-certified for food safety – is ready to go again. For additional safety, ABW-S includes blue leveling feet which increase visibility while providing support to keep the scale from sliding on a potentially wet countertop.

With an impressive rating of IP68, Aqua ABW-S offers advanced protection from dust and water, allowing it to be fully submerged in water deeper than one meter without harm to its components. Strategically placed channels in the housing and a sealed internal design protects Aqua’s components from water penetration.

Aqua Stainless Steel is available in four models that range in capacity from 9lb/4kg to 70lb/32k and readabilities from 0.0002lb/0.1g to 0.004lb/2g.

Built to last, the scales feature a grade 304 stainless steel housing and platform, along with a sealed keypad. The generously sized pan (9.6” x 7.1”/245mm x 180mm on most models and 11.8” x 8.3”/300mm x 210mm for the ABW 32S model) is removeable, making Aqua ABW-S even easier to clean and maintain.

For improved productivity and efficiency, bright front- and rear-facing 0.8”/20mm LED displays allow two users to share a single scale. ABW-S can be powered by the included AC adapter or a built-in rechargeable battery that offers up to 55 hours of on-the-go weighing.

Along with highly accurate percentage weighing and parts counting functions (including parts counting optimization that continually refines piece weight as parts are added), ABW-S simplifies checkweighing with hidden-until-needed indicators that alert the user if a sample is lower, higher or within specified limits.

To learn more about the Aqua Stainless Steel range, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/aqua-abw-s-waterproof-scales.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.

Media Contact:

Brian Thomas

Adam Equipment

press@adamequipment.com

203-790-4774

SOURCE Adam Equipment

Founded in England in 1972, Adam got its start as a seller of retail and industrial scales before branching out into designing and manufacturing its own branded products. Today, the UK-headquartered company is a leading worldwide manufacturer of professional scales and balances with branches in six countries. The planting event was the first in a series of events in each of Adam’s regional offices across the globe to mark the 50th anniversary milestone.

“As we began talking about how to celebrate our anniversary, it became clear to us that we didn’t want to just concentrate on looking backward,” said Tom Storey, president of Adam’s U.S. operations. “We’re proud of our past, certainly. But we wanted to look toward the future with something that will last, as well as give something back to the local community. Planting trees fulfilled that.”

Turning to Flanders as a partner was an easy decision, since the Woodbury nature center is conveniently located just a few towns away from Oxford and Flanders’ vision – which includes being a leading resource for environmental education, research, land preservation and stewardship – fit in perfectly with Adam’s commitment to sustainability and desire to work within the community.

Volunteers from Adam’s Oxford facility gathered at Flanders’ Van Vleck Farm & Nature Sanctuary on May 10, where they dug holes and planted 50 saplings (25 Firs and 25 Concolor Firs, sourced from local tree farm and land maintenance company The Lewis Brothers) in the nature center’s Christmas tree area, located off the Botany Trail.

Vincent D. LaFontan, MHA, executive director of Flanders, said that “the evergreen trees planted by Adam Equipment supports Flanders Tree Farm by replanting trees used during our holiday programming each year, helping Flanders maintain this sustainable natural resource at the Nature Center."

To learn more about Adam Equipment, visit www.adamequipment.com.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment, which celebrates its 50th anniversary in 2022, designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.

Available in five models ranging in capacity from 8lb/4kg to 100lb/48kg and readabilities from 0.0002lb / 0.0001kg to 0.005lb / 0.002kg, CDT differentiates itself from most counting scales on the market with the ability to connect a second, optional weighing platform. With the addition of the auxiliary platform, CDT’s capacity can be greatly expanded to accommodate a variety of uses: while CDT itself provides superior speed and accuracy for counting applications, the auxiliary platform can handle bulk parts.

While CDT is compatible with an extensive variety of bases, Adam Equipment’s GF and GB ranges are ideal. For example, when working with a larger piece weight that has very little variation in weight from piece-to-piece, a good option would be a CDT 48 paired with a high-capacity GF base. However, for a small piece weight with little variation in weight from piece-to-piece, a customer would benefit from pairing a CDT 4 with a lower-capacity GB base. The choice of pairings depends on the user’s needs. With a list price of only $695, CDT offers a better value than many dual scale competitors in the market.

In addition to the less expensive price tag, it also provides better communication via an optional USB output that many competitive products lack. Succeeding the popular CBD scale, CDT improves upon its predecessor with larger displays (for Weight, Unit Weight and Count) and easier-to-read digits (1.6” / 40mm tall), a larger pan and upgraded electronics for a superior weighing experience. CDT’s memory allows users to store up to 100 PLUs for managing frequently used parts. Durable ABS housing and a generous 11.8” x 8.3” / 300 x 210 mm Grade 304 stainless steel pan allow CDT to handle demands from warehouses and fulfillment centers to manufacturing facilities in temperatures that range from 14° to 140°F / -10° to 40°C.

The versatile CDT – which can be powered by either an included adapter or an internal rechargeable battery – can run off its long-lasting rechargeable battery for up to 70 hours between charges for flexibility in usage. CDT is ideal for quick, accurate bulk counting, including inventory and order-picking applications. Each model delivers results in grams, kilograms and pounds.

In addition to Cruiser CDT dual counting scales, the Cruiser family also includes Cruiser CCT bench counting scales and Cruiser CKT bench checkweighing scales.

To learn more about the CDT range, visit www.adamequipment.com/cdt-dual-counting-scales.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment, which celebrates its 50th anniversary in 2022, designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.

“We recognize that industry is facing growing pressure to reduce waste. One of the most obvious ways to help with this is providing products built to last longer,” said Richard Storey, Adam Equipment’s Managing Director. “The CBX perfectly represents our aim to offer our customers long term value for money and reduce industry waste.”

Ideal for use in laboratories, education, office mailrooms and production control, CBX offers both basic weighing and parts counting functionality. The versatile balance can be powered by either an included adapter or an internal rechargeable battery. For convenience, recharging may be also done via low-voltage USB-type input. Auto power-off saves energy to extend battery life, while a low battery indicator alerts the user when it’s time to recharge. The long-lasting rechargeable lithium battery (good for up to 216 hours between charges) and lightweight construction (its net weight is only 1.26lbs./572g) make CBX perfectly portable for the ultimate flexibility in usage.

CBX is available in three models: CBX 1201 (1200g capacity and 0.1g readability), CBX 3001 (3000g capacity and 0.5g readability) and CBX 6000 (6000g capacity and 1g readability). Each model delivers results in grams, pounds, ounces and Newtons. Durable ABS housing and a 5.8”/148mm square stainless steel pan allow CBX to handle demands from light office duty all the way up to harsh industrial use in temperatures that range from freezing to 104°F/40°C. The grade 304 stainless steel pan protects the scale from most materials and liquids, making cleanup fast and easy.

Easy to setup and operate, CBX offers a simple-to-use sealed keypad and a bright, backlit 0.7”/18mm LCD display. A built-in level indicator and adjustable feet ensure proper balance for optimum weighing results.

To learn more about the CBX range, visit www.adamequipment.com.

Aqua’s IP67 protection rating means it’s safe from airborne particles (such as dust) and water immersion up to a depth of one meter, making the scale ideal for applications that require frequent and repetitive cleaning. The four Aqua models range in capacity from 9lb/4kg to 70lb/32k, with readabilities from 0.001lb/0.5g to 0.01lb/5g. The scales feature overload protection to prevent damage to internal components.

A durable ABS housing, stainless steel pan (ranging from 9.6 x 7.1”/245 x 180mm to 11.8 x 8.3”/300 x 210mm, depending on the model) and sealed keypad allow Aqua to effortlessly operate in the most demanding industrial environments and keep going after just a quick washdown.

Strategically placed channels in the housing and a sealed internal design protects Aqua’s components from water penetration. The easy-to-operate Aqua offers a sleek, simplified keypad that hides certain indicators until needed for a clutter-free display. Bright front- and rear-facing 0.8”/20mm LED displays allow two users to share a single scale for improved productivity and efficiency.

Along with highly accurate percentage weighing and parts counting functions (including parts counting optimization that automatically refines piece weight as parts are added to the pan), the scale simplifies checkweighing with indicators that alert the user if a sample is lower, higher or within the preset limits.

Aqua can be powered either by an included AC adapter or users can take the compact washdown scale on the go, thanks to its internal rechargeable battery. The built-in battery offers up to 55 hours of continual use, while its auto power-off function conserves battery life for uninterrupted operation. For protection during travel to field locations, Adam Equipment offers an optional hard carrying case for the scale.

Your health and the health of our employees is paramount. While we’re restricting business travel and client visits, your Adam sales representatives will still be available to you via telephone, email and video conferencing.

We don’t anticipate any changes or disruptions to product shipments or support, but we’ll continue to keep you informed of any potential impact on operations. If you have any questions, feel free to reach out to us at (203) 790-4774 or sales@adamequipment.com.

A generously sized LCD display features large, 24mm-tall blue digits against a black background, allowing the user to easily and efficiently discern results. To allow use across multiple regions, Luna features a multilingual text and display capability.

Navigation is simple, with colour-coded buttons that allow users to perform functions with minimal training.

Luna offers a wide variety of applications for everyday lab use, such as weighing, parts counting, percentage weighing, dynamic/animal weighing, checkweighing and net total weighing.

Luna’s analytical models offer capacities from 80g to 250g with a readability of 0.0001g, while its precision models boast an impressive range of capacities from 220g to 15000g with readabilities from 0.001g to 0.1g. A built-in capacity tracker helps to guard against possible overloads.

Weighing units vary by model, though all include g, ct, GN, dr, ozt, dwt, tl.T. tl.H, tl.S, T and custom units. Certain models also include mg, N, oz, mm, kg, lb and lb:oz.

Data sharing and connecting to devices like PCs or printers is simple: for effortless connectivity, Luna comes with standard USB and RS-232 interfaces.

Luna can output reports formatted to meet Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) guidelines, simplifying recordkeeping.

Options include models that utilize external calibration using weights or internal calibration, which allows automatic calibration after a set interval or if the temperature has changed.

Robust ABS plastic construction and a stainless steel pan help make Luna both easy to clean and durable enough to withstand demanding lab use.

Media Contact:

Brian Thomas
Adam Equipment
press@adamequipment.com
203-790-4774

A new range of balances, the Luna, will take center stage at Adam’s booth. Available in both analytical and precision models, Luna offers a wide variety of applications for everyday lab use, along with a generously sized, 24mm-tall LCD display; standard USB and RS-232 interfaces; and data sharing and connectivity via standard USB and RS-232 interfaces.

The Luna range’s analytical models offer capacities from 80g to 250g with a readability of 0.0001g, while precision models provide an impressive range of capacities from 220g to 15000g with readabilities from 0.001g to 0.1g. Luna also offers a built-in capacity tracker to guard against potential overloads.

Adam will also highlight its Equinox and Solis lab balances. The two ranges both include models that deliver two to five places of readability for remarkable precision. Equinox – Adam’s most sophisticated balance to date – features a touchscreen display with icon-driven menus for intuitive operation.

Booth displays will also include Adam’s NTEP-approved Highland balance (ideal for use in the botanical industry, particularly in dispensaries), the Latitude compact scale (a workhorse for production, warehouse or field use in industries such as manufacturing, food processing, catering, packaging and veterinary) and the AVT anti-vibration table, which minimizes disruptions to weighing results caused by vibrations.

Adam products are popular throughout the laboratory industry. Uses include product research and development, food testing, forensic analysis, and pharmaceutical production. Adam Equipment has participated in Pittcon, the world's largest annual conference and exposition for laboratory science, for more than 20 years. To make an appointment to meet with Adam representatives at Pittcon, email us at sales@adamequipment.com.

Media Contact:

Brian Thomas
Adam Equipment
press@adamequipment.com
203-790-4774

Made with the same solid construction Adam's industrial scales are known for, the AGB and AFK feature three options of easy-to-clean grade 304 stainless steel pan sizes: 11.8"x15.7"/300x400mm for the AGB and 15.7"x19.7"/400x500mm or 23.6"x31.5"/600x800mm for the AGF.

The scales both feature an integrated indicator with a durable stainless steel housing, offering solid protection against dust and water.

A generous backlit LCD display offers 1.5"/40mm-high digits for easy readability. Along with an audible alarm, the convenient color-changing display shifts during checkweighing mode for at-a-glance notification if you are over, under or within a pre-set limit.

AGB and AGF can handle whatever heavy-duty weighing tasks thrown at them: Capacities for the AGB range from 16lb/8kg to 260lb/120kg, while the AGF's capacities range from 175lb/80kg to 1,320lb/600kg. Readabilities run from 0.0005lb/0.2g to 0.01lb/5g for the AGB and 0.005lb/2g to 0.05lb/0.02kg for the AGF. Weighing units for the pair include grams, kilograms, Newtons, pounds, ounces, lb:oz and custom units.

The scales offer applications such as weighing, parts counting with preset sample sizes, percentage weighing, checkweighing and check counting. A hold function freezes the displayed weight, allowing time to elapse without losing the result, while selectable digital filtering for animal/dynamic weighing provides consistent results for weighing objects in motion. The scales also feature a zero-tracking function to ensure the display returns to a zero reading.

Weighing results are easily and efficiently communicated to computers and printers through an RS-232 interface.

Power is supplied by an included 12VDC 800mA adapter, as well as an internal rechargeable battery with a typical battery life of about 90 hours per charge.

For more about the AGB and AGF scale ranges, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/agb-and-agf-bench-and-floor-scales.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment's global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa, and Germany.

During the event, Adam will feature a variety of analytical and precision balances at Stand 11069. Adam representatives will be on hand to meet with participants, to demonstrate a selection of lab balances and answer questions about any of Adam's products. The China Association for Instrumental Analysis sponsors the show, which is expected to draw nearly 20,000 visitors. 

In the spotlight will be Adam Equipment’s new Luna series of precision and analytical balances. They offer impressive performance for a variety of weighing applications. Luna models range in capacity from 80-250g for the analytical balances and 220-15,000g for the precision balances, as well as readabilities of 0.1g, 0.01g, 0.001g and 0.0001g.

The multilingual LCD display is easy to read in multiple languages and shows 24mm digits for clear results. The USB and RS-232 ports provide a quick, easy method for data communication with computers and printers. The data formatting and outputting complies  with GLP guidelines.

In addition to the Luna, Adam Equipment will showcase the new Solis and Equinox balances, both ranges available in semi-micro, analytical and precision models with internal and external calibration options. The balances are packed with a wide variety of features designed for discerning lab professionals.

The Equinox and the Solis are highly advanced lab balances that combine high capacity and superb readability in an intuitive package. They both include advanced formulation features with a built-in database.

To learn more about Equinox analytical balances, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/equinox-analytical-balances.

To learn more about Solis analytical balances, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/solis-analytical-balances.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa, and Germany. 

With its integrated washdown indicator, the Gladiator is an IP67-rated washdown scale that can tackle a diverse range of weighing and counting tasks with ease, no matter the demands of the food, pharmaceutical or industrial environment.

Combining impressive durability and solid performance, the Gladiator washdown scale provides high levels of protection. Built to endure, the hard-wired mains cable entry safeguards the scale's interior from water, dust and other harsh industrial elements. The keypad is also sealed, reinforcing security from any dirt and spills that may occur. Overall, the Gladiator's robust construction, made up of high-quality 304 grade stainless steel to prevent rusting, allows it to withstand long periods of industrial use.

The Gladiator range offers a wide selection of capacities from 8kg to 300kg and readabilities from 0.2g to 0.01kg. In addition, the series offers four different pan sizes (from 250 x 250mm to a generous 450 x 600mm) to meet a variety of application requirements.

Featuring a large display with 40mm-high digits, results can be viewed clearly. With the addition of a colour-changing backlit display, the display shifts in checkweighing mode for at-a-glance notification if you are over, under or within a pre-set limit, which is critical in busy food processing, recipe and batch weighing environments. Colour-coded keys located just under the display also facilitate quick recognition of the most frequently used buttons for intuitive operation.

The internal rechargeable battery allows the Gladiator to operate for up to 90 hours, making the scale an ideal choice for a variety of applications that may require prolonged use, especially in environments where access to electricity may be limited.

The Gladiator supports multiple applications, from the hold function that freezes the displayed weight (allowing time to elapse without losing the result) to parts counting mode to effectively cover a range of customer needs and requirements. Data recording and tracking needs are also met with GLP-compliant date and time printout capabilities and optional RS-232 interface connectivity.

The new Gladiator succeeds Adam's popular Warrior washdown scale.

For more about the IP67-rated Gladiator washdown scale range, visit https://www.adamequipment.co.uk/gladiator-washdown-scales.

About Adam Equipment
Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment's global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa and Germany.

A wide range of Adam weighing equipment will be on display in Hall P1, Stand S02.

Milton Keynes, U.K., 11 October 2019 — Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional scales and balances worldwide, will present a range of weighing equipment designed for the food industry from 18-22 October at the Fieramilano Exhibition Centre in Rho, Italy.

During the show, Adam will exhibit its food-related weighing instruments at Stand S02 in Hall P1. The weighing equipment on show will include some brand-new products from Adam, such as the LBX compact bench scale with a near-immediate response time of less than one second, Swift Price Computing Retail Scales and Gladiator IP67 rated washdown scales. Customer favourites like the CPWplus bench and floor scales, ideal for food processing environments, will also be on display.

Adam representatives will be on hand during HostMilano to meet with participants, answer any questions about Adam's products and provide informative material such as product catalogues. To learn more about the full line of weighing equipment for food processing, production, and catering before the show, visit www.adamequipment.co.uk/markets/food-service.

From catering equipment, technology, machinery to bakeries, coffee, ice-cream and pizza, not only does the Host show bring together professionals from around the world united under one roof, it also inspires innovation in both processes and finished products. More than 1,900 companies have already confirmed their participation, with over 500 events across all sectors planned.

Adam Equipment has an established European distribution centre in Felde, Germany to provide prompt customer service and ensure efficient product delivery to distributors throughout the continent. Adam Equipment has also obtained approval for a range of products with NMO in the UK and NMI in Holland, so approvals will always be valid whether you supply approved products within the UK or EU.

Adam’s weighing products are used in used in variety of food related environments and applications that professionals around the world rely on. To make an appointment to meet with Adam representatives at the show, email us at sales@adamequipment.co.uk.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewellery markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia, China and Germany to provide product support and speedy delivery to distributors.

In the spotlight will be Adam's NTEP-approved Highland balance. Ideal for use in the botanical industry, the newly approved Highland simplifies legal-for-trade measurement, lab work, field testing, and commercial applications.

• Data communication is easy with the included RS-232 and USB interfaces
• Powered by AC adapter or rechargeable battery for easy portability
• For improved accuracy, a removable draft shield eliminates air disturbances
• Internal ShockProtect® helps prevent damage from accidental overloads
• Security slot accommodates an optional Kensington-type lock and cable

Approved models are available with capacities from 100g-5000g and readabilities from 0.01g - 0.5g. For more information on the Highland approved balance, go to https://www.adamequipment.com/highland-approved-portable-precision-balances.

Other new products on display at the conference include Adam's Equinox analytical balance, and the Latitude bench scale.

Equinox balances bring remarkable precision to labs that perform highly detailed testing. Equinox is ideal for research and quality assurance facilities; science education; precision counting; production and general laboratory applications. A five-inch, color touch-screen display provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications.

We will be previewing the new Latitude scale at CSC. The Latitude features amber, green and red LEDs to indicate if a sample is under, over, or within the preset limits. Powered by the included AC adapter or internal rechargeable battery, Latitude is ideal for production, warehouse or field use. For added flexibility and convenience, you can also operate the Latitude using any USB power source, such as the USB connection in a vehicle or external USB power banks.

Additionally, Adam's LBK bench scale and GBK scale will be at the booth. GBK bench scales are approved by NTEP and Measurement Canada.

LBK is simple to use, with five weighing units and modes suitable for many different applications. A sealed keypad, ABS plastic housing and large stainless steel pan are easy to clean, making LBK ideal for measuring, portioning, or weighing samples during food preparation. LBK is well-suited for weighing blood bags in medical facilities, and veterinarians can use LBK to weigh small animals and measure compounds for treatments.

Ideal for counting, batching or routine weighing, GBK features a compact stainless steel platform that fits easily on a cart or table. For flexible positioning, the pillar-mounted display can be used without the pillar. Intuitive software helps save time and reduces errors when logging data. Powered by electricity or the built-in, rechargeable battery, GBK operates in most locations. Approved GBK models are suitable for use in trade settings where goods are sold by weight.

Adam Equipment has been deemed a Sustainable Vendor by the LEED-certified Portland Convention Center. An emblem with this designation will be on display at Adam's booth. Adam is committed to improving its sustainable practices in its global operations. Read more about our practices here.

Adam representatives will be available during the event to meet with participants, and to demonstrate balances and scales for the cannabis industry. To schedule a meeting during CSC, please email sales@adamequipment.com.

Cannabis Science Conference is the world's largest and most technical botanical science expo. Held annually, the conference assembles cannabis industry experts, instrument manufacturers, testing labs, research scientists, medical practitioners, policy makers and interested novices.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, health and fitness, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewelry markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection.

What is The Energy Challenge?
The Energy Challenge is an AstraZeneca STEM competition run in 2018-2019 for schools in the Cambridgeshire region, which culminated in a Grand Final on 4 July 2019.

Since the start of the 2018-19 academic year, 4,000 KS2 (Years 5 and 6) pupils spent 40,000 hours preparing their Energy Challenge entries with support from AstraZeneca mentors.

The Task
Aligned to the National Curriculum, The Energy Challenge was designed to inspire fun in scientific learning from a young age. To complete the challenge, classes made and recorded scientific observations and measurements, interpreted data, and drew conclusions in their own experiments. Using Adam Equipment’s triple-beam balance, pupils were able to compare the weight (g) of a variety of foods containing the same set amount of energy (kJ).

Adam Equipment provided TBB units to support the children in carrying out their experiments as the TBB provides precise, easy to read results. The ease-of-use of the TBB made the recording of experiment findings easy for the children. The TBB also provided an engaging focus for the student’s scientific enquiry, as the students could the TBB operating on a lever principle. A year 5 pupil from Robert Arkenstall Primary School in Haddenham who took part in The Energy Challenge said, “I don’t normally enjoy science, but this was good because it was real, with real scientists!”

To complete The Energy Challenge, pupils produced a poster of their experiment hypothesis, methodology and findings, which they presented in teams to a panel of expert judges during the regional heats and the Grand Final.

Many of the posters created by the pupils featured the TBB triple-beam balance, which was great to see. Adam Equipment loves seeing their weighing equipment being used as part of great causes like The Energy Challenge, inspiring the next generation of scientists!

To Learn more about the Energy Channel visit: https://theenergychallenge.co.uk/

What Is A Mechanical Triple Beam Balance?
Regularly used in education to teach students mass measurement concepts as well as refine their observation and interpretation skills, a mechanical triple beam balance is used to find the unknown mass of an object by comparing it against a known mass.

Not all mechanical balances have a triple beam design. However, this type of mechanical balance provides precise increments in hundreds, tens and units, meaning results will always be of the highest accuracy. The object being weighed is balanced against three counterweights located on each of the three beams and these adjustable counterweights can be moved in either direction. Once the pan is level after adjustment of the counterweights, the unknown mass of the object being weighed has been found and readings can be taken as necessary.

Unlike a digital balance, a mechanical balance requires no form of electrical power, making it a great cost-effective addition to any classroom or educational environment.    

Find out more about our very own patented triple-beam mechanical balance by visiting https://www.adamequipment.co.uk/tbb-triple-beam-balances

About Adam Equipment
For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewellery markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia, China and Germany to provide product support and speedy delivery to distributors.

About The Energy Challenge
The Energy Challenge is a science-focused competition run by AstraZeneca for pupils in Year 5 and Year 6, which has run throughout the 2018–19 academic year.

It has encouraged children to have fun working scientifically and helped children recognise the impact of diet and exercise on their bodies through a series of experiments and investigations. The Energy Challenge is aligned with the National Curriculum.

The challenge was made available to all maintained and academy primary schools and special schools across Cambridgeshire and surrounding areas. A series of local heats were followed by a Grand Final hosted by AstraZeneca on 4 July 2019.

For further information please visit: https://theenergychallenge.co.uk/

About AstraZeneca
AstraZeneca is a global, science-led biopharmaceutical company that focuses on the discovery, development and commercialisation of prescription medicines, primarily for the treatment of diseases in three therapy areas - Oncology, Cardiovascular & Metabolic Diseases and Respiratory. The Company also is selectively active in the areas of autoimmunity, neuroscience and infection. AstraZeneca operates in over 100 countries and its innovative medicines are used by millions of patients worldwide.

Adam Equipment (United Kingdom) - Adam Equipment, a leading worldwide manufacturer of professional scales and balances, expanded its line of counting scale and indicators with the release of its new BCT line of bench and floor scales, along with its newly-released AE 504 indicator, which features an integrated label printer.

Combining a full range of counting applications with a built-in label printer into a single compact solution, the highly accurate BCT scale and AE 504 indicator allow users to increase accuracy and save time counting multiple items of all sizes, ranging from small spare parts to large boxes. The addition of a built-in label printer – which allows users to add barcodes, QR codes, pictures and logos to the labels in English, French, German or Spanish – removes the risk of errors in transcribing counts by printing key data during the counting process. The BCT and AE 504 are ideal for inventory purposes, as well as research and development.

The BCT line comprises six different models, ranging in capacities from 35lb/16kg to 660lb/300kg and readabilities from 0.001lb/0.5g to 0.05lb/0.02kg, with two platform sizes (11.8 x 15.7”/300 x 400mm and 15.7 x 19.7”/400 x 500mm).

The BCT, with a die-cast aluminum base and easy-to-clean stainless steel platform, and the AE 504, with its sturdy, lightweight ABS plastic housing, feature rugged construction ideal for industrial use, inventory tasks, batching, shipping and receiving. With the indicator attached to the included pillar, the BCT can be used on the floor or a bench.

The AE 504 and BCT offer a sealed keypad with a large, easy-to-read backlit LCD screen featuring 0.9”-tall digits. The color-coded keypad allows for quick and easy configuration. Additionally, a numeric keypad can be used to manually enter tare weights, unit weights and sample sizes, along with serving a secondary function to add letters when needed.

The indicator offers a preset tare, four weighing units (grams, kilograms, pounds and ounces) and 1000+ PLU (product look up) memories.

An RS-232 interface provides a fast, convenient connection to computers and external printers, outputting weight, unit weight and count. The AE 504 allows user-selectable scale division and 1:60,000 resolution.

An internal rechargeable battery allows the scales to operate for approximately 70 hours if electricity is unavailable. Energy-saving options include an auto power-off option and a programmable backlight for the LCD screen that can be set to “always on,” “always off” or “light only when weighing.”

About Adam Equipment:

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa, and Germany.

For more information about this article from Adam Equipment click here.

Combining a full suite of weighing applications with a built-in label printer into a single compact solution, the 11 models of BKT scales and the AE 503 indicator offer value, durability and convenience for all manufacturing, shipping, packing and distribution needs. The ability to fully customize label designs – including output in English, French, German or Spanish, as well as the addition of barcodes, QR codes, pictures and logos – to suit a diverse range of printing applications, along with a wide range of capacities and base sizes, mean the BKT and AE 503 can be easily optimized for any user’s needs.

The BKT line comprises 11 different models, ranging in capacities from 16lb/8kg to 1,320lb/600kg and readabilities from 0.0002lb/0.1g to 0.1lb/0.05kg with three platform sizes (11.8 x 15.7”/300 x 400mm, 15.7 x 19.7”/400 x 500mm and 23.6 x 31.5”/600 x 800mm).

Features include two Hold modes: one for weighing moving objects (such as animals) and Peak Hold, which measures the highest amount of force something can withstand (such as how much force a cardboard box can take before buckling damaging its contents).

The die-cast aluminum base and easy-to-clean stainless steel platform of the BKT, along with the sturdy, lightweight ABS plastic housing of the AE 503, are made to stand up to industrial conditions. The pair can be placed on a bench or on the floor, with the indicator attached to the included pillar.

The AE 503 incorporates a sealed keypad with a large, easy-to-read backlit LCD screen featuring 1.3”-tall digits. The color-coded keypad allows for quick and easy configuration. The indicator offers a hold function and provides 10 weighing units (grams, kilograms, pounds, ounces, lb:oz, carats, drams, mommes, taels and tons).

An RS-232 interface provides a fast, convenient connection to computers and external printers, outputting weight, unit weight and count. The AE 503 allows user-selectable scale division and 1:60,000 resolution.

An internal rechargeable battery allows the scale to operate if electricity is unavailable. The AE 503 battery can run for up to 150 hours on a charge. An auto power-off option helps conserve energy, along with a backlight for the LCD screen that can be set to “always on,” “always off” or “light only when weighing.”

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical,

education, industrial, legal cannabis, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa, and Germany.

Media Contact:
Brian Thomas
Adam Equipment
press@adamequipment.com
203-790-4774

Indutrade is comprised of more than 200 companies globally and employs almost 7000 people. It is listed on Swedish Nasdaq Stockholm Stock Exchange.

Alan Storey, chairman and founder of Adam Equipment, said the sale will allow the British-based company he created to continue to grow and compete globally.

“Indutrade was the perfect choice as we share the same business values,” Mr. Storey said. “They will provide the support and foundation to help the company develop in the future and I feel confident I’m leaving Adam Equipment in good hands.”

“We are very pleased to welcome Adam Equipment to the Indutrade family, and they will now join Indutrade’s Business Area Measurement & Sensor Technology,” said Patrik Stolpe, Senior Vice President of the Indutrade Group. He added that Adam’s current management team and employees will continue in place with little change to daily operations, customers, or suppliers.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment was founded in 1972. It designs and manufactures precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam Equipment’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, and animal/veterinary markets. Its head office is in Milton Keynes, England and has extensive operations and holdings in the United States, China, Australia, South Africa, and Germany.

About Indutrade

Indutrade is an international technology and industrial group that sells and develops high-tech components, systems and services. By having good knowledge about customers’ systems and processes, combined with a high level of technical expertise, Indutrade aspires to be the most value-creating partner for customers and suppliers alike. With a decentralized structure, it operates in 30 countries and four continents. Indutrade has been listed on Swedish Nasdaq Stockholm Stock Exchange since 2005.

www.indutrade.com

Milton Keynes, U.K., 19 March, 2019 — Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional balances worldwide, will present lab balances, scales and accessories at stand H77 at Forum Labo Paris from 26-28 March at Paris expo Porte de Versailles in France.

During the show, Adam will spotlight the Equinox series and the Solis series of balances. Both balance lines include models that deliver two to five places of readability, bringing remarkable precision and valuable features to labs that perform highly detailed testing. Multilingual capability facilitates use in various regions.

Equinox is ideal for research and quality assurance labs, science education, or any application needing exceptionally precise results. Semi-micro models have capacities up to 220g with 0.01mg readability. Analytical models feature capacities from 120g to 510g and 0.1mg readability, and precision models offer capacities from 360g to 8,200g and readabilities of 1mg and 0.01g. A five-inch color touchscreen display provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications and functions.

With a high-resolution graphic display and many built-in functions, Solis balances provide an outstanding solution for complex lab tasks. Available in a wide selection of models, the Solis series offers capacities ranging from 120g to 8,200g with readabilities of 0.1mg, 1mg and 0.01g. Dual-range, semi-micro analytical models boast capacities of 120g and 220g and a readability of 0.01mg.

PMB moisture analyzer will also be on display at Forum Labo. PMB analyzers allow samples to be dried quickly, saving testing time in the laboratory and the field. The PMB's automatic test-setting function enables easy recall for frequent testing of the same items without additional programming. USB and RS-232 interfaces provide connectivity, while a second USB port allows storage of test programs and data on a flash drive.

Adam’s professional weighing products are used in product research and development, food testing, forensic analysis, and pharmaceutical production. To make an appointment to meet with Adam representatives at the show, email us at sales@adamequipment.co.uk.

About Adam Equipment

Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional balances worldwide, will present lab balances, scales, and accessories at booth #2454 at Pittcon from March 17-21 at the Pennsylvania Convention Center in Philadelphia.

During the show, Adam will spotlight Equinox and Solis balances. Both balance lines include models that deliver two to five places of readability, bringing remarkable precision and valuable features to labs that perform highly detailed testing.

Also on display at the booth will be moisture analyzers, and the NTEP-approved Highland portable precision balance, ideal for use in the cannabis industry. Adam Equipment will also be previewing a brand new range of analytical and precision lab balances at the exhibition. Contact us to make an appointment to see the new range of balances.

Equinox is ideal for research and quality assurance labs, science education, or any application needing exceptionally precise results. Semi-micro models have capacities up to 220g with 0.01mg readability. Analytical models feature capacities from 120g to 510g and 0.1mg readability, and precision models offer capacities from 360g to 8,200g and readabilities of 1mg and 0.01g.

A color touchscreen display provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications and functions. The five-inch screen is generously sized, offering 800 X 480 pixel resolution for excellent visibility. Users can customize the display by choosing one of five color presets to change the appearance of the buttons, and can also select black or white for the display background.

With a high-resolution graphic display and numerous built-in functions, Solis analytical, milligram and precision balances provide an outstanding solution for complex lab tasks. Available in a wide selection of models, the Solis series offers capacities ranging from 120g to 8,200g with readabilities of 0.1mg, 1mg and 0.01g. Dual-range, semi-micro analytical models boast capacities of 120g and 220g and a readability of 0.01mg.

Users can readily view information on the amply sized display, which features multilingual capability to facilitate use in various regions. Quickly check remaining balance capacity on the tracker located prominently on the left side of the display.

Adam products are popular in a variety of labs including product research and development, food testing, forensic analysis, and pharmaceutical production. This marks Adam Equipment’s 20th year as a participant in Pittcon, the world's largest annual conference and exposition for laboratory science. To make an appointment to meet with Adam representatives at Pittcon, email us at sales(at)adamequipment(dot)com.

About Adam Equipment

OXFORD, Conn., March 4, 2019  -- Adam Equipment, a leading manufacturer of professional scales and balances worldwide, announces the availability of its new AE 403 digital weight indicator. The AE 403 features stainless steel housing that is IP67 rated, so the indicator can be hosed down or pressure washed after use.

Durable construction and washdown capability make the AE 403 an excellent choice for industrial weighing. This indicator performs well at food processing plants, in farm environments, on loading docks, or for shipping and receiving tasks. The AE 403 offers features and functions for numerous applications including weighing, parts counting, percentage weighing, animal/dynamic weighing, and peak hold.

A large backlit LCD boasts 40mm/1.6-inch-high digits that are easily viewed under any lighting conditions, reducing the chance of user error when recording results. Checkweighing is fast and easy, as the display changes color when the weight is over, under, or within limits. A capacity tracker on the display helps users easily monitor overloads. The keypad is simple to operate, with a highlighted tare key and low-battery indicator.

The AE 403 indicator can connect with the Adam relay box, which allows triggers to be set to control additional devices, depending upon the user's need. This function is used in industrial settings and allows the scales to work with other items such as a motor for filling, or checkweighing lights to signal users.

Using the included bracket and hardware, the AE 403 easily can be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface, enabling greater flexibility for viewing results on the display. An internal rechargeable battery means the indicator can operate even if electricity is unavailable. It's straightforward to transmit results to computers or printers using the RS-232 interface. The AE 403 works in tandem with Adam scales, including the following:

PT Platform Scale

-The PT offers a durable diamond-plate surface and optional ramps for streamlined loading and unloading.

PT Stainless Steel Platform Scale

-Combine the IP66-rated PT stainless steel platform with the AE 403 indicator for a complete washdown weighing solution useful for rugged applications.

AELP Pallet Beams

-Outfitted with built-in wheels and handles, AELP pallet beams can be quickly set up and moved, providing a flexible solution to weigh oversized or bulky items.

PTM Platform Scale

-The low-profile PTM platform scale has integrated ramps, along with handles and wheels that enable portability in a warehouse or medical facility.

The new AE 403 replaces the AE402 weight indicator. To learn more about AE 403 indicators, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/ae-403-indicators.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam's global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, and animal/veterinary markets. With operations in the United Kingdom, United States, China, Australia, South Africa and throughout Europe, Adam Equipment can provide prompt customer service and ensure expeditious product delivery to distributors worldwide.

Adam Equipment, a leading provider of balances worldwide, will be participating in Medlab from February 4 to 7 at the Dubai International Convention and Exhibition Centre, United Arab Emirates. During the event, Adam will present a selection of products, including balances, scales, moisture analysers, and anti-vibration tables at stand Z1.B59. In the spotlight will be Adam’s newest products: Equinox and Solis lab balances, and Latitude compact bench scales.

Offering superb precision, the Equinox series includes semi-micro, analytical and precision models. A colour touchscreen display provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications and functions. The five-inch screen is generously sized, offering 800 X 480 pixel resolution for remarkable visibility. Customize the display by choosing one of five colour presets to change the appearance of the buttons Equinox contains a formulation and recipe function and a 3000-item database, allowing users to store and recall ingredients, sample weights and checkweighing limits. View a video on the Equinox.

With a high-resolution graphic display and intuitive features, Solis is an outstanding choice for complex lab weighing tasks. Available in a wide selection of models, the Solis series includes semi-micro, analytical and precision models with capacities up to 8,200g. Dual range, semi-micro models boast capacities of 120g and 220g and readabilities of 0.01mg in the fine range. Simple to operate, Solis contains easy-to-read buttons and helpful navigation arrows. Data is readily visible on the amply sized graphic display, and multilingual capability facilitates use in various regions. View a video on the Solis.

Ideal for weighing blood bags, Latitude compact bench scales deliver exceptionally fast results in any medical setting. Four models offer capacities up to 30kg and readabilities from 0.5g to 5g. Latitude’s power options are superior to comparable scales, as it runs on the included adapter or rechargeable battery that offers a remarkable 240 hours of operation. USB connection is standard, so the scale can be charged with any USB power source, such as a portable battery pack or a car USB port. Latitude simplifies checkweighing, with three coloured LEDs that show if the weight is over, under or within set limits. The heavy-duty stainless steel platform is simple to clean and features contours to help keep items on the pan. Watch a video about Latitude.

During Medlab, Adam representatives will be available to meet with visitors and answer questions about any of the company’s scales and balances for medical and lab applications. To arrange a meeting with an Adam representative during Medlab, email sales(at)adamequipment(dot)co.uk or call +44 (0)1908 274545.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 40 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewellery markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia and China to provide product support and speedy delivery to distributors. For more information about the company and its products, go to http://www.adamequipment.com.

OXFORD, Conn., Jan. 15, 2019 /PRNewswire/ -- Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional weighing equipment, is now offering its new Cruiser CCT bench counting scales. Ideal for use in warehouses, manufacturing processes, and production facilities, Cruiser (CCT) scales are useful for any counting application. 

Constructed of durable grade 304 stainless steel, CCT platforms are easy to clean and feature contours to help keep items on the pan. Cruiser CCT is ideal for inventory and stock control tasks or check counting during packaging processes. Quickly verify the number of pieces in a container to reduce waste when filling orders or packing shipments. Intuitive software is user-friendly and keeps track of the count, automatically optimizing the unit weight for greater accuracy.

Easily visible in any lighting conditions, three separate backlit displays simultaneously show total weight, piece weight, and count in one convenient location. For fast configuration and easy operation, the CCT stores up to 199 PLUs in memory. Color-coded keys allow fast recognition of the most frequently used buttons, speeding up counting tasks. Quickly enter known sample weights on the full numeric keypad.

Transmit results to computers or printers using the RS-232 connection. Optional USB interface is available.

The level indicator and non-slip adjustable feet ensure proper scale setup to ensure optimum weighing results. Cruiser CCT contains load cell protection, helping prevent damage to internal components from overloads.

To conserve battery life, program the display to be "always on," "always off" or to light only when weighing. The CCT features a compact design, making it easy to transport between locations within a facility during inventory procedures.

Watch the Cruiser CCT counting scale video.

About Adam Equipment
For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, health and fitness, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewelry markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia, China and Germany to provide product support and speedy delivery to distributors.

Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional weighing equipment, is pleased to introduce its new Cruiser bench checkweighing scales. Cruiser checkweighing (CKT) scales feature seven built-in applications and are ideal for production, warehouse or field use in various industries. 

The new Cruiser checkweighing range includes models with standard, high-resolution, and ultra-high resolution. With sturdy construction and heavy-duty stainless steel platforms, CKT is tough enough to withstand demanding use in factories and manufacturing facilities.

A large backlit LCD is easily visible in any lighting conditions. The programmable backlight can be can be customized to be "always on," "always off" or to light only when weighing. To facilitate the checkweighing process, the Cruiser CKT display changes colors to show if a sample is under, over, or within the preset limits.

For efficient operation in production or warehouse applications, Cruiser CKT scales can store and recall over/under limits. Cruiser checkweighing scales connect with computers and printers using an RS-232 port; a USB port is optional.

Each Cruiser model features adjustable non-slip feet and a level indicator to ensure proper scale setup and optimum weighing results. Load cell protection prevents damage to internal components from overloads. The sealed keypad is easy to clean and protects internal components against dirt and spills. Cruiser checkweighing scales are powered by AC adapter or an optional rechargeable battery.

For counting, weighing, and checkweighing tasks, Cruiser checkweighing scales can expedite the job, reducing waste and overages. To learn more about Cruiser models, visit https://www.adamequipment.com/cruiser-bench-checkweighing-scales.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, health and fitness, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewelry markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia, China and Germany to provide product support and speedy delivery to distributors.

AE Adam, a division of world-class balance and scale manufacturer Adam Equipment, is presenting a selection of weighing products for health and fitness, medical, lab and veterinary use at Medica 2018. The trade fair runs 12-15 November at the Düsseldorf Fairgrounds, Düsseldorf, Germany. Located at Stand C17 in Hall 3A, the exhibit will showcase Adam Equipment’s lab balances, scales and moisture analysers, including Equinox and Solis balances and the Latitude bench scale.

Equinox and Solis semi-micro, analytical and precision balances are ideal for medical facilities, as they feature an exceptional combination of high capacity and analytical readability. A unique offering in both the Equinox and Solis range are models with 410g and 510g capacities and a readability of 0.1mg. Both Equinox and Solis meet top standards of accuracy and precision for high-tech labs performing pipette calibration, quality control testing, sample preparation and other complex tasks.

EQUINOX
Offering superb precision, Equinox is our most advanced line of balances to date. Equinox provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications and functions. A five-inch color touchscreen display features 800 X 480 pixel resolution for excellent visibility.

SOLIS
With a high-resolution graphic display and intuitive features, Solis is ideal for research and testing labs. Data is readily visible on the amply sized graphic display. Multilingual capability facilitates use in various regions. Quickly check for overloads on the capacity tracker located prominently on the left side of the display.

PMB – Easy-to-use, rapid response time, superior data communication to record and transmit results quickly.

Medica attracts nearly 130,000 visitors and more than 5,200 exhibitors from nearly 70 countries, bringing together healthcare industry professionals to learn about cutting-edge technology and new products. To meet with an Adam representative at the show, email us at info@aeadam.de. You can reach the AE ADAM Felde office at:

• Phone: +49-(0)4340-40300-0
• Fax: +49-(0)4340-40300-20
• Email: info(at)aeadam.de
• https://www.aeadam.de/
  

About AEAdam and Adam Equipment
Located in Felde, Germany, AEAdam is a wholly owned subsidiary of Adam Equipment LTD. For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam’s global distribution network serves the laboratory, medical, education, industrial, food, and animal/veterinary markets. With operations in the United Kingdom, United States, China, Australia, South Africa, and throughout Europe, Adam Equipment can provide prompt customer service and ensure expeditious product delivery to distributors worldwide. For more information about the company and its products, visit https://www.adamequipment.com, or in Germany go to https://www.aeadam.de/.

Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional weighing equipment, announced today that its new Latitude bench scales are shipping. Latitude compact bench scales deliver an excellent value for production, warehouse or field use, in industries such as manufacturing, food processing, catering, packaging and veterinary.

Featuring a sleek, compact design, Latitude fits readily on a small desk or in work areas with limited space. Its solid construction includes sturdy ABS plastic housing that is lightweight, so Latitude is portable yet durable enough for industrial use. A large, grade 304 stainless steel pan removes easily for cleaning.

The scale is simple to use, as it contains just five keys that are color-coded to highlight the most frequently used functions. The keypad is sealed, so dirt or spills can be wiped up quickly.

Latitude is powered by the included AC adapter or internal rechargeable battery. The battery operates for 240 hours on a charge, so you don't have to worry about losing power. For added convenience and unrestricted portability, you can also charge and operate Latitude using any USB power source, such as the USB port in a vehicle or external USB power banks. The programmable auto power-off feature helps save electricity by turning off the scale when it's not in use.

A zero-tracking feature ensures that the display returns to zero after each measurement, expediting the process of weighing multiple items in rapid succession. An audible overload alarm warns when the weight exceeds the scale's capacity. External calibration allows verification and adjustment with weights.

Latitude offers a variety of modes, including parts counting, checkweighing and percentage weighing.

Key Benefits:

• Results are displayed in under 1 ½ seconds, speeding up processing time for faster throughput.
• Accelerate quality control and packaging tasks with Latitude's checkweighing function, reducing waste and overages. Amber, green and red LEDs on the Latitude indicate if a sample is under, over, or within the preset limits.
• Improve efficiency during inventory tasks and perform parts counting with ease using preset sample sizes.
• A fully charged battery operates for an impressive 240 hours, ensuring task completion without power loss.
• For added flexibility, Latitude can be operated using an external USB power source.

The Latitude replaces Adam's popular LBK series.

For more details about Latitude compact bench scales, visit www.adamequipment.com/latitude-compact-bench-scales.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide. Adam's global distribution network serves the laboratory, health and fitness, education, industrial, food, jewelry and animal/veterinary markets. With operations in the United Kingdom, United States, China, Australia, South Africa and throughout Europe, Adam Equipment can provide prompt customer service and ensure expeditious product delivery to distributors worldwide.

Milton Keynes, United Kingdom, 23 Oct. 2018 — Adam Equipment, a leading provider of professional weighing equipment, will display a selection of balances, scales, and moisture analysers at stand F1 during Lab Innovations from 31 Oct.-1 Nov. 2018 at the National Exhibition Centre, Birmingham, United Kingdom. At the event, Adam will highlight its two newest lab balance lines — Equinox and Solis.

Both of Adam Equipment’s latest balance ranges include semi-micro, analytical, and precision models, and bring valuable features to labs that perform highly detailed testing. Solis and Equinox balances are ideal for use in research and quality assurance labs; science education; precision counting; and production and manufacturing applications.

Delivering superb precision, Equinox and Solis offer capacities up to 8,200g and readabilities of 0.01mg, 0.1mg, 1mg and 0.01g. A unique offering in both ranges is models with 410g and 510g capacities and a readability of 0.1mg, providing an exceptional value of high capacity and analytical readability.

Equinox balances feature a color touchscreen display that provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications. The five-inch screen offers 800X480 pixel resolution for excellent visibility. Equinox has a 3,000-item database that allows you to store and recall ingredients, sample weights and checkweighing limits. The formulation and recipe function allows you to either recall a stored formulation from the database or manually add items and track the ingredients of each item. Results can be saved to a USB drive or transmitted to a printer.

With a high-resolution graphic display, easy-to-read buttons and helpful navigation arrows, the Solis is an outstanding choice for complex lab weighing tasks. Dual-range, semi-micro models boast capacities of 120g and 220g and readabilities of .01mg in the fine range. Data is readily visible on the amply sized display, while multilingual capability facilitates use in various regions. Quickly check for overloads on the capacity tracker located prominently on the left side of the display.

Adam products are perfect for a variety of labs including product research and development, food testing, forensic analysis, and pharmaceutical production. Lab Innovations is one of largest gatherings of laboratory manufacturers and suppliers in the United Kingdom. To make an appointment to meet with Adam representatives at Lab Innovations, email us at sales@adamequipment.co.uk.

About Adam Equipment

For more than 45 years, Adam Equipment has designed and manufactured precision balances and scales for professionals worldwide in the laboratory, health and fitness, education, industrial, food, animal/veterinary and jewellery markets. Adam is committed to offering an extensive selection of weighing equipment with best-in-class value. Headquartered in the United Kingdom, the company has strategically established offices in the United States, South Africa, Australia, China and Germany to provide product support and speedy delivery to distributors.